Technical Handbook - Thorn

Lighting people and places
Thorn Lighting Main Offices
Australia
Thorn Lighting Pty Limited
43 Newton Road, Wetherill Park
NSW 2164
Tel: (02) 8786 6000
Fax: (02) 9612 2700
E-mail: infoaustralia@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.com.au
Austria
Thorn Licht GmbH
Donau-City-Straße 11,
1220 Wien, Austria
Tel: (43) 1 202 66 11
Fax: (43) 1 202 66 11 12
E-mail: office.at@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.at
China
Thorn Lighting (Guangzhou) Operations Ltd,
No.12 Lian Yun Road, Eastern Section,
GETDD, Guangzhou 510530, China
Tel: (86) 20 3228 2706
Fax: (86) 20 3228 1777
E-mail: sales.cn@thornlighting.com
Thorn Lighting (Tianjin) Co. Ltd
332 Hongqi Road, Tianjin 300190,
China
Tel: (86) 22 8369 2303
Fax: (86) 22 8369 2302
E-mail: info.tj@thornlighting.com
Czech Republic
Thorn Lighting CS spol. s.r.o.,
Na Březince 6/930, 150 00 Praha 5
Czech Republic
Tel: (420) 224 315 252
Fax: (420) 233 326 313
E-mail: thorn.cz@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.cz
Denmark
Thorn Lighting A/S
Albuen 44, 6000 Kolding, Denmark
Tel: (45) 7696 3600
Fax: (45) 7696 3601
E-mail: info.dk@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.dk
France
Thorn Europhane SA
156 Boulevard Haussmann,
Cedex 08, Paris 75379, France
Tel: (33) 1 49 53 6262
Fax: (33) 1 49 53 6240
Website: www.thornlighting.fr
Hong Kong
Thorn Lighting (Hong Kong) Limited
Unit 4301, Level 43, Tower 1,
Metroplaza,223 Hing Fong Road,
Kwai Chung, N.T., Hong Kong
Tel: (852) 2578 4303
Fax: (852) 2887 0247
E-mail: info.hk@thornlighting.com
India
Thorn Lighting India Pvt. Ltd
RH-2 Nirav CHS, 636A, 90 Ft. D.P. Road,
Near Thakur Polytechnic
400 101 Mumbai, India
Tel: (91) 22285 41056
Fax: (91) 22285 1120
E-mail: international_sales@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.com
Ireland
Thorn Lighting (Ireland) Limited
320 Harold’s Cross Road,
Dublin 6W, Ireland
Tel: (353) 1 4922 877
Fax: (353) 1 4922 724
E-mail: dublinsales@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.co.uk
Italy
Thorn Europhane Spa
Via G Di Vittorio, 2, Cadriano di Granarolo,
Bologna 40057, Italy
Tel: (39) 051 763391
Fax: (39) 051 763088
E-mail: info@thornlighting.it
Website: www.thornlighting.it
New Zealand
Thorn Lighting (NZ) Ltd
399 Rosebank Road, P O Box 71134,
Rosebank, Auckland 7, New Zealand
Tel: (64) 9 828 7155
Fax: (64) 9 828 7591
E-mail: info.NZ@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.co.nz
Norway
Thorn Lighting AS
Strømsveien 344, 1081 Oslo,
Norway
Tel: (47) 22 82 07 00
Fax: (47) 22 82 07 01
E-mail: info.no@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.no
Poland
Thorn Lighting Polska Sp.z.o.o.,
Ul. Gazowa 26A, Wrocław 50-513,
Poland
Tel: (48) 71 7833 740
Fax: (48) 71 3366 029
E-mail: thorn.pl@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.pl
Russia
Thorn Lighting
Novoslobodskaya Str., 21, office 406
Business Center “Novoslobodskaya 21”,
Moscow 127030, Russia
Tel: (7) 495 981 35 41
Fax: (7) 495 981 35 42
E-mail: anna.kisteneva@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.ru
Singapore
Thorn Lighting (Singapore) Pte Ltd
5 Kaki Bukit Crescent, 04-02 Koyotech
Building, 416238 Singapore
Tel: (65) 6844 5800
Fax: (65) 6745 7707
E-mail: info.sg@thornlighting.com
Sweden
Thorn Lighting AB
Industrigatan, Box 305, SE-261 23
Landskrona, Sweden
Tel: (46) 418 520 00
Fax: (46) 418 265 74
E-mail: info.se@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.se
United Arab Emirates
Thorn Lighting Ltd Dubai
Al Shoala Building, Office 301,
Block E, Airport road, P.O. Box 1200,
Deira, Dubai, UAE
Tel: (971) 4 2940181
Fax: (971) 4 2948838
E-mail: tlluae@emirates.net.ae
Website: www.thornlighting.com
Thorn Gulf LLC
Al Shoala Building, Office 301/2, Block E,
Airport road, P.O. Box 22672, Deira,
Dubai, UAE
Tel: (971) 4 2948938
Fax: (971) 4 2948838
E-mail: thorng@emirates.net.ae
Website: www.thornlighting.com
United Kingdom
Thorn Lighting Limited
Silver Screens, Elstree Way, Borehamwood,
Hertfordshire, WD6 1FE, UK
Tel: (44) 20 8732 9800
Fax: (44) 20 8732 9801
E-mail: brochures.uk@thornlighting.com
Thorn Olympics Sports Lighting Team
Tel: 07796 303176
E-mail: olympicsteamuk@thornlighting.com
International Sales
Thorn Lighting Limited
Silver Screens, Elstree Way, Borehamwood,
Hertfordshire, WD6 1FE, UK
Tel: (44) 20 8732 1915
Fax: (44) 20 8732 1911
E-mail: international_sales@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.com
www.thornlighting.com
Thorn Lighting is constantly developing and improving its products. All descriptions, illustrations, drawings and specifications in this publication present only
general particulars and shall not form part of any contract. The right is reserved to change specifications without prior notification or public announcement.
All goods supplied by the company are supplied subject to the company’s General Conditions of Sale, a copy of which is available on request.
All measurements are in millimetres and weights in kilograms unless otherwise stated.
Publication Date: 07/09
Technical Handbook
Technical Handbook

Editor
Peter Thorns BSc(Hons) CEng MCIBSE MSLL
Contributors
Patricia El-Baamrani; Lou Bedocs; Karl Flax; Stefan Hauer;
Pat Holley; Hugh King; Jan-Erik Jerleke; Iain Macrae;
Robin Ostlin; Paul Stranks
This is the fifth edition of the Technical Handbook
Copyright © Thorn Lighting. All rights reserved. No part of
this publication may be reproduced in any form, without
prior permission in writing from Thorn Lighting, except for the
quotation of brief passages in reviews. While Thorn has made
every effort to credit the copyright owners for the illustrations
and photographs used herein, there may be omissions, for
which the company apologises.
Picture credits:
Danny Maddocks; Chris Gascoigne; Mike Gee;
Richard Seymour and Alan Turner
Graphics: Juice Creative
Price £15 GBP/€20 EUR. Not for resale.
|
Glossary
Spill Light
Stray light from a luminaire that incidentally illuminates nearby
objects or surfaces within the public environment. Can be a
cause of ‘light trespass’.
Spine
See batten
Track
A linear bus bar system providing one to three main circuits or
a low voltage supply to which display lighting (spotlights) can
be connected and disconnected at will along the length of the
system.
Transformer
Transformers reduce the line voltage (for instance 230V) to
the lower voltage required for operating low-voltage halogen
lamps. This will generally be 12V.
Trunking
Trunking usually provides mechanical fixings for the luminaires
as well as electrical connection.
Uniformity
The ratio of the minimum illuminance to the average illuminance
over the specified area.
Visual performance
The ability to perceive detail and carry out the visual tasks.
Visual comfort
Our feeling of ease or well being within the visual field.
Visual satisfaction
The qualitative impression of a lit space.
Glossary |
251

Contents
1 Introduction 5
2 The Mechanics of Seeing 7
2.1 What is light? 7
2.2 The eye and vision 7
2.3 Lighting fundamentals 8
3 Controlling Light 9
3.1 Reflection 9
3.2 Transmission 10
3.3 Refraction 10
4 Australian Standards 11
4.1 Luminaire Manufacture 11
4.2 Interior Lighting Standards 11
4.3 Building Code of Australia 11
4.4 Exterior Lighting Standards 12
5 Recommendations for Good Lighting 13
5.1 Indoor workplaces 13
5.2 Outdoor workplaces 13
5.3 Sports 13
5.4 Emergency 13
5.5 Roads 13
5.6 Tunnel 13
6 Applications and Techniques 41
6.1 General Considerations 41
6.2 Office 44
6.3 Education 50
6.4 Industry indoor 57
6.5 Industry outdoor 64
6.6 Healthcare 71
6.7 Super/hypermarket 80
6.8 Road lighting 88
6.9 Urban – decorative roadlighting and amenity areas 96
6.10 Urban – architectural floodlighting 107
6.11 Sports lighting 111
7 Specific Techniques 127
7.1 Indoor lighting controls (ILC) 127
7.2 Lighting for display screen equipment 133
7.3 Light for learning 135
7.4 Emergency lighting 139
7.5 Low mount road lighting 147
7.6 Road tunnel lighting 151
Contents | 3

4 |
7.7 Lighting maintenance 154
7.8 Control of obtrusive light 164
7.9 Lighting for crime prevention 169
7.10 Lighting and health 173
7.11 Sustainability 176
7.12 Outdoor lighting controls (OLC) 179
8 Checklists 183
8.1 Life cycle analysis 183
8.2 Economics 185
8.3 Lighting energy numeric indicator (LENI) 187
9 Lamps, LEDs and Circuits 193
9.1 Choosing the right lamp 193
9.2 Tungsten halogen lamps 195
9.3 Fluorescent lamps 195
9.4 Compact fluorescent lamps 198
9.5 Metal halide lamps 199
9.6 Sodium vapour high pressure lamps 200
9.7 Mercury vapour lamps 201
9.8 Induction lamps 202
9.9 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) 202
9.10 Lamp coding systems – LBS/ILCOS 206
9.11 Characteristic values of the major lamps 208
9.12 Energy efficiency of luminaires 221
9.13 Circuits 221
9.14 Properties of electronic ballasts 225
9.15 Voltage drop 227
9.16 Fusing 228
9.17 Wiring regulations 229
9.18 Fault detection 231
10 Standards and Directives 235
10.1 Directives 235
10.2 Standards 237
10.3 Quality and safety marks 239
10.4 Product/corrosion compatibility guide 242
11 Tools 245
11.1 Tools 245
12 Glossary 248

1 Introduction
Light is life, without light we could not live.
Our human physiology is based upon light and
the complex structure of our earth relies upon
light to function. And as we have progressed
technologically we have taken this further,
turning the dark into light, from using fire to
the electric light. Electric lighting is the basis for
our modern society, turning darkness into light
in windowless or deep-plan offices, in our city
streets at night, in numerous leisure and amenity
facilities. Our society exists as it does because
of light. Our patterns of work and leisure are
made possible through our ability to control our
environment and supply light on demand.
As we have developed the technology of lighting we have
also developed our understanding of how to use light. Through
standards we lay down limits for safety and adequacy, through
guides we direct lighting toward established good practice,
show how to transcend the adequate. We have learnt how to
give light meaning, transforming spaces by giving them a lit
atmosphere, applying light to give beauty to a scene.
But the use of light is constantly challenging us. It is no longer
enough to ensure good task visibility, or a comfortable
environment. It is not even enough to produce an environment
that gives a sense of well-being. We need to do all these,
but also in a way that minimises harm to the environment.
Therefore stricter rules are being applied to product design, use
and disposal. We have to minimise the carbon footprint of a
product or an installation and maximise sustainability. Therefore,
all aspects of design, whether for a luminaire or lighting
installation, is a balance of factors, a balance of performance,
efficiency and comfort (PEC).
Performance is the achievement of visual effectiveness, meeting
requirements and targets. It is quantifiable through known
lighting measures such as illuminance, luminance, glare rating,
colour rendition and uniformity. These measures are generally
defined through national and international standards and
recommendations.
Fig. 1.1 Amenity lighting creating a pleasant
balanced scene
Introduction | 5

Efficiency is conserving energy and effort, reducing CO2 emissions and waste, producing a system that is practical and
efficient to install, operate and maintain. Efficiency can also be
quantified, through units such as lumens/watt, cost/m2, CO2 kg/year, percent recycled element, percent maintenance link,
and many others. Some of these measures are defined through
national and international standards and recommendations,
such as energy efficiency or the ecodesign of products, whilst
others are concerns for the end-user, such as cost.
Comfort is the achievement of complete satisfaction, providing
a stimulating atmosphere that gives sustainable wellness. The
criteria for assessing comfort are subjective and are the criteria
that differentiate the design, that give the design its individuality,
its own character. Is it calming/stimulating/inspiring,
welcoming and pleasant, reassuring, fulfilling? Does it have a
pleasing flow of light and give a well balanced ambient? Do
all parts of the design complement each other, the architecture
of the space, the lit effect, and the physical design of the
luminaires? This is the point where the engineering and art are
blended to produce good lighting.
So in their job the designer needs to know a wide selection
of information and how to blend this to deliver better lighting,
with better efficiency and a better environment in a sustainable
manner. This is the PEC philosophy, and in this handbook we
supply some of this information to help the designer in their task.
6 | Introduction

2 The Mechanics of Seeing
Our discernment of the world is via our five
senses of sight, hearing, taste, touch and smell.
Of these sight is the most important. Over 80 per
cent of our experience of the world comes via
our sight. But how do we see?
2.1 What is light?
To see we need light, and light is an emission of
electromagnetic radiation. The electromagnetic spectrum varies
from radio waves through infrared, ultra-violet, X-rays and finally
to gamma rays, and light is a very small part of this spectrum
with wavelengths from 380 to 760 nanometres (1nm=10-9m). This is the part of the spectrum whose rays are visible to the
human eye and lies between infrared and ultra-violet. Light may
be further divided as the wavelength of the light relates to the
colour we see. As the wavelength changes so does the colour
of the light, from blue at 400nm to red at 700nm.
2.2 The eye and vision
Rays of light entering the eye are directed onto the retina, which
is a layer of light sensitive cells within the eye. The retina is
composed of two basic types of light sensitive cells, the rods
and the cones. These cells have different properties. Cones
operate during the day and enable us to see in detailed colour
(photopic vision). As the light level drops, say to that of a well-lit
street, the cones become less effective and are assisted by the
more sensitive rods (mesopic vision). However, the rods only
give black and white vision. Therefore we see a less brightly
coloured view as we are using a mixture of the rod and cone
cells, the relative mixture varying depending upon the actual
light level. At much lower light levels, say that of dim moonlight,
the cones cease to function at all, and our vision becomes
totally monochromatic using just the rods (scotopic vision). The
unit for this measure of light is the lumen.
These concepts are important as we consider the appearance
of a space under different lighting conditions with respect to the
amount of light and the colour spectrum of the light.
Other
senses
20%
Fig. 2.1 The importance of vision
WAVELENGTH (nanometers)
380 400 500 600 700 760
GAMMA
RAYS
X
RAYS
ULTRA
VOILET
INFRA
RED
Fig. 2.2 The electromagnetic spectrum
100%
100%
Scotopic vision
(dark adapted
eye)
VISIBLE LIGHT
Vision
80%
RADIO
Photopic
vision (day)
400 500 600 700 800
Photopic
vision (day)
400 500 600 700 800
Fig. 2.3 Photopic and Scotopic visual response
curves
The Mechanics of Seeing | 7

2.3 Lighting fundamentals
2.3.1 Illuminance (E) - This is a measure of the amount of
light falling onto an object, and is measured in lux. It is the
amount of luminous flux (F) that is received by a surface of given
area.
2.3.2 Luminance (L) - This is a measure of the amount
of light reflected by an object and is measured in cd/m².
It is the amount of luminous flux (F, lumens) that is emitted by
a surface of given area and is dependant upon the properties
of the surface (e.g. reflection, refraction and transmission.
See section 3 on controlling light). The value of luminance
at a point on a surface can therefore vary dependant upon
the observer viewpoint.
2.3.3 Glare - Glare is the result of excessive contrasts of
luminance in the field of view. The effect may vary from mild
discomfort to an actual impairment of the ability to see. When
the ability to see is impaired this is called disability glare.
Discomfort glare refers to the discomfort or distraction caused
by bright windows or luminaires.
Glare may be calculated in a variety of ways depending upon
the application. So for example in interiors the Unified Glare
Rating (UGR) is calculated. Similarly for sports lighting
applications Glare Rating (GR) is used and for street lighting
Threshold Increment (TI) is calculated. All of these methods,
whilst using different parameters are essentially the ratio of
luminaire brightness to background brightness.
8 | The Mechanics of Seeing
Fig. 2.4 Illuminance
E
Fig. 2.5 Luminance
L
Fig. 2.6 Glare from indoor luminaires with poor
optical control

3 Controlling Light
When we light an object, be it a space such as
a room or a sports field, or part of a luminaire
such as a louvre or diffuser, we do not see the
light that falls onto a surface or object. What
we actually see is the effect of light upon the
object. Different materials affect light in different
ways, for example paper reflects light differently
to polished metal and the lit effect is different
again for glass. To understand how a surface or
object will look we need a basic understanding
of reflection, transmission and refraction, the
principal ways materials react to light.
3.1 Reflection
As mentioned above paper reflects light differently to polished
metal. This is because paper exhibits what we term matt or
diffuse reflection whilst polished metal exhibits what we term
specular reflection. With diffuse reflection the light reflected from
a surface is scattered equally in all directions.
With specular reflection the light reflects from a surface as if
from a mirror, producing a sharp-mirrored image. For any ray
of light striking a specular surface the angle of incidence of the
light is equal to the angle at which the ray of light is reflected.
Some surfaces exhibit a mixture of diffuse and specular
reflection, showing a fuzzy mirrored image. For this the peak
reflection still obeys the rule of angle of incidence equals angle
of reflection but light is also diffusely scattered around this peak.
Fig. 3.1 Diffuse reflection
Fig. 3.2 Specular reflection
Fig. 3.3 Mixed specular and diffuse reflection
Controlling Light | 9

3.2 Transmission
Certain materials have the ability to transmit and diffuse light.
When light falls on a translucent (light transmitting) material
some light will be reflected in a specular manner, and some
light will pass through the material. For a clear material, such
as clear glass, the light will pass through with a minimum of
scattering. However for materials such as opal plastic the light
is scattered or diffused, therefore spreading the brightness of the
light ray over a larger area. (See Fig.3.4)
3.3 Refraction
When light passes from one transparent medium to another of
different density (e.g. air to glass) it bends. This is known as
refraction and this principle is used to control light, for example
using prisms. In luminaires prisms are used to direct light away
from areas that could cause glare or waste light and into areas
that produce more useful light, thereby making the luminaire
more efficient at illuminating a task or object. (See Fig. 3.5)
10 | Controlling Light
Fig. 3.4 Transmission of a ray of light through a
translucent material
Fig. 3.5 Refraction of a ray of light through a
prismatic panel

4 Australian Standards
This section of the Technical handbook
outlines some of the key standards that apply
to lighting installations in Australia. This
information has been included as a general
guide only. Note that other regulations may
also apply and it is the responsibility of the
respective party to ensure compliance with all
Australian standards. Standards, designs and
products outlined in other sections within this
Technical Handbook may not be applicable in
Australia.
4.1 Luminaire Manufacture
ASNZS60598 Safety Compliance verified by self-certification
based on in-house or NATA report.
ASNZS CISPR15 Compliance with electromagnetic radiation
standard as in C-Tick.
4.2 Interior Lighting Standards
AS1680.1 General principles and recommendations
AS1680.2.1 Circulation spaces and other general areas
AS1680.2.2 Office and screen based tasks
AS1680.2.3 Educational and Training Facilities
AS1680.2.4 Industrial tasks and purposes
AS1680.2.5 Hospital and medical tasks
4.3 Building Code of Australia
Part J6.2 Provisions for all new constructions and refurbishments
projects - minimum efficiency requirements. For more information
visit www.abcb.gov.au or refer to Thorn’s Building Code of
Australia - A Contractor’s Guide handbook.
Controlling Light | 11

4.4 Exterior Lighting Standards
ASNZS 1158.1 Lighting for roads and public spaces -
Vehicular traffic (Category V) lighting - Performance and design
requirements.
ASNZS 1158.3 Lighting for roads and public spaces -
Pedestrian area (Category P) lighting - Performance and design
requirements.
ASNZS 1158.4 The lighting of urban roads and other public
thoroughfares - Supplementary lighting at pedestrian crossings
AS4282 Control of the obtrusive effects of outdoor lighting.
4.5 Sports Lighting
AS2560.1 General
AS2560.2.1 Tennis
AS2560.2.2 Multipurpose Sports Hall
AS2560.2.3 Football
AS2560.2.4 Netball & Basketball
AS2560.2.5 Swimming Pools
AS2560.2.6 Baseball & Softball
AS2560.2.7 Hockey
AS2560.2.8 Bowling Greens
AS4282 Control of the obtrusive effects of outdoor lighting
12 | Controlling Light

5 Recommendations for Good Lighting
The recommendations for good lighting give
practical values for various lighting criteria,
depending upon the application. The
recommendations are drawn from a variety of
documents, the principle documents being:
Section 5.1 Indoor workplaces
EN 12464-1:2002 Light and Lighting – Lighting of work places
– Part 1: Indoor work places and CIE S 008:2001
Section 5.2 Outdoor workplaces
EN 12464-2:2007 Lighting of work places
– Part 2 : Outdoor work places and CIE S 015:2005
Section 5.3 Sports
EN 12193: 2007 Light and Lighting – Sports Lighting
Section 5.4 Emergency
EN 1838:1999 and CIE S 020/E:2007 Emergency Lighting
Section 5.5 Roads
EN 13201 1-4 Road lighting practice
Section 5.6 Tunnel
CR 14380:2003 Lighting Applications – Tunnel Lighting
Note that these recommendations are based upon the European
norms and local regulations may stipulate different values.
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 13

Recommendations for good lighting
Whilst these limiting values may be considered to be the
minimum design criteria additional factors should be taken into
account to ensure a good lighting installation. Some of these
factors are described in other sections of this book.
The criteria used in the recommendations are defined below.
E This is the maintained average illuminance, that is the
m
minimum value for average illuminance provided during
the maintenance cycle of the installation.
E min
GR L
L m
R a
This is the minimum value of illuminance that is
permissible within any calculation or measurement grid.
This is maximum value of glare rating that is permissible
in any direction within any measurement or calculation
grid.
This is the maintained average luminance, that is the
minimum value for average luminance provided during
the maintenance cycle of the installation.
This is the colour rendering index for a lamp and defines
the ability of a lamp to show different colours correctly.
SR This is the surround ratio, which is a value used in
the design of road lighting applications. It is the ratio
of the average illuminance of a strip just outside the
carriageway compared to the average illuminance of a
strip just inside the carriageway
TI This is the threshold increment, which is a measure of
the loss of visibility caused by the disability glare of the
luminaires in an installation.
UGR L This is the limiting maximum value of glare calculated by
the unified glare rating method.
Ul This is the uniformity of illuminance along a line, being
defined as the minimum illuminance value within a
line of measurement points divided by the average
illuminance value of the line of measurement points
(E min_line /Em_line).
U o
This is the uniformity of illuminance across any
calculation or measurement grid, being defined as the
minimum illuminance value within a grid of measurement
points divided by the average illuminance value of a
grid of measurement points (E min /E m ).
14 | Recommendations for Good Lighting

Recommendations for good lighting
5.1 Indoor workplaces
Type of task or activity E m UGR L R a
Traffic zones and general areas inside buildings
Traffic Zones
Circulation areas and corridors 100 28 40
Stairs, escalators, travalators 150 25 40
Loading ramps/bays
Rest, sanitation and first aid rooms
150 25 40
Canteens, pantries 200 22 80
Rest rooms 100 22 80
Rooms for physical exercise 300 22 80
Cloakrooms, washrooms, bathrooms, toilets 200 25 80
Sick bay 500 19 80
Rooms for medical attention
Control rooms
500 16 90
Plant rooms, switch gear rooms 200 25 60
Post room, switchboard
Store rooms, cold stores
500 19 80
Store and stockrooms 100 25 60
Dispatch packing handling areas
Storage rack areas
300 25 60
Gangways : unmanned 20 - 40
Gangways : manned 150 22 60
Control stations
Industrial activities and crafts
Agriculture
150 22 60
Loading and operating of goods, handling equipment and machinery 200 25 80
Buildings for livestock 50 - 40
Sick animal pens, calving stalls 200 25 80
Food preparation, dairy, utensil washing
Bakeries
200 25 80
Preparation and baking 300 22 80
Finishing, glazing, decorating
Cement, cement goods, concrete, bricks
500 22 80
Drying 50 28 20
Preparation of materials, work on kilns and mixers 200 28 40
General machine work 300 25 80
Rough forms
Ceramics, tiles, glass, glassware
300 25 80
Drying 50 28 20
Preparation, general machine work 300 25 80
Enamelling, rolling, pressing, shaping simple parts, glazing, glass blowing 300 25 80
Grinding, engraving, glass polishing, shaping precision parts, manufacture of glass instruments 750 19 80
Grinding of optical glass, crystal, hand grinding and engraving 750 16 80
Precision work e.g. decorative grinding, hand painting 1000 16 90
Manufacture of synthetic precious stones 1500 16 90
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 15

5.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)
Type of task or activity E m UGR L R a
Chemical, plastics and rubber industry
Remote-operated processing installations 50 - 20
Processing installations with limited manual intervention 150 28 40
Constantly manned work places in processing installations 300 25 80
Precision measuring rooms, laboratories 500 19 80
Pharmaceutical production 500 22 80
Tyre production 500 22 80
Colour inspection 1000 16 90
Cutting, finishing, inspection 750 19 80
Electrical industry 300 25 80
Cable and wire manufacture
Winding
300 25 80
-Large coils 300 25 80
-Medium-sized coils 500 22 80
-Small coils 750 19 80
Coil impregnating 300 25 80
Galvanising
Assembly work
300 25 80
-Rough e.g. large transformers 300 25 80
-Medium e.g. switchboards 500 22 80
-Fine e.g. telephones 750 19 80
-Precision e.g. measuring equipment 1000 16 80
Electronic workshops, testing, adjusting
Food stuffs and luxury food industry
Work places and zone in
1500 16 80
-Breweries, malting floor 200 25 80
-For washing, barrel filling, cleaning, sieving, peeling 200 25 80
-Cooking in preserve and chocolate factories 200 25 80
-Work places and zones in sugar factories 200 25 80
-For drying and fermenting raw tobacco, fermentation cellar 200 25 80
Sorting and washing of products, milling, mixing, packing 300 25 80
Work places and critical zones in slaughter houses, butchers, dairies mills, on filtering floor in
sugar refineries
500 25 80
Cutting and sorting of fruit and vegetables 300 25 80
Manufacture of delicatessen foods, kitchen work, manufacture of cigars and cigarettes 500 22 80
Inspection of glasses and bottles, product control, trimming, sorting, decoration 500 22 80
Laboratories 500 19 80
Colour inspection
Foundries and metal casting
1000 16 90
Man-size underfloor tunnels, cellars, etc. 50 - 20
Platforms 100 25 40
Sand preparation 200 25 80
Dressing room 200 25 80
Work places at cupola and mixer 200 25 80
Casting bay 200 25 80
Shake out areas 200 25 80
Machine moulding 200 25 80
16 | Recommendations for Good Lighting

5.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)
Type of task or activity E m UGR L R a
Hand and core moulding 300 25 80
Die casting 300 25 80
Model building 500 22 80
Hairdressers
Hairdressing 500 19 90
Jewellery manufacturing
Working with precious stones 1500 16 90
Manufacture of jewellery 1000 16 90
Watch making (manual) 1500 16 80
Watch making (automatic) 500 19 80
Laundries and dry cleaning
Goods in, marking and sorting 300 25 80
Washing and dry cleaning 300 25 80
Ironing, pressing 300 25 80
Inspection and repairs 750 19 80
Leather and leather goods
Work on vats, barrels, pits 200 25 40
Fleshing, skiving, rubbing, tumbling of skins 300 25 80
Saddlery work, shoe manufacturer, stitching, sewing, polishing, shaping, cutting, punching 500 22 80
Sorting 500 22 90
Leather dyeing (machine) 500 22 80
Quality control 1000 19 80
Colour inspection 1000 16 90
Shoe making 500 22 80
Glove making 500 22 80
Metal working and processing
Open die forging 200 25 60
Drop forging 300 25 60
Welding 300 25 60
Rough and average machining: tolerances ≥ 0.1mm 300 22 60
Precision machining, grinding: tolerances < 0.1mm 500 19 60
Scribing, inspection 750 19 60
Wire and pipe drawing shops, cold forming 300 25 60
Plate machining: thickness ≥ 5mm 200 26 60
Sheet metalwork: thickness < 5mm 300 22 60
Tool making, cutting equipment manufacture 750 19 60
Assembly
• Rough 200 25 80
• Medium 300 25 80
• Fine 500 22 80
• Precision 750 19 80
Galvanising 300 25 80
Surface preparation and painting 750 25 80
Tool, template and jig making, precision mechanics, micromechanics 750 25 80
Paper and paper goods
Edge runners, pulp mills 200 25 80
Paper manufacture and processing, paper and corrugating machines, cardboard manufacture 300 25 80
Standard bookbinding work e.g. folding, sorting, gluing, cutting, embossing, sewing 500 22 80
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 17

5.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)
Type of task or activity E m UGR L R a
Power stations
Fuel supply plant 50 - 20
Boiler house 100 28 40
Machine halls 200 25 80
Side rooms e.g. pump rooms, condenser rooms, etc., switchboards (inside buildings) 200 25 60
Control rooms 500 16 80
Outdoor switch gear
Printers
20 - 20
Cutting, gilding, embossing, block engraving, work on stones and platens, printing machines,
matrix making
500 19 80
Paper sorting and hand printing 500 19 80
Type setting, retouching, lithography 1000 19 80
Colour inspection in multicoloured printing 1500 16 90
Steel and copper engraving
Rolling mills, iron and steel works
2000 16 80
Production plants without manual operation 50 - 20
Production plants with occasional manual operation 150 28 40
Production plants with continuous manual operation 200 25 80
Slab store 50 - 20
Furnaces 200 25 20
Mill train, coiler, shear line 300 25 40
Control platforms, control panels 300 22 80
Test, measurement and inspection 500 22 80
Underfloor man-sized tunnels, belt sections, cellars, etc.
Textile manufacture and processing
50 - 20
Work places and zones in baths, bale opening 200 25 60
Carding, washing, ironing, devilling machine work, drawing, combing, sizing, card cutting,
pre-spinning, jute and hemp spinning
300 22 80
Spinning, plying, reeling, winding 500 22 80
Warping, weaving, braiding, knitting 500 22 80
Sewing, fine knitting, taking up stitches 750 22 80
Manual design, drawing patterns 750 22 90
Finishing, dyeing 500 22 80
Drying room 100 28 60
Automatic fabric printing 500 25 80
Burling, picking, trimming 1000 19 80
Colour inspection, fabric control 1000 16 90
Invisible mending 1500 19 90
Hat manufacturing
Vehicle construction
500 22 80
Body work and assembly 500 22 80
Painting, spraying chamber, polishing chamber 750 22 80
Painting, touch-up, inspection 1000 19 90
Upholstery manufacture (manned) 1000 19 80
Final inspection
Wood working and processing
1000 19 80
Automatic processing e.g. drying, plywood manufacturing 50 28 40
Steam pits 150 28 40
Saw frame 300 25 60
Work at joiners bench, gluing, assembly 300 25 80
18 | Recommendations for Good Lighting

5.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)
Type of task or activity E m UGR L R a
Polishing, painting, fancy joinery 750 22 80
Work on wood working machines e.g. turning, fluting, dressing, rebating, grooving, cutting,
sawing, sinking
500 19 80
Selection of veneer woods 750 22 90
Marquetry, inlay work 750 22 90
Quality control, inspection 1000 19 90
Offices
Offices
Filing, copying, etc. 300 19 80
Writing, typing, reading, data processing 500 19 80
Technical drawing 750 16 80
CAD work stations 500 19 80
Conference and meeting rooms 500 19 80
Reception desk 300 22 80
Archives
Retail premises
Retail premises
200 25 80
Sales area 300 22 80
Till area 500 19 80
Wrapper table
Places of public assembly
General areas
500 19 80
Entrance halls 100 22 80
Cloakrooms 200 25 80
Lounges 200 22 80
Ticket offices
Restaurants and hotels
300 22 80
Reception/cashier desk, porters desk 300 22 80
Kitchen 500 22 80
Restaurant, dining room, function room - - 80
Self-service restaurant 200 22 80
Buffet 300 22 80
Conference rooms 500 19 80
Corridors
Theatres, concert halls, cinemas
100 25 80
Practice rooms, dressing rooms
Trade fairs, exhibition halls
300 22 80
General lighting
Libraries
300 22 80
Bookshelves 200 19 80
Reading area 500 19 80
Counters
Public car parks (indoor)
500 19 80
In/out ramps (during the day) 300 25 20
In/out ramps (at night) 75 25 20
Traffic lanes 75 25 20
Parking areas 75 - 20
Ticket office 300 19 80
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 19

5.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)
Type of task or activity E m UGR L R a
Educational premises
Nursery school, play school
Play room 300 19 80
Nursery 300 19 80
Handicraft room
Educational buildings
300 19 80
Classrooms, tutorial rooms 300 19 80
Classroom for evening classes and adult education 500 19 80
Lecture hall 500 19 80
Black board 500 19 80
Demonstration table 500 19 80
Art rooms 500 19 80
Art rooms in art schools 750 19 90
Technical drawing rooms 750 16 80
Practical rooms and laboratories 500 19 80
Handicraft rooms 500 19 80
Teaching workshop 500 19 80
Music practice rooms 300 19 80
Computer practice rooms (menu driven) 300 19 80
Language laboratory 300 19 80
Preparation rooms and workshops 500 22 80
Entrance halls 200 22 80
Circulation areas, corridors 100 25 80
Stairs 150 25 80
Student common rooms and assembly halls 200 22 80
Teachers rooms 300 19 80
Library: bookshelves 200 19 80
Library: reading areas 500 19 80
Stock rooms for teaching materials 100 25 80
Sports halls, gymnasiums, swimming pools (general use) 300 22 80
School canteens 200 22 80
Kitchen 500 22 80
Health care premises 500 22 80
Rooms for general use 750 22 80
Waiting rooms 200 22 80
Corridors (during the day) 200 22 80
Corridors (at night) 50 22 80
Day rooms
Staff rooms
200 22 80
Staff office 500 19 80
Staff rooms
Wards, maternity wards
300 19 80
General lighting 100 19 80
Reading lighting 300 19 80
Simple examinations 300 19 80
Examination and treatment 1000 19 90
Night lighting, observation lighting 5 - 80
Bathrooms and toilets for patients 200 22 80
20 | Recommendations for Good Lighting

5.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)
Type of task or activity E m UGR L R a
Examination rooms (general)
General lighting 500 19 90
Examination and treatment 1000 19 90
Eye examination rooms
General lighting 300 19 80
Examination of the outer eye 1000 - 90
Reading and colour vision tests with vision charts 500 16 90
Ear examination rooms 750 22 80
General lighting 300 19 80
Ear examination 1000 - 90
Scanner rooms
General lighting 300 19 80
Scanners with image enhancers and television systems 50 19 80
Delivery rooms
General lighting 300 19 80
Examination and treatment 1000 19 80
Treatment rooms (general)
Dialysis 500 19 80
Dermatology 500 19 90
Endoscopy rooms 300 19 80
Plaster rooms 500 19 80
Medical baths 300 19 80
Massage and radiotherapy 300 19 80
Operating areas
Pre-op and recovery rooms 500 19 90
Operating theatre 1000 19 90
Intensive care unit
General lighting 100 19 90
Simple examinations 300 19 90
Examination and treatment 1000 19 90
Night watch 20 19 90
Dentists 200 25 80
General lighting 500 19 90
At the patient 1000 - 90
Operating cavity 5000 - 90
White teeth matching 5000 - 90
Laboratories and pharmacies
General lighting 500 19 80
Colour inspection 1000 19 90
Decontamination rooms 300 22 80
Sterilisation rooms 300 22 80
Disinfection rooms 300 22 80
Autopsy rooms and mortuaries
General lighting 500 19 90
Autopsy table and dissecting table 5000 - 90
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 21

5.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)
Type of task or activity E m UGR L R a
Transportation areas 300 22 80
Airports
Arrival and departure halls, baggage claim areas 200 22 80
Connecting areas, escalators, travolators 150 22 80
Information desks, check-in desks 500 19 80
Customs and passport control desks 500 19 80
Waiting areas 200 22 80
Luggage store rooms 200 25 80
Security check areas 300 19 80
Air traffic control tower 500 16 80
Testing and repair hangers 500 22 80
Measuring areas in hangers 500 22 80
Railway installations
Covered platforms and passenger subways 50 28 40
Ticket hall and concourse 200 28 40
Ticket and luggage offices and counters 300 19 80
Waiting rooms 200 22 80
22 | Recommendations for Good Lighting

5.2 Outdoor workplaces
Type of area, task or activity E m R a Uo GR L
General circulation areas
Walkways exclusively for pedestrians 5 20 0.25 50
Traffic areas for slowly moving vehicles (max 10km/h) e.g. bicycles, trucks
and excavators
10 20 0.40 50
Regular vehicle traffic (max 40km/h) 20 20 0.40 45
Pedestrian passages, vehicle turning, loading and unloading points
Airports
50 20 0.40 50
Hanger apron 20 20 0.10 55
Terminal apron 30 40 0.20 50
Loading areas 50 40 0.20 50
Fuel depot 50 40 0.40 50
Aircraft maintenance stands
Building sites
200 60 0.50 45
General lighting at building sites 50 20
Clearance, excavation and loading 20 20 0.25 55
Drain pipes mounting, transport, auxiliary and storage tasks 50 20 0.40 50
Framework element mounting, light reinforcement work, wooden mould and
framework mounting, electric piping and cabling
100 40 0.40 45
Element jointing, demanding electrical, machine and pipe mountings 200 40 0.50 45
Canals, locks and harbours
Waiting quays at canals and locks 10 20 0.25 50
Gangways and passages exclusively for pedestrians, waiting areas 10 20 0.25 50
Outport embankment ballasting at canals and locks 20 20 0.25 55
Lock control area 20 20 0.25 55
Cargo handling, loading and unloading 50 20 0.25 55
Passenger areas in passenger harbours 50 20 0.40 50
Coupling of hoses, pipes and ropes 50 20 0.40 50
Dangerous part of walkways and driveways (see also parking areas)
Farms
50 20 0.40 45
Farm yard 20 20 0.10 55
Equipment shed (open) 50 20 0.20 55
Animals sorting pen
Fuel filling service stations
50 20 0.20 45
Vehicle parking and storage areas 5 20 0.25 50
Entry and exit driveways – dark environment 20 20 0.40 45
Entry and exit driveways – light environment (i.e. urban) 50 20 0.40 45
Air pressure and water checking points and other service areas 150 20 0.40 45
Meter reading area 150 20 0.40 45
Industrial sites and storage areas 500 80
Short term handling of large units and raw materials, loading and unloading of
solid bulk goods
20 20 0.25 55
Continuous handling of large units and raw materials, loading and unloading of
freight, lifting and descending location for cranes, open loading platforms
50 20 0.40 50
Reading of addresses, covered loading platforms, use of tools, ordinary
reinforcement and casting tasks in concrete plants
100 20 0.50 45
Demanding electrical, machine and piping installations, inspection 200 60 0.50 45
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 23

5.2 Outdoor workplaces (continued)
Type of area, task or activity E m R a Uo GR L
Off-shore gas and oil structures
Drill floor and monkey board 300 40 0.50 40
Rotary table 500 40 0.50 40
Regular vehicle traffic (max 40km/h) 20 20 0.40 45
Pedestrian passages, vehicle turning, loading and unloading points 50 20 0.40 50
Derrick 100 40 0.50 45
Mud sampling room 300 40 0.50 40
Test station, shale shaker, wellhead
Process areas
200 40 0.50 45
Pumping areas 200 20 0.50 45
Crude oil pumps 300 40 0.50 45
Treatment areas 100 40 0.50 45
Ladders, stairs, walkways 100 20 0.25 45
Plant areas 300 40 0.50 40
Boat landing areas transport areas 100 20 0.25 50
Life boat areas 200 20 0.40 50
Sea surface below the rig 30 20 0.25 50
Helideck
Parking lots
100 20 0.40 45
Light traffic e.g. parking areas of shops, schools, churches, terraced
and apartment houses
5 20 0.25 55
Medium traffic e.g. parking areas of department stores, office buildings, sports
and multipurpose building complexes
10 20 0.25 50
Heavy traffic e.g. parking areas of major shopping centres, major sports and
multipurpose building complexes
Petrochemical and other hazardous industries
20 20 0.25 50
Handling of servicing tools, utilisation of manually regulated valves, starting and
stopping motors, lighting of burners
20 20 0.25 55
Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons with risk free substances,
inspection of leakage, piping and packing
50 20 0.40 50
Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons with dangerous substances,
replacements of pump packing, general service work, reading of instruments
100 40 0.40 45
Repair of machines and electrical devices 200 60 0.50 45
Fuel loading and unloading sites 100 20 0.40 45
Power, electricity, gas and heat plants
Pedestrian movements within electrically safe areas 5 20 0.25 50
Handling of servicing tools, coal 20 20 0.25 55
Overall inspection 50 20 0.40 50
General servicing work and reading of instruments 100 40 0.40 45
Wind tunnels – servicing and maintenance 100 40 0.40 45
Repair of electric devices
Railway areas
200 60 0.50 45
Open platforms - small stations, rural and local trains 15 20 0.25 50
Open platforms - medium size stations, suburban and regional trains 20 20 0.40 45
Open platforms - large stations, inter-city services 50 20 0.40 45
Covered platforms - medium size stations, suburban and regional trains 50 40 0.40 45
Covered platforms - large stations, inter-city services 100 40 0.50 45
Stairs - small and medium size stations 50 40 0.40 45
Stairs - large stations 100 40 0.50 45
Walkways 20 20 0.40 50
24 | Recommendations for Good Lighting

5.2 Outdoor workplaces (continued)
Type of area, task or activity E m R a Uo GR L
Freight areas
Freight track – short duration operations 10 20 0.25 50
Freight track – continuous operation 20 20 0.40 50
Open platforms 20 20 0.40 50
Covered platform – short duration operations 50 20 0.40 45
Covered platform – continuous operation 100 40 0.50 45
Railway yards handling areas 30 20 0.40 50
Railway yards – flat marshalling, retarder and classification yards 10 20 0.40 50
Hump areas 10 20 0.40 45
Wagon inspection pit 100 40 0.50 40
Coupling area 30 20 0.40 45
Tracks in passenger station areas, including stabling 10 20 0.25 50
Servicing trains and locomotives 20 40 0.40 50
Level crossings 20 20 0.40 45
Saw mills
Timber handling on land and in water, sawdust and chip conveyors 20 20 0.25 55
Sorting of timber on land or in water, timber unloading points and sawn timber
loading points, mechanical lifting to timber conveyor
50 20 0.40 50
Reading of addresses and marking of sawn timber 100 40 0.40 45
Grading and packaging 200 40 0.50 45
Feeding into stripping and chopping machines 300 40 0.50 45
Shipyards and docks
Short term handling of large units 20 20 0.25 55
Cleaning of ship hull 50 20 0.25 50
Painting and welding of ship hull 100 60 0.40 45
Mounting of electrical and mechanical components 200 60 0.50 45
General lighting of shipyard area, storage areas for prefabricated goods
Water and sewage plants
20 40 0.25 55
Handling of service tools, utilisation of manually operated valves, starting and
stopping of motors, piping packing and raking plants
50 20 0.40 45
Handling of chemicals, inspection of leakage, changing of pumps,
general servicing work, reading of instruments
100 40 0.40 45
Repair of motors and electric devices 200 60 0.50 45
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 25

5.3 Sports
This table contains lighting recommendations for a variety of
sports. Lighting requirements may differ according to the level
of competition of a sport, and therefore requirements are shown
for different lighting classes. There are three lighting classes:
Class I Top level competition that will generally involve a
large amount of spectators and may involve long
viewing distances
Class II Medium level competition that will generally involve
a medium amount of spectators and may involve
medium viewing distances. Professional level training
may also be class II.
Class III Low level competition that will generally involve small
amounts
Level of competition Lighting Class
I II III
International or national 3
Regional 3 3
Local 3 3 3
Training 3 3
Recreational/education 3
Type of area, task or activity Class E m R a Uo GR L
Aerobics (recreational) 200 20 0.50
Archery (lane/target) 200/Ev 750 60 0.5/0.8
Athletics (indoor)
Class I 500 60 0.70
Class II 300 60 0.60
Class III 200 20 0.50
Athletics (outdoor, all disciplines)
Class I 500 60 0.70 50
Class II 200 60 0.50 55
Class III 100 20 0.50 55
Badminton
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 300 20 0.70
26 | Recommendations for Good Lighting

Type of area, task or activity Class E m R a Uo GR L
Basketball (indoor)
Basketball
Billiards
Boccia (indoor)
Boccia (outdoor)
Boules (indoor)
Boules (outdoor)
10 pin/9 pin bowling
Boxing
Climbing
Cricket (infield/outfield)
Cricket nets
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 200 20 0.50
Class I 500 60 0.70 50
Class II 200 60 0.60 50
Class III 75 20 0.50 55
Class I 750 80 0.80
Class II 500 80 0.80
Class III 500 80 0.80
Class I 300 60 0.70
Class II 200 60 0.70
Class III 200 20 0.50
Class I 200 60 0.70 50
Class II 100 20 0.70 50
Class III 50 20 0.50 55
Class I 300 60 0.70
Class II 200 60 0.70
Class III 200 20 0.50
Class I 200 60 0.70 50
Class II 100 20 0.70 50
Class III 50 20 0.50 55
Lanes 200 60 0.50
Pins 25m lane Ev 1000 0.80
Pins 50m lane Ev 2000 0.80
Class I 2000 80 0.80
Class II 1000 80 0.80
Class III 500 60 0.50
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 300 20 0.50
Class I 750/500 60 0.70 50
Class II 500/300 60 0.70 50
Class III 300/200 20 0.70 55
Class I 1500 60 0.80 50
Class II 1000 60 0.80 50
Class III 750 20 0.80 55
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 27

Type of area, task or activity Class E m R a Uo GR L
Curling (target / playing area) 300/200 0.70 0.70
Cycling (indoor) 50
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 200 20 0.50
Cycling (outdoor)
Class I 500 60 0.70 50
Class II 300 60 0.70 50
Class III 100 20 0.50 55
Dancing
Darts
Fencing
Football (indoor)
Football (outdoor)
Gymnastics
Handball (indoor)
Handball (outdoor)
Hockey (indoor)
Hockey (outdoor)
28 | Recommendations for Good Lighting
Class I 500 60 0.70
Class II 300 60 0.60
Class III 200 20 0.50
Class I Eh 200/Ev 750 60
Class II Eh 100/Ev 500 60
Class III Eh 50/Ev 300 20
Class I Eh 750/Ev 500 60 0.70
Class II Eh 500/Ev 300 60 0.70
Class III Eh 300/Ev 200 20 0.70
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 200 20 0.50
Class I 500 60 0.70 50
Class II 200 60 0.60 50
Class III 75 20 0.50 55
Class I 500 60 0.70
Class II 300 60 0.60
Class III 200 20 0.50
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 200 20 0.50
Class I 500 60 0.70 50
Class II 200 60 0.60 50
Class III 75 20 0.50 55
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 300 20 0.70
Class I 500 60 0.70 50
Class II 200 60 0.70 50
Class III 200 20 0.70 55

Type of area, task or activity Class E m R a Uo GR L
Ice hockey (indoor)
Ice hockey (outdoor)
Ice skating
Judo
Kendo / Karate
Netball (indoor)
Netball (outdoor)
Petanque (indoor)
Petanque (outdoor)
Racketball
Roller skating
School sports
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 300 20 0.70
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 200 20 0.50
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 300 20 0.70
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 200 20 0.50
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 200 20 0.50
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 200 20 0.50
Class I 500 60 0.70 50
Class II 200 60 0.60 50
Class III 75 20 0.50 55
Class I 300 60 0.70
Class II 200 60 0.70
Class III 200 20 0.50
Class I 200 60 0.70 50
Class II 100 20 0.70 50
Class III 50 20 0.50 55
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 300 20 0.70
Class I 500 60 0.70
Class II 300 60 0.60
Class III 200 20 0.50
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 200 20 0.50
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 29

Type of area, task or activity Class E m R a Uo GR L
Shooting (lane/target) 200/Ev 750 60 0.5/0.8
Snooker
Class I 750 80 0.80
Class II 500 80 0.80
Class III 500 80 0.80
Speed skating
Class I 500 60 0.70
Class II 300 60 0.60
Class III 200 20 0.50
Squash
Swimming
Table tennis
Tennis (indoor)
Tennis (outdoor)
Weight lifting
Wrestling
30 | Recommendations for Good Lighting
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 300 20 0.70
Class I 500 60 0.70
Class II 300 60 0.70
Class III 200 20 0.50
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 300 20 0.70
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 300 20 0.50
Class I 500 60 0.70 50
Class II 300 60 0.70 50
Class III 200 20 0.60 55
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 200 20 0.50
Class I 750 60 0.70
Class II 500 60 0.70
Class III 200 20 0.50

5.4 Emergency
Illuminance limits (CEN 1838:1999 and CIE S 020/E:2007)
Description of space Illuminance limits (lux) Diversity limits
(Imin / Imax)
Escape route Along centre line ≥ 1.0lx
In central band ≥ 0.5lx
0.025 (1:40)
Open area Across area ≥ 0.5lx 0.025 (1:40)
High risk task area ≥ 10% maintained level but not less than15.0lx 0.1 (1:10)
Disability glare limits (CEN 1838:1999 and CIE S 020/E:2007)
Mounting height above
floor level
H in m
Escape route and open area (anti
panic) lighting maximum luminous
intensity
I max in cd
High risk task area
lighting maximum
luminous intensity
I max in cd
H < 2.5 500 1000
2.5 ≤ H < 3.0 900 1800
3.0 ≤ H < 3.5 1600 3200
3.5 ≤ H < 4.0 2500 5000
4.0 ≤ H < 4.5 3500 7000
4.5 ≤ H 5000 10000
For escape routes and open areas response times and durations
are;
CEN 1838:1999
50% of the required illuminance within 5s, and 100% within
60s with a minimum duration of 1 hour
CIE S 020/E:2007
50% of the required illuminance within 20s, and 100% within
60s (if the visual task or risk to people requires a shorter
response time then it should be shortened to 50% of the
required illuminance within 5s) with a minimum duration of
1 hour (if the visual task or risk to people requires a longer
duration then it should be extended to 3 hours)
For high risk task areas response times and durations are;
CEN 1838:1999
Either 100% required illuminance permanently or within 0.5s,
depending upon the application with a minimum duration
covering the time the risk exists
CIE S 020/E:2007
Either 100% required illuminance permanently or within 0.5s,
depending upon the application with a minimum duration of
1 hour
Note that these values may differ across countries. For example;
UK (CEN 1838:1999)
Escape route along centre line ≥ 0.2lx
in central band ≥ 0.1lx
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 31

Escape route and open area duration may be extended from
5s to 15s in premises for the most part likely to be occupied by
persons who are familiar with them
France (CEN 1838:1999)
Certified luminaires only may be used
On escape routes maximum spacing of luminaires is 15m
For open areas 5lm/m 2 (luminaire lumens) is required and
luminaires may not be spaced more than 4 times their mounting
height apart, with a minimum of 2 luminaires per room
Therefore, whilst these values may be used for guidance local
regulations should be consulted.
5.5 Roads
For road lighting the lighting criteria are selected dependant
upon the class of road being lit. The class has a range of
sub-classes, from the strictest to the most relaxed, and these are
chosen dependant upon factors, such as typical speed of users,
typical volumes of traffic flow, difficulty of the navigational task,
etc. The basic lighting classes are defined as:
ME This class is intended for users of motorised vehicles on
traffic routes. In some countries this class also applies to
residential roads. Traffic speeds are medium to high.
The ME classes go from ME1 to ME6, with ME1 defining
the strictest requirements. For wet road conditions the
MEW classes go from MEW1 to MEW6.
Luminance
L m U 0 U L SR TI
ME1 ≥ 2.0 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.70 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 10%
ME2 ≥ 1.5 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.70 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 10%
ME3A ≥ 1.0 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.70 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%
ME3B ≥ 1.0 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.60 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%
ME3C ≥ 1.0 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.50 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%
ME4A ≥ 0.75 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.60 ≥ 0.60 ≤ 15%
ME4B ≥ 0.75 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.50 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%
ME5 ≥ 0.50 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.35 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%
ME6 ≥ 0.3 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.35 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%
MEW1D ≥ 2.0 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.60 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 10%
MEW1W - ≥ 0.15 - ≥ 0.50 -
MEW2D ≥ 1.5 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.60 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 10%
MEW2W - ≥ 0.15 - ≥ 0.50 -
MEW3D ≥ 1.0 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.60 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%
MEW3W - ≥ 0.15 - ≥ 0.50 -
MEW4D ≥ 0.75 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 - ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%
MEW4W - ≥ 0.15 - ≥ 0.50 -
MEW5D ≥ 0.5 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.35 - ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%
MEW5W - ≥ 0.15 - ≥ 0.50 -
32 | Recommendations for Good Lighting
KEY Emin - minimum illuminance
Em - maintained average illuminance
Lm - maintained average luminance
Uo - overall uniformity
U L - longitudinal uniformity
TI - threshold increment
SR - surround ratio

CE This class is intended for users of motorised vehicles in
conflict areas such as road intersections, roundabouts,
etc. These areas also allow provision for cyclists and
pedestrians.
The CE classes go from CE0 to CE5, with CE0 defining
the strictest requirements.
S This class is intended for cyclists and pedestrians on
footpaths, cycle paths, residential roads, pedestrian
streets, parking areas, etc. The S class and the A class are
for similar situations, but the S class criteria are defined
in terms of horizontal illuminance as preferred by certain
countries.
The S classes go from S1 to S6, with S1 defining the
strictest requirements.
A This class is intended for cyclists and pedestrians on
footpaths, cycle paths, residential roads, pedestrian
streets, parking areas, etc. The A class and the S class are
for similar situations but the A class criteria are defined in
terms of hemispherical illuminance as preferred by certain
countries.
The A classes go from A1 to A5, with A1 defining the
strictest requirements.
ES This class is an extension of the A and S classes for those
situations where the identification of people or objects
is particularly necessary, for example in high crime
risk areas. The criteria are in terms of semi-cylindrical
illuminance and are used in addition to the S or A class
criteria.
The ES classes go from ES1 to ES9, with ES1 defining the
strictest requirements.
EV This class is an extension of the CE, A and S classes
for those situations requiring good visibility of vertical
surfaces, for example toll booths. The criteria are in terms
of vertical illuminance and are used in addition to the CE,
S or A class criteria.
The EV classes go from EV1 to EV6, with EV1 defining the
strictest requirements.
Horizontal illuminance
E m E min U o
CE0 ≥ 50.0 lux - ≥ 0.40
CE1 ≥ 30.0 lux - ≥ 0.40
CE2 ≥ 20.0 lux - ≥ 0.40
CE3 ≥ 15.0 lux - ≥ 0.40
CE5 ≥ 7.50 lux - ≥ 0.40
Horizontal illuminance
E m E min U o
S1 ≥ 15.0 lux; ≤ 22.5 lux ≥ 5.0 lux -
S2 ≥ 10.0 lux; ≤ 15.0 lux ≥ 3.0 lux -
S3 ≥ 7.5 lux; ≤ 11.25 lux ≥ 1.5 lux -
S4 ≥ 5.0 lux; ≤ 7.5 lux ≥ 1.0 lux -
S5 ≥ 3.0 lux; ≤4.5 lux ≥ 0.6 lux -
S6 ≥ 2.0 lux; ≤ 3.0 lux ≥ 0.6 lux -
Hemispherical illuminance
Em Uo A1 ≥ 5.0 lux ≥ 0.15
A2 ≥ 3.0 lux ≥ 0.15
A3 ≥ 2.0 lux ≥ 0.15
A4 ≥ 1.5 lux ≥ 0.15
A5 ≥ 1.0 lux ≥ 0.15
Semi-cylindrical illuminance
E min
ES1 ≥ 10.0 lux
ES2 ≥ 7.5 lux
ES3 ≥ 5.0 lux
ES4 ≥ 3.0 lux
ES5 ≥ 2.0 lux
ES6 ≥ 1.5 lux
ES7 ≥ 1.0 lux
ES8 ≥ 0.75 lux
ES9 ≥ 0.50 lux
Vertical illuminance
E min
EV1 ≥ 50.0 lux
EV2 ≥ 30.0 lux
EV3 ≥ 10.0 lux
EV4 ≥ 7.5 lux
EV5 ≥ 5.0 lux
EV6 ≥ 0.5 lux
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 33

Recommended lighting levels
When lighting adjacent areas there should not be a difference
greater than two comparable classes between the areas, with
the area with the highest recommended lighting level being
taken as the reference area.
To help apply this when adjacent area are lit to different lighting
classes the table below shows lighting classes for comparable
lighting levels.
ME1 ME2 ME3 ME4 ME5 ME6
MEW1 MEW2 MEW3 MEW4 MEW5
CE0 CE1 CE2 CE3 CE4 CE5
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
Lighting classes of comparable lighting level
In some countries there is a preference for a particular
measure of illuminance over others (for example hemispherical
illuminance in preference to horizontal illuminance). The
following two tables show comparable alternative lighting
classes to aid in designing to local preferences.
A class (hemispherical illuminance) compared to S class (horizontal illuminance)
Reference class S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
Alternative class A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
ES class (semi-cylindrical illuminance) and EV class (vertical illuminance) compared to CE and S class
(horizontal illuminance)
Reference class
Alternative class
CE0 CE1 CE2 CE3
S1
ES1 ES2
EV3
34 | Recommendations for Good Lighting
ES3
EV4
ES4
EV5
CE4
S2
CE5
S3 S4 S5 S6
ES5 ES6 ES7 ES8 ES9

5.6 Amenity
There is little standardised information for lighting requirements
in amenity areas, and therefore this information should be
considered guidance. Local standards and regulations should
be checked to ensure compliance.
Lighting classes for pedestrian areas in urban centres (see road section above)
Pedestrian zones
Lighting levels for underground, multi-storey and outdoor car parks zones
Traffic flow pedestrians
Normal High
Environmental zone Environmental zone
E3 E4 E3 E4
Pedestrian only traffic CE3 CE2 CE2 CE1
Mixed pedestrian and vehicular traffic CE2 CE1 CE1 CE1
Area
Em (lux)
Eminimum (lux)
Diversity
(E /E )
min max
Pedestrian precincts 5.0 - 0.08
Squares/open areas 5.0 - 0.10
Squares (high pedestrian use) 10.0 - 0.10
Level footpaths - 1.0
Footpaths with steps - 5.0 -
Outdoor staircase 15.0 - 0.30
Underpass 60.0 - 0.30
Type
Area
Em (lux)
Eminimum (lux)
Underground and multi-storey Parking bays, access area 75 50
excluding roof level
Ramps, corners, intersections 150 75
Entrance/exit zones (vehicular) 75 night
300 day
-
Pedestrian areas, stairs, lifts 100 50
Outdoor and multi-storey roof
60.0 -
level
Rural zones E1 and E2 15 5
Urban zones E3 and E4 30 10
Multi-storey roof level 30 10
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 35

5.7 Tunnel
For guidance on tunnel lighting you should also refer to section
7.6 on road tunnel lighting.
Glare restriction
Time of day Threshold zone Interior zone Exit zone
Day-time TI

5.8 Lighting scheme surveys
When a lighting scheme has been designed and installed
it is normally necessary to perform a survey as part of the
commissioning process. A survey would also be necessary in
the case of any dispute over the performance of an installation.
When performing a survey a grid of points is generally
placed over the area to be surveyed. These grid points are the
measurement points at which a reading of light will be taken.
To perform a survey adequate equipment is required. This
is generally either an illuminance meter or a luminance
meter, dependant upon the criteria used during the design
of the installation. It is essential that the equipment used is
suitable for the task. It therefore needs to be calibrated, with
a current calibration certificate from a competent company
with traceability to national standards. It also needs to have a
suitable range of sensitivity to be able to measure the light levels
present in the installation. So to measure emergency light levels
a more sensitive meter would be necessary that could measure
low light levels.
When making a scheme survey it is essential to keep a
complete and accurate record of the state of the whole
installation at the time of the survey, which is the lighting
equipment and the space the lighting is in. (Photographs are a
valuable addition to a written record.) Examples of information
of note are:
With regard to the measuring equipment
− Type of meter, manufacturer, model, serial number and
calibration date
− Details of any additional equipment, such as tripods, tape
measures, etc. should be noted
With regard to the luminaires
− The luminaire manufacturer and manufacturers’ code
− Details of the lamps (number, type and age)
− The supply voltage (value and stability)
− The state of maintenance of the installation (lamps and
luminaires)
− Details of luminaire control systems being used
− Geometric details of the luminaire positioning
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 37

With regard to the space
− The condition of reflective surfaces
− The surface reflectances
− The presence of any significant obstructions
− The presence/absence of daylight, including a
background reading of luminance/illuminance with
daylight only (luminaires turned off). Note that the quantity
of daylight may vary significantly over time so ideally
daylight should be excluded from measurements of electric
light unless the aim is to measure a constant illuminance
installation (daylight control)
− The ambient temperature in the space
− Any other factors which could influence the measurement
Before taking any measurements it is important that the output
of the luminaires is stable. Therefore the lighting should ideally
be operated for one hour before taking any measurements, and
at least 30 minutes. Additionally to ensure the stability of the
meter photocell it should be exposed to the stable light levels for
approximately five minutes before taking any measurements.
When defining a measurement grid this is dependant upon the
application being surveyed.
Interior measurement grids
Frequently for sports lighting the grid definition is defined by
the sports governing body, so for an indoor sports facility any
requirements specific to a particular sport should be used.
However, if no specific requirements exist, or the installation
is not a sports facility, the measurement points for verification
of the design should be in the same location and plane as
the calculation points used during the design. Therefore, if a
measurement plane was calculated which was tilted to mimic
the orientation of the task, the same measurement plane should
be used for verification.
Note that during design it should be ensured that the grid
spacing does not coincide with the spacing of the luminaires
in the installation as this can distort the calculated results, and
therefore the scheme performance.
38 | Recommendations for Good Lighting

Exterior measurement grids – sports and area
Frequently for sports lighting the grid definition is defined by
the sports governing body, so any requirements specific to
a particular sport should be used. However, if no specific
requirements exist, or the installation is not a sports facility, the
measurement points for verification of the design should be in
the same location and plane as the calculation points used
during the design. Therefore, if a measurement plane was
calculated which was tilted to mimic the orientation of the task,
the same measurement plane should be used for verification.
Exterior measurement grids – road
For road lighting the grid is normally defined in the relevant
standard and is generally related to the spacing of the road
lighting lanterns. Therefore the relevant standard should be
referenced for the grid definition which should be the same as
the grid used for calculation during design.
When marking the measurement grid in the area to be
measured the method of marking is dependant upon the
measurements to be taken. When measuring illuminance
small markers (such as sticky dots) may be placed upon the
surface to show the measurement point. However when
measuring luminance this would invalidate the reading and so
for luminance readings markings should be used to sight the
luminance meter, and then moved before the reading is taken.
When taking luminance readings in a road lighting installation
the position of the meter will be a significant distance from the
measurement point. This has two implications:
− The luminance meter must be able to restrict the angle of
measurement to allow only the relevant grid position to be
measured, typically to two minutes of arc in the vertical
plane and 20 minutes of arc in the horizontal plane.
− The grid markings must be visible from a large distance.
Therefore three-dimensional objects should be used to
mark the grid points and removed individually as each
grid point is measured.
The method of marking out the grid should be recorded with
details of equipment used and fixed reference points used
to locate the grid. To record the measured values a diagram
should be used to assign reference numbers to each grid point.
A table of values may then be completed containing the grid
reference number and the measured value.
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 39

Some points of note when taking the readings are
− When taking measurements it should be ensured that
no additional shadowing is introduced due to the
measurement technique.
− When taking measurements it is advisable to wear dark
matt clothing to prevent light reflecting from clothing onto
the photocell, giving abnormally high readings. However,
if safety requirements require high visibility clothing,
care should be taken to minimise light reflection onto the
photocell.
− The use of a tripod is advisable, especially for luminance
readings or readings using heavy equipment.
− For measurement grids that are not at ground level the use
of a stand, at the correct height and orientation for the task
plane, can help ensure a photocell is correctly positioned
at a measurement position.
− It is good practice to measure the background light levels
without the lighting installation turned on. Even moonlight
can have a noticeable effect on light levels. Also to take
these measurements after measuring the installation with
the lights turned on, as the background light levels may
vary considerably during the warm-up time for the lighting.
− When measuring horizontal illuminance it cannot be
assumed that the ground is horizontal, especially in
outdoor applications. Care must be taken to ensure
the photocell is horizontal, even if this is not a true
representation of the ground.
− Correction factors should be applied to readings to
compensate for the lamp type used in the schemes.
However, highly coloured or monochromatic light sources
will give erroneous readings using conventional light
meters.
40 | Recommendations for Good Lighting

6 Applications and Techniques
6.1 General Considerations
The application of the right light is paramount in
lighting design. The simple golden rule for design
considerations is to provide the right light to the
right place at the right time. This rule is valid for
all places where lighting for people is needed
so that they can see and perform the visual
tasks efficiently and in comfort. The specific
lighting requirements of people and places
vary according to the type of place, activity
and people involved. The visual tasks can differ
in character, location, size, colour, duration,
dynamics and ergonomics. It is very important
to assess these parameters and to formulate the
right design objectives for the specific lighting
application area. Once the task analyses
have been completed and listed the required
lighting design criteria can be selected and the
lighting design process can start. See also the
list of recommendations within the appropriate
lighting application standards referenced in this
book.
This section of the handbook gives an insight to the activities
and visual tasks found in the various lighting application
segments and gives advise on the important points to consider.
It recommends the most appropriate lighting design techniques
and suitable lighting solutions. The list of application segments
is not exhaustive but the main types covered include the lighting
of indoor and outdoor industry, offices, education buildings,
super and hypermarkets, roads, amenity areas, architectural
elements and healthcare premises. For each case the lighting
techniques employed should start by considering a holistic
approach to design and should include PEC – performance,
efficiency and comfort - attributes and fulfilment. This means
addressing all the lighting design parameters and balancing the
requirements and constraints to yield the best possible solution.
In the holistic framework the key elements for consideration
are visual function, visual amenity, architectural integration,
energy efficiency, installation costs and maintenance. The
individual elements may not carry equal weight, but they
Applications and Techniques | 41

Applications and Techniques
all need consideration separately and combined with each
other. PEC extends this consideration to include the changing
human factors and environmental challenges. By fulfilling PEC
we ensure that quality lighting will be provided that gives
effective light for visual performance, with high operating
energy efficiency, be sustainable and kind to the environment,
and give people comfort, stimulation and total satisfaction. It is
well proven that good lighting is essential to mankind, without
this the human activity will be seriously impaired and valuable
energy and resource will be wasted. It is also important to
recognise that this lighting not only illuminates the task but will
also contribute to the quality of the visual environment and
wellbeing of the people.
Much of the success of a lighting installation depends on
making the right decisions at the design stage, selecting the
right equipment and providing adequate instructions on how
to operate, manage and service the scheme through it’s life.
In the section “Specific Techniques” guidance is given on
techniques that are applicable to several application segments.
These include, lighting for display screen equipment, lighting
for education, emergency lighting, road and amenity lighting,
controlling obtrusive light, lighting for crime prevention, lighting
for health, lighting controls, lighting maintenance and tunnel
lighting. The consideration of these form an integral part of the
design process to yield the most appropriate lighting solution.
42 | Applications and Techniques

Healthcare
Section 5.6
Urban –
decorative
roadlighting &
amenity areas
Section 5.9
Sports lighting
Section 5.11
Super/
Hypermarket
Section 5.7
Urban –
architectural
floodlighting
Section 5.10
Education
Section 5.3
Office
Section 5.2
Road lighting
Section 5.8
Industry –
indoor
Section 5.4
Industry – outdoor
Section 5.5
Fig. 6.1 City plan showing the diversity of
lighting needs. This section gives hints
on lighting techniques for each of these
application areas, helping the reader
to tackle such everyday projects with
greater understanding.
Applications and Techniques | 43

6.2 Office
Techniques
General
Office lighting is a general term that covers many tasks. These tasks can use different
mediums such as paper, computer screen, or involve face-to-face meetings. Additionally
the tasks can vary in content and may be mainly clerical in nature or may be more
specialised such as engineering tasks and CAD work. Points of note are:
Office workers tend to have a sedentary work routine. Therefore they will be
looking in essentially the same direction for large amounts of time. Poor
lighting can cause various health problems, from headaches due to
discomfort glare to muscle strain due to sitting at an awkward angle to avoid
reflections in computer screens or glossy publications. Care must be taken to
design a lighting installation that minimises discomfort caused by lighting.
A balanced ambience creates a pleasant work environment. Ensuring light
falls onto the walls and ceiling helps prevent dark surfaces creating an
oppressive atmosphere. Generally, ensuring wall lighting levels are 50% of
the horizontal task lighting level and ceiling levels are 30% of the horizontal
task level will give a good balance. Careful use of wall-washing luminaires
and indirect lighting can help produce a positive environment.
Lamps with a colour-rendering index of 80 or more should be used to
enhance visual performance and visual satisfaction.
If the positions of the workstations are known and fixed it is more efficient to
design the lighting to supply the correct amount of lighting to the task, but less
lighting to circulation areas. For areas that may be reconfigured lighting
controls may be used to set the light levels for individual luminaires in an array
of luminaires to achieve the same effect.
For rooms containing display screen equipment luminaires with suitable
optical control to remove any bright luminance above 65° should be used.
44 | Applications and Techniques

Office
Drawing office
Lighting for technical areas is critical to minimise errors. Any error in a drawing could be
costly and potentially dangerous.
Although drawing boards are becoming less common some offices do still
use them. In such cases the lighting should provide adequate light levels over
a reasonable range of tilt angles of the board, and be positioned so as to
minimise shadowing onto the board.
For CAD workstations luminaires should be chosen which have a minimal
luminance at high angles from the downward vertical (e.g. angles close to
the horizontal plane of the luminaire). When using indirect or direct/indirect
luminaires care should be taken to ensure that the ceiling luminance is not too
high as this can produce images on the computer screen.
Key luminaires:
Reception desk
Main objective is to provide visitors with a visible first point of contact and employees
with a transition zone from exterior and interior lighting levels.
Light naturally attracts people so a well lit reception area and reception desk
will help orientate visitors by giving them a visible point of reference.
Luminaires should be placed to help orientation by providing a luminous
pathway
Entrances with high ceilings lend themselves to the use of uplighting or
suspended lighting, both of which tend to provide good modelling.
Key luminaires:
Applications and Techniques | 45

Office
Conference rooms
Main objectives are to ensure that people have adequate light to perform their tasks
(such as reading, writing), that any presentation aids used are clearly visible, and that
modelling is suitable to allow good communication between people.
A good vertical illuminance component should exist to aid the visibility of
wall-displays and improve modelling. Moderately strong modelling is
desirable for formal communication, whilst softer modelling is more suitable
for informal or close contact. Modelling is of special importance in areas
that may be used by people with special needs who may utilise lip-reading
or signing.
Specialised lighting for whiteboards may be installed to ensure good visibility
for all participants. These luminaires should not cause glare for the user of the
whiteboard and should be positioned to minimise shadowing during use. If
audio-visual projectors are used the luminaires should not impede the
projector beam and cause shadowing.
Flexible luminaire controls should be employed to allow the use of projectors
or other audio-visual equipment and to set a luminous environment suitable for
the meeting purpose.
Key luminaires:
General office
Main objective is to ensure that people have adequate light to perform their tasks quickly
and accurately without any stress or strain caused by poor light levels or poorly
positioned lighting causing visual disability or discomfort.
Whilst recommendations and standards define suitable lighting levels for
office based work consideration should also be given to the demands of the
task. For work involving small or complex detail lighting levels required for
accurate working will be higher than those necessary for more general office
tasks. If a minority of people in a large office perform these tasks local
lighting may be suitable for these workers.
46 | Applications and Techniques

Office
Care should be taken when positioning luminaires and workstations to ensure
that the worker does not create shadows on the task. Ensuring that all
workstations are lit by more than one luminaire and from a variety of
directions can prevent this occurring.
Tasks frequently involve the transfer of paper-based information onto a
computer. In many instances special attachments are used to hold the paper
next to the computer screen in a vertical or near vertical orientation. Therefore
it must be ensured that the vertical illuminance is sufficient to allow good
visibility of the paper-based task.
When writing, typing or reading paper-based material the contrast rendering
factor (CRF) of the task is important. This indicates how effectively the lighting
system minimises unwanted shiny reflections in the task. The CRF is sensitive to
the geometry between the luminaires, task and observer and should either be
calculated or measured. If the CRF is too low altering the lighting layout or
moving the location of the task should be considered.
It should be ensured that light levels on the walls are suitable for comfortable
use of notice boards, whiteboards, etc. However, overly aggressive or poorly
designed lighting of shiny artefacts on the walls (such as whiteboards or
glazed pictures) may result in some workers having problems with reflected
glare.
When filing or retrieving information from a storage system it is frequently
necessary to read information on a vertical surface, such as the front of a drawer
of a filing cabinet. Therefore, adequate vertical illuminance levels should be
provided.
Luminaires should be positioned to ensure that the user does not create
shadowing over filing systems or copiers when standing in front of them.
Key luminaires:
Applications and Techniques | 47

Office
Schemes
Office lighting
Scheme: Meeting room, 4.4m x 4.4m x 2.8m
Luminaire(s) used: 9 Corsa 200 2x26W TC-D
Desk: Eav = 468 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.86
Scheme: Boardroom, 7m x 6.5m x 2.8m
Luminaire(s) used: 12 Corsa 200 2x26W TC-D and 16 Chalice LV 50W
Desk: Eav = 479 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.62
Scheme: Civil circuit judge court, 7m x 6.5m x 2.8m
Luminaire(s) used: 23 MenloSoft 3x24W T16 and 5 Planor 2x24W T16 wall mounted
Workplane: Eav = 569 lux. (1m above floor)
48 | Applications and Techniques
Scheme: Circulation routes, 2.8m wide x 2.8m high
Luminaire(s) used: Indi-Quattro 2x36W TC-L on 3m
centres
Desk: Eav = 255 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.41

Office
Recessed MenloSoft luminaires lighting a large open plan
office. The appearance of the luminaire gives a lively feel to the
ceiling, which might otherwise appear uninteresting. A good
distribution of light prevents walls appearing dark and
uninviting.
Pendant Planor luminaires lighting a small office area.
Small offices frequently feel enclosed and cramped. The light
distribution from the luminaire lights the ceiling and walls,
making the space feel larger and more cheerful, and the fittings
seem to float in the space.
Recessed luminaires controlled by the SensaLink system
(see Section 6.1). The luminaires have integrated detectors
allowing them to adjust the lighting levels according to the
amount of daylight flowing in from the large window on the
edge of the office.
Quattro T Line luminaires with reflector optics in a large
open plan office. This minimises potential problems of the
lighting causing reflections in computer screens (see Section
6.2) and allows a clean uncluttered feel to the ceiling. Care
needs to be taken to prevent dark walls and ceiling making the
room feel gloomy and uninviting.
Applications and Techniques | 49

6.3 Education
Techniques:
General
The purpose of a school or college building is to provide a facility that aids and
promotes learning for all age groups in a safe and fulfilling environment. The lighting
should support this aim in all teaching and ancillary areas.
Luminaires need to be physically robust, not easily damaged, and easy to
maintain
The ambience of different areas should be suitable for the activity performed
there. For example by treating an art or music room as more than just another
classroom the lighting can contribute to providing an inspiring atmosphere.
Additional consideration should be given to any uses of the teaching space
for extra-curricular activities or adult learning classes. If a large number of
older students use the space light levels should be suitable, taking into
account deterioration of the eye with age.
Emergency lighting will be required in many parts of the building.
Entrance hall
Main objective is to provide visitors with a visible first point of contact and students and
staff with a transition zone from exterior and interior lighting levels.
Light naturally attracts people so a well lit reception area and reception desk
will help orientate visitors by giving them a visible point of reference.
Luminaires should be placed to help orientation by providing a luminous
pathway
Entrances with high ceilings lend themselves to the use of uplighting or
suspended lighting, both of which tend to provide good modelling.
Key luminaires:
50 | Applications and Techniques

Education
Corridors/Staircases
Main objective is to allow students and staff to move around the building safely.
As corridors and staircases are also main exit routes for emergency situations good
emergency lighting with way-guidance is necessary. Points of note are:
Bright ceilings and walls can make corridor areas seem more open and
appealing.
Wall mounted fittings can model peoples faces better.
Luminaires should be placed to help orientation by providing a luminous
pathway
For walls with an interesting texture using luminaires with a significant
downlight component positioned close to the wall can create an interesting
effect.
Stairs should be well lit and glare free. Lighting should prevent heavy
shadowing of steps, but must allow sufficient contrast for people to easily
identify changes in level.
Display lighting in corridors should be glare free for corridor users. Special
care is needed near stairs to prevent display lights causing glare to people on
the staircase.
Key luminaires:
Classrooms/Lecture halls
Main objectives are to ensure that students and staff have adequate light to perform their
tasks (such as reading, writing), that students can see any teaching aids used (such as a
whiteboard or projected information), that modelling is suitable to allow good
communication between students and staff.
A good vertical illuminance component should exist to aid the visibility of
wall-displays and improve modelling. Moderately strong modelling is
desirable for formal communication, whilst softer modelling is more suitable
for informal or close contact. Modelling is of special importance in areas for
students with special needs who may utilise lip-reading or signing.
Applications and Techniques | 51

Education
To help in the visibility of written text and diagrams a high contrast rendering
factor (CRF) should exist at all desks.
Specialised lighting for blackboards and whiteboards should be installed to
ensure good visibility for all students. These luminaires should not cause glare
for the user of the blackboard or whiteboard and be positioned to minimise
shadowing during use. If audio-visual projectors are used the luminaires
should not impede the projector beam and cause shadowing.
For rooms containing display screen equipment luminaires with suitable
optical control to remove any bright luminance above 65° should be used
Flexible luminaire controls should be employed to allow the use of projectors or
other audio-visual equipment. Flexible controls can also maximise the benefits of
daylight by dimming selected luminaires under good daylight conditions.
Key luminaires:
Laboratories/Workshops
Main objectives are to ensure that students and staff have adequate light to perform their
tasks (such as science experiments or craft projects) and that the lighting aids good
visibility and therefore safety. Points of note are:
Light falling on any position should be from multiple sources to prevent heavy
shadowing of the task by the student. However a general drift of light should be
present to help with modelling, as patterns of light and shade are essential to
allow objects to be correctly discerned and to create an interesting environment.
Good colour rendering is required.
For areas using machinery high frequency control gear should be used to
prevent any problems with stroboscopic effects resulting in rotating machinery
appearing to be stationary.
Key luminaires:
52 | Applications and Techniques

Education
Sports halls
Main objectives are to ensure that students and staff have adequate light to safely
participate in sporting activities. These may require visibility of relatively small objects
moving at high speed, or visual conditions suitable for the use of gymnastic equipment.
Points of note are:
All required sports should be defined and a design produced for the most
stringent requirements.
A good component of vertical illuminance should exist to aid the modelling of
objects and people.
Good colour rendering aids in the discrimination of team colours and sporting
equipment such as balls, etc. against the hall background.
The lighting should illuminate the entire three dimensional space, allowing
high objects to be easily seen.
The infinitely variable viewing positions of sports participants require good
glare control.
Luminaires should be robust and have protection against stray objects striking
them (such as a wire guard to protect the lamps). Ideally luminaires should be
designed and mounted to minimise the risks of object becoming trapped
within or behind them.
Lighting controls should be flexible to produce optimum conditions for all
required sports.
Key luminaires:
Assembly halls
Main objectives are to produce a suitable visual environment for all activities required
within the space. These may be school meetings, rehearsals and performances of school
productions, a space for formal written examinations, or others. Points of note are:
This is a place where the school presents itself to visitors at open events such
as school open days, meetings with parents or school productions and
concerts. Lighting should be designed to project a suitable image for the
school.
Applications and Techniques | 53

Education
Lighting control should be flexible to allow for lighting suitable for public
meetings, and also lighting that provides the flexibility of a small theatre for
public productions and concerts.
Lighting should have no flicker to minimise possible stress in examination
conditions.
Lighting should prevent shadowing of the task by the student, such as question
papers in formal examinations. Lighting should also gives a good CRF to
ensure good visibility of written text and diagrams.
Generally a viewing direction is defined by the hall design. Glare free
viewing in this direction should be ensured under all lit conditions.
For areas designed for presentations or performances, such as staging, good
vertical illuminance and colour rendering are required to aid in modelling and
discrimination.
Key luminaires:
54 | Applications and Techniques

Education
Schemes
Classrooms
Scheme: Design and Technology classroom, 15m x 7m x 2.7m
Luminaire(s) used: 15 custom 2x35W T16 luminaire
Floor: Eav = 558 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.75
Scheme: Circulation routes, varies x 2.7m high
Sche me: Circulation rout es, Luminaire(s) varies x 2.7m used: high Chalice 190 2x26W TC-D on 2.4m
Lumi naire(s) use d: Ch alice Floor: 190 2x26W Eav = 143 TC-D lux o; n Emin/Eav 2.4m ce = 0.22 ntres.
Scheme: Storeroom, 1.7m x 3.5m x 2.8m Floor: Eav = 143lux; E min/Eav = 0.22
Luminaire(s) used: 1 Diffusalux II 1x35W T16
Floor: Eav = 96 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.88
Scheme: Classroom, 7.5m x 5.5m x 2.6m
Luminaire(s) used: 6 Omega BD/MB 4x18W T26 and 2 Punch
1x58W T26 lighting front board
Desks: Eav = 518 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.70
Applications and Techniques | 55

Education
Suspended linear direct/indirect luminaires in a
university library. The ceiling adds significantly to the visual
interest of the scene and the linear luminaires mimic the
architecture of the ceiling beams, also producing a component
of uplight that lights up the ceiling and give it life.
Lyric ceiling mounted luminaires lighting a school corridor. The
line of luminaires helps give guidance as to the shape of the
corridor, and their appearance brightens the space and visually
lifts the ceiling, making the corridor appear pleasant and airy.
Recessed fluorescent luminaires lighting a classroom. The
luminaires are laid out to permit maximum flexibility within the
space and the walls are pleasantly lit to exhibit poster and
displays children’s work. However, a lack of controls mean
luminaires remain lit in unused sections of the room, and are
unable to save energy by using the daylight spilling in from
windows on the right of the photograph.
56 | Applications and Techniques

6.4 Industry indoor
Techniques
General
The purpose of industrial lighting is to enable quick and accurate work, safely, and in a
good visual environment. Points of note are:
Illuminance on the task is the main criteria used for industrial lighting.
Therefore the extent of the task area needs to be determined.
Illuminance is often required for a vertical task. Illuminance on a vertical
surface is much more sensitive to changes in the spacing between luminaires
than illuminance on a horizontal surface.
Industrial areas generally contain obstructions that affect the lighting. For
overhead obstructions where possible install lighting below the obstruction. If
the area contains a few large obstructions ensure that all parts of the space
are lit by at least two luminaires. If the space contains multiple or extensive
obstructions the spacing between luminaires will need to be reduced to
counteract these and additional low level supplementary lighting may be
required. In all cases care should be taken to ensure obstructions do not
cause shadowing on the task.
For lamps used in industrial lighting a colour-rendering index of not less than
80 is required for all continuously occupied spaces. An exception is high bay
applications where HST/HSE lamps are acceptable.
In areas containing rotating machinery stroboscopic effects should be
eliminated or reduced by either using high frequency control gear (if
available) or by having alternate luminaires on different electrical phases and
ensuring that critical areas receive light in approximately equal proportions
from more than one luminaire. Alternatively lighting of the machinery may be
supplemented using local luminaires.
Emergency lighting will be required to aid in the safe evacuation of the
building when the normal lighting fails. In some industrial applications there is
an additional requirement to ensure all processes are in a safe and stable
state before evacuating the area. For others there is a need to continue
operations, even though the normal lighting has failed. The extent and nature
of the emergency lighting required is determined by the type of occupancy,
the size and complexity of the site and the processes involved.
Applications and Techniques | 57

Industry indoor
Luminaires should be chosen to ensure they are suitable for the environmental
conditions in the space. Many industrial spaces have conditions of excessive
heat, cold, vibration or a corrosive atmosphere. Information on any airborne
chemicals is important as plastics and rubbers have differing resistance to
specific chemicals. Additionally in hazardous environments the lighting
equipment has to be carefully selected to ensure it does not pose a risk of fire
or explosion (see chapter on directives and standards).
Many industrial environments have impurities in the power supply due to
electrical motors running, or couplers connecting/disconnecting huge loads
giving spikes and voltage fluctuations. In conditions with poor quality of
power low loss magnetic ballasts should be considered instead of electronic
ballasts as they could be more durable and tolerant. Alternatively industrial
high frequency circuits with extra protection may be available.
At the design stage consideration should be given as to how the lighting
installation is to be maintained. Frequently, access to light fittings is difficult
and methods to improve ease of access should be considered, along with
use of technology that minimises the necessity for intervention for
maintenance.
Factory spaces - Points of note are;
Traditional factory spaces for heavy engineering and manufacturing have
high ceilings combined with a dirty environment. High bay lighting is most
suitable in these areas.
More modern manufacturing areas tend to have lower ceilings and a cleaner
environment. Linear fluorescent lighting is suitable for these areas and a
selection of mounting methods exist, from track mounting to catenary systems.
Lighting should take into account the possibility of moving overhead gantries
and moving vehicles such as forklift trucks.
Key luminaires:
58 | Applications and Techniques

Industry indoor
Workshops - Points of note are;
Tasks in a workshop vary from large tasks with little visual difficulty to small
task with high visual difficulty. The designer needs to understand the degree
of difficulty of the task to ensure that the task is adequately lit for the degree of
difficulty.
Generally ceiling heights are intermediate to low, and uniform lighting is
required across the entire space. Therefore either linear fluorescent reflector
luminaires or low bay luminaires with HID lamps are suitable
Key luminaires:
Assembly work - Points of note are;
Assembly work can vary from large tasks with little visual difficulty to small task
with high visual difficulty. Additionally colour discrimination may be of little
importance or essential. The designer needs to understand the degree of
difficulty of the task to ensure that the task is adequately lit for the degree of
difficulty.
In areas with lower ceilings fluorescent lighting is most suitable. The
advantages of this are the ability to produce fairly shadow free conditions, a
wide choice of lamps of different colour rendering capabilities and colour
appearance, and the ease of using lighting controls and emergency lighting.
For ceiling heights of 6m or less, care should be taken when using low bay
luminaires to prevent excessive glare.
Lighting should take into account the safety of pedestrians in the presence of
moving vehicles such as forklift trucks.
Store rooms - Points of note are;
For bulk storage at floor level it is generally important to avoid dense
shadows. A reasonable illuminance on vertical surfaces is required if the
reading of identification marks or labels is frequently necessary.
Applications and Techniques | 59

Industry indoor
A suitable method of lighting these spaces is to use a closely spaced overhead
layout of luminaires with a wide distribution.
Lighting should take into account the safety of pedestrians in the presence of
moving vehicles such as forklift trucks.
Storage rack areas - Points of note are;
High racking can reduce lighting levels by up to 50%. Therefore an empty
space calculated for 300 lux will only achieve approximately 150 lux if high
racks are installed with narrow aisles.
It is good practice to light narrow aisles with runs of fluorescent luminaires
with narrow distributions arranged along the aisles to even out the vertical
illuminance from top to bottom of the racking whilst giving adequate
illumination along the aisle.
For mounting heights above 15m HID lamps may be used in luminaires with
a narrow lighting distribution across the aisle and a wide lighting distribution
along the aisle.
Cold stores - Points of note are;
It must be ensured that the lamp and luminaire chosen are capable of
operating within the low temperatures involved.
Thermally insulated fluorescent lamps may be used. Alternatively high pressure
sodium lamps can operate reliably at –40°C.
Food and drink processing plants - Points of note are;
The food and drink industry covers a vast range of working areas, where
ambient temperatures can range from –30°C to 50°C, from oil or fat vapour
laden atmospheres to hazardous environments where the lighting equipment
has to be carefully selected to ensure it does not pose a risk of fire or
explosion. Therefore great care must be taken to ensure a suitable luminaire is
chosen for the specific conditions.
Where food product is processed luminaires near the product should be
housed in an enclosure that prevents the lamp or any part of the luminaire
accidentally falling into the product.
The luminaire should be easily cleaned, maintained and re-lamped, having
minimum horizontal surface area upon which dust can rest and smooth lines
with no crevices in which fungus can grow (IP55 minimum).
60 | Applications and Techniques

Industry indoor
Schemes
Aircraft Hanger
Scheme: Aircraft maintenance hanger, 125m x 40m, varying height
Luminaire(s) used: Concavia XL 1000W HIE, mounting height 15m, Concavia L 400W HIE, mounting
height 9m and Concavia L 250W HIE, mounting height 7m
Hanger area floor: E av = 591 lux ; E min /E av = 0.71
Applications and Techniques | 61

Industry indoor
Schemes
Storage racking
Scheme: Storage racking, racks 5.1m long x 6m high
Luminaire(s) used: 12 Indus RDx 2x49W T16, mounting height 6m
Racking: Eav (vertical) = 137 lux
A train workshop lit using fluorescent battens mounted on
trunking. The luminaires are positioned between the trains to
give a good vertical component of light falling on the sides of
the carriages.
Factory lighting using Popular Range luminaires. The
luminaires are track mounted to allow easy modification of the
lighting layout. It may therefore be easily adjusted to suit the
requirements or any changes to the layout of the factory space.
62 | Applications and Techniques

Industry indoor
Low-bay luminaires lighting a machine workshop. The Lopak
luminaires provide a good even illumination, allowing work
upon complex machines with minimum shadowing. Note that
this task has no special requirement for colour discrimination. If
this was the case the lamp type should be chosen to show
colours correctly.
Hi-bay luminaires lighting a large factory space. The luminaires
need to be able to cope with the relatively hostile and dirty
environment, and due to problems of access maintenance
requirements for the luminaires need to be minimal. The shape
of the luminaire aids in self-cleaning, directing air within the
reflector to help remove dirt, and the use of high pressure
sodium lamps ensures a long lamp life.
Applications and Techniques | 63

6.5 Industry outdoor
Techniques
General
The purpose of industrial lighting is to enable quick and accurate work, safely, and in a
good visual environment. Points of note are:
Illuminance on the task is the main criteria used for industrial lighting.
Therefore the extent of the task area needs to be determined.
Illuminance is often required for a vertical task. Illuminance on a vertical
surface is much more sensitive to changes in the spacing between luminaires
than illuminance on a horizontal surface.
Industrial areas generally contain obstructions that affect the lighting. For
overhead obstructions where possible install lighting below the obstruction. If
the area contains a few large obstructions ensure that all parts of the space
are lit by at least two luminaires. If the space contains multiple or extensive
obstructions the spacing between luminaires will need to be reduced to
counteract these and additional low level supplementary lighting may be
required. In all cases care should be taken to ensure obstructions do not
cause shadowing on the task.
Luminaires should be chosen to ensure they are suitable for the environmental
conditions in the space. Many industrial spaces have conditions of excessive
heat, cold, vibration or a corrosive atmosphere. Information on any airborne
chemicals is important as plastics and rubbers have differing resistance to
specific chemicals. Additionally in hazardous environments the lighting
equipment has to be carefully selected to ensure it does not pose a risk of fire
or explosion (section 9 - Directives and Standards).
Many industrial environments have impurities in the power supply due to
electrical motors running, or couplers connecting/disconnecting huge loads
giving spikes and voltage fluctuations. In conditions with poor quality of
power low loss magnetic ballasts should be considered instead of electronic
ballasts as they could be more durable and tolerant. Alternatively industrial
high frequency circuits with extra protection may be available.
At the design stage consideration should be given as to how the lighting
installation is to be maintained. Frequently access to light fittings is difficult
and methods to improve ease of access should be considered, along with
use of technology that minimises the necessity for intervention for
maintenance.
64 | Applications and Techniques

Industry outdoor
Building sites
Main objective is to provide a safe work environment in an area which may contain
machinery, motorised vehicles and pedestrians, along with building materials,
excavations and incomplete structures.
Building sites can provide a special environment, in that it is common for a
maximum permissible voltage of 110V to be stipulated for all equipment that
is accessible to site workers. This excludes the use of high-pressure discharge
fixtures except where installed at a height that excludes access by normal site
personnel. Temporary lighting is normally by special linear fluorescent or
tungsten halogen luminaires.
Luminaires should be sited to allow for vehicular access to all necessary
areas.
Key luminaires:
Cargo handling, storage areas
Main objective is to provide a safe work environment in an area which may contain
machinery, motorised vehicles and pedestrians and in which the size and position of
obstructions may vary over time.
Care should be taken to avoid lighting obscuring or decreasing the visibility
of signalling equipment. This can include direct light and reflected light from
other surfaces.
Lighting equipment should be sited to ensure it does not obstruct movement of
cargo handling equipment, and should not be in too close proximity to
electrified lines.
Higher light levels are required in areas where goods are loaded/unloaded
and for potential conflict areas where cargo is sorted into handling bays or
railway sidings.
Applications and Techniques | 65

Industry outdoor
For large container storage areas general area lighting may be insufficient for
giving adequate light on the task. Additional task lighting in the form of
floodlights mounted on crane structures, or low voltage sealed beam units
mounted on forklift trucks can be used. Additional local lighting can also be
used mounted on fixed hoppers and conveyors. It should be ensured that the
transition between areas with higher light levels to those with lower light levels
is gradual to allow the eye to adapt to the changed light level.
Key luminaires:
Petrochemical and other hazardous areas
Main objective is to provide a safe work environment in an area which may contain a
hazardous atmosphere, machinery, motorised vehicles and pedestrians and in which the
consequences of safety issues may be especially serious.
For petrochemical facilities and tank farms plant layout is normally complex
with major light obstruction and work being performed at many levels above
ground level. High mounted floodlights in a number of positions situated
outside the main area can provide adequate light for safe movement and
some task work. Additional task lighting may be required for specific
locations.
Luminaires used should be correct for the environment they are used in.
Environments are classified using the ATEX system and luminaires should be
adequate for the ATEX classification of the environment (section 9, Directives
and Standards).
66 | Applications and Techniques

Industry outdoor
Quarries and open cast workings
Main objective is to provide a safe work environment in an area that may contain
machinery, motorised vehicles, pedestrians and uneven and loose ground conditions.
With quarries and open cast mines the dimensions of the area to light will
change over time. Therefore the lighting installation should be designed for
the expected maximum dimensions of the excavations, both in size and depth
of workings. This will help prevent the need to relocate lighting masts, and
will allow forward planning for additional lighting to be installed as the
workings increase in size. As the workings increase in size re-aiming of
existing luminaires may be required.
Key luminaires:
Sales areas
Main objective is to advertise the presence of the sales area, and to allow customers to
examine and purchase goods. For areas such as petrol filling stations, safety is also very
important and local regulations for these should be consulted.
The illuminance of the sales area should be proportional to the brightness of
the surrounding district and should respect the requirements for the
environmental lighting zone classification (see section on control of obtrusive
light).
A high vertical component of light is generally required to show the sales
goods. Additionally the colour rendering qualities of the lighting should be
chosen to ensure the goods are displayed with a good colour appearance.
If the sales area is adjacent to a road care should be taken to ensure the
lighting does not introduce glare to motorists or pedestrians.
Key luminaires:
Applications and Techniques | 67

Industry outdoor
Lorry parks
Main objective is to provide a safe environment in an area that contains large motorised
vehicles and pedestrians.
Where possible lorry parks should be lit from the boundaries of the parking
area. This minimises the risk of columns and lighting being damaged by
manoeuvring vehicles. If columns have to be mounted within the parking area
they should be protected by crash barriers or similar.
Lighting should be mounted as high as possible (12m or more above ground
level) to minimise shadowing from lorry trailers.
Ease of maintenance should be considered during design, and head-frames
that may be raised and lowered should be considered.
Key luminaires:
68 | Applications and Techniques

Industry outdoor
Schemes
Transformer sub-station
Scheme: Transformer sub-station
Luminaire(s) used: Troika 400W HST (main building) and PRT 500W QT-DE with 3m mounting
height (transformer areas)
Typical transformer area: E av = 23 lux
Applications and Techniques | 69

Industry outdoor
Schemes
Railway lighting
Scheme: Railway lighting, section 100m x 24m
Luminaire(s) used: Victor Stora 150W HST catenary mounted with 7.3m mounting height,
3 luminaires per wire, and 250W HST mounted columns with 10.3m
mounting height, 1 luminaire per column. Columns spaced at 25m
Track area: E av = 41 lux ; E min /E av = 0.22
Floodlighting at a port facility. The floodlights mounted on
the top of the structure light the suspended walkway, whilst
additional floodlights mounted below the walkway prevent
deep shadows being cast by the walkway onto the dockside.
70 | Applications and Techniques

6.6 Healthcare
Techniques
General
The lighting of healthcare spaces presents one of the most difficult tasks for any lighting
designer, lighting both for an enormous range of tasks, some times requiring extreme
levels of visual performance and yet creating a space that satisfies today’s energy
requirements and just as importantly the comfort needs of the patients, staff and visitors.
The choice of lighting can affect task performance, well-being and whether patients and
visitors feel the space is clean and safe. The information given below is in two sections,
the fundamental requirements for lighting for healthcare and lighting requirements for
specific locations.
The fundamental requirements for lighting for healthcare could be as follows:
Cleanliness
Infection control is of prime importance in all healthcare buildings. Airborne
particulates as small as 0.5µm can transfer harmful bacteria. In addition,
transmission by the touch of a hand can add to the spread of infection. In
lighting terms we need to defend against this by using luminaires that have
the minimum area of horizontal or near horizontal surfaces on which dust may
collect. All luminaires that could collect dust or be touched by hand should be
designed to be easily cleaned.
In areas of high infection risk, luminaires with only downward and vertical
faces or those specifically designed for clean environments. Such luminaires
will utilise materials impervious to bacteria, and also designed with suitable
ingress protection for dust and moisture both into the luminaire and from the
ceiling void through the luminaire into the clean space.
Daylight
Research shows that daylight and window view can have positive effects on
patients, their sleep patterns, circadian rhythms and recovery rates form many
illnesses. Thus it is common practice for modern spaces to include good
daylight design. Given that good levels of daylight should be expected in
areas for treatment, administration, waiting, circulation and overnight stay, the
use of lighting controls offers not only added comfort but also impacts heavily
on energy. The addition of lighting controls can allow for changing tasks,
changes in daylight and add levels of user comfort to a space.
Applications and Techniques | 71

Healthcare
Fields of view
Colour
Remember that the field of view in many healthcare spaces may include the
ceiling and upper walls and often may include luminaires. The point of view
of a recumbent patient will need to be thought about to limit discomfort glare
in many circulation and treatment spaces.
Skin tone and eye colour in many healthcare establishments are often
important in diagnosis. This is extended to include flesh and other colours
during invasive treatments. Hence the ability of light sources to render true
colours is vital in all areas where diagnosis and treatment is carried out, and
a consistent, high quality source of colour rendering should be provided. All
lamps within these areas should have an Ra of at least 90.
In other spaces where diagnosis and treatment is not carried out colour
rendering can be relaxed to an Ra of 80, but on no account should lamps of
different colour rendering be mixed in the same space.
The other aspect to colour is that of colour temperature. Common practice is
to use 4000K lamps in all healthcare spaces, but in areas where there is a
wish to provide a more homely feel, the colour temperature may need to be
matched to that prevalent at home, for example nearer 2700K for the UK.
Similarly different colour temperatures should not be mixed in any one space.
Emergency lighting
Emergency lighting is required for the movement of patients, staff and visitors
to a place of safety. In certain healthcare buildings the emergency lighting
will need to take account of tasks that have to continue even when other
spaces may be evacuated, this is called Standby lighting. In critical areas,
such as operating theatres, delivery rooms and high dependency units, the
illuminance provided by the standby lighting should equal 90% of the normal
mains illuminance or there about. Other important tasks but in non-critical
areas will require standby lighting generally to 50% of the normal level.
Some patients will almost certainly be physically or mentally incapacitated. In
this case it is likely that the condition of patients will mean it is difficult to
evacuate them in an emergency. Emergency lighting for these situations
should be sufficient to allow progressive evacuation, or to allow time at points
of refuge. Apart from the above emergency lighting should be designed to
meet the requirements of EN1838.
A generator will generally supply standby lighting and special account of the
changeover and run up time will be needed. Escape routes generally will be
covered by luminaires with integral emergency control gear.
72 | Applications and Techniques

Healthcare
Light for comfort
Recent research shows strong links between good lighting, the colour of light
and human comfort. For instance warm colour temperatures make patients
look healthier and improve patient moral, but care must be taken to prevent
compromising the ability for clinical diagnosis.
Recent research also indicates that light therapy may have potential for
improving the quality of life for elderly people. The reception of blue light
decreases with age due to the aging of the eye reducing its efficiency,
especially at the blue end of the spectrum. Also in the elderly the reduction in
mobility and tolerance of adverse weather (such as cold, wind and rain)
mean elderly people experience a reduction in ability to go out of doors.
Therefore they receive less exposure to bright light, and especially bright light
of the correct wavelengths. Additionally the circadian functions may be
compromised through age and damage caused by small strokes. All of these
result in poor quality of sleep. Light therapy may be used to help improve
sleep quality, using both artificial light and by designing the environment to
aid access to natural light and to make the outdoor environment more
attractive and friendly. However the use of blue biased white light for health is
still a relatively new concept with limited knowledge on benefits and potential
side-effects so at present blue biased white light should be used sparingly and
with care.
Artificial lighting should incorporate features to help provide sufficient light
during waking hours for health benefits, but during the night only provide
minimum light for safety, preferable amber, orange or red in colour, to preserve
the bodies sleep cycle. Importantly, the consequences of any artificial lighting
on the carers should be carefully considered to prevent further problems.
Colour and reflectance
High reflectance materials are required to give visual lightness, otherwise the
surface and hence the space itself will appear dark. Equally areas of strong
colour, such as murals in children’s wards, will need to be well lit to give full
vibrancy.
High chroma colours will affect clinical diagnosis – Grey is a good, if boring,
clinical background and has been shown to relax and reduce stress. But the
effect of surface colour can be immense, not only in terms of reflected light but
also energy efficiency and wellbeing. For instance colour should be chosen to
flatter the patients appearance, soft lighting enhances this. Also consider
colour psychology e.g. Use of blues and green (used for calming effect in
mental health institutions) may actually exacerbate depression, the modern
fashions (greys and browns) may be under stimulating for long-term patients.
Applications and Techniques | 73

Healthcare
The lighting requirements for specific locations could be as follows:
Entrance canopies
It is important that entrances are clearly lit to advertise the way into the
building whilst providing sufficient light for the task perhaps including driving,
unloading ambulances, access for wheel chairs, and so on.
Lighting solutions should provide good vertical illumination avoiding down
lights with harsh cut-offs. This will provide good facial recognition for CCTV.
Entrance halls, waiting areas and lift lobbies
Reception
Lighting here should emphasise points of interest such as reception desks,
signage and onward routes.
Where there are a number of routes to different departments signage may
take the form of coloured lines, flooring or other decoration, the lighting
should enhance this where ever possible
These areas, including enquiry and patient reception, should make the patient
and visitor feel welcome and provide both staff and visitors with good facial
modelling through good vertical illuminance.
Staff here will often have to use computer display screens, but the emphasis
on this should never out weigh user comfort. An approach focused on the
many tasks and points of view is important.
Hospital streets and other circulation routes
Hospital “streets” form the major links between clinical departments with
smaller corridors often running off to other areas. Streets will have relatively
high use and will be wider and often higher than conventional corridors. In
many corridors, certainly those in areas occupied by patient’s overnight, the
lighting will require dimming or switching to a lower level at night. This is can
be achieved either through dimming or switching, care being needed to
maintain uniformity above 0.2.
Where there is sufficient daylight savings can be made using daylight linked
dimming controls.
Spill light and glare to patient rooms and to trolley bourn patients must also
be considered, the latter being achieved through asymmetric luminaires
mounted along one side of the corridor.
74 | Applications and Techniques

Healthcare
Stairs
Ward corridors need specific night lighting techniques to allow safe
movement of staff without affecting patient rest. The lighting near the doors to
bedded wards will require careful illuminance and luminance control. Three
hour self-contained emergency lighting is needed on all escape routes.
Stairs require careful lighting and tread colour design to ensure the tread is
clear to all users including those with visual disability. Treads need clear and
reasonably uniform lighting with some element of contrast to the riser.
Glare from wall-mounted fittings should be limited by using lower brightness
light sources, whereas soffit mounted luminaires often create installation and
maintenance problems.
Stairs will need careful emergency lighting.
WCs, washrooms and changing areas
Lighting should be sympathetic avoiding harsh directional light or shadowing.
Lighting should be positioned for lockers, mirrors sinks and make up areas
with the task, facial modelling and veiling reflections in mind.
In wet or humid environments the lighting should be of a suitable ingress
protection, normally IP54 or better.
Lighting of bedded areas
The general lighting must be adequate for the care of the patients by the
nursing staff. For these duties to be performed efficiently the illuminance inside
a curtained bedded area should be no less than 300 lux from a combination
of ambient and task lighting and the illuminance in the central space between
the bed foot rails should be not less than 100 lux (75 lux when all curtains
are closed), measured at floor level. Good glare control is needed with UGR
limited to 19. However, note that in some countries additional luminaire
luminance limits are also specified.
The balance of brightness and colour of the surroundings should help to
provide a visually pleasing interior. To achieve this the reflectance of the major
surfaces should be of the order of 0.7 for the ceiling, 0.5 for the walls and
0.2 for the floor, though higher ceiling and wall reflectance is essential when
lighting the ward from the bed head position.
Suspended luminaires: The ceiling height for suspended luminaires should not
be less than 3m to ensure adequate clearance for mobile apparatus used at
the bedside. The mounting height above the floor should not be less than
2.7m nor greater than 3.5m.
Applications and Techniques | 75

Healthcare
Ceiling mounted luminaires: The ceiling height may be 3m or less. In areas
with ceiling heights between 2.4m and 2.7m, it is possible to provide the
recommended illuminance at the bedhead only by using ceiling mounted
luminaires.
Wall mounted luminaires: Modern lighting systems comply with the general
recommendations using only semi direct wall mounted luminaires with
fluorescent lamps. The most suitable height for wall-mounted luminaires is a
minimum of 1.7m.
Recessed and semi-recessed luminaires: Recessed and semi-recessed
luminaires may be used in ceilings between 2.4m and 3m high. If these
luminaires will not provide the illuminance required at the bedhead a dual
system will be required.
Dual systems: For dual systems in which supplementary lighting along the side
walls of the bedded area is used, ceiling mounted luminaires may still be
suitable.
Reading lights/examination lighting: The patient’s reading light is required to
give 300 lux directly on a task area in front of the patient. Staff or nursing
tasks at the bedhead can also use the reading light. If treatment is given at
the bedside requiring an illuminance exceeding 300 lux, either a mobile
examination luminaire is required or the reading light is to be designed to
provide this illuminance by switching. Hand-held switches, if used, should be
of the extra low voltage type. Reading lights are usually provided for all beds
in hospitals, but it may be undesirable to have them within easy reach of
children and mentally ill patients. For such circumstances, high-level wall or
ceiling mounted luminaires should be used and the switches should be out of
the patient’s reach.
Night lighting: Night lighting is required to provide enough light for safe
movement of patients and staff. It should not disturb lightly sleeping patients.
The luminance of any luminaire left on during the night should not exceed
30 cd/m2 as seen by patients from their beds, the cut off angle being 20°
within the curtained area and 35° in central zones. The illuminance for the
circulation space should be an average 5 lux on circulation spaces, 0.85m
off the floor and a maximum of 10lux. The illuminance on the bedhead
should not exceed 0.5 lux
Watch lighting: The purpose of watch lighting is to allow continuous
observation of a particular patient after the general lighting has been
switched off, without the disturbance, which would be caused by the patient’s
reading light. An illuminance of 15-20 lux is adequate.
76 | Applications and Techniques

Healthcare
Nurses’ stations and staff bases
Nurses’ stations provide for a number of tasks including dispensing medicine,
ad hoc meetings, greeting visitors and PC use. Lighting should allow for all
these tasks both during the day and at night. To do so will require lighting that
has good luminance control both to reduce glare to PC users and patients
sleeping nearby.
Dimming control is essential to allow staff to reduce the illuminance at night.
Operating Theatres and associated clinical spaces
Lighting here needs to provide for clinical examination, preparation, treatment
and movement, this will include good vertical illuminance from the ambient
lighting. The theatre surgical lights are specialist and should be provided as
part of the overall theatre equipment.
Lighting colour rendering and temperature should be chosen for clinical
diagnosis rather than energy efficiency.
In an emergency all lighting should be retained at full brightness.
Lighting also needs to provide good uniformity, be dimmable to suit the
surgical need and take account of the high number of monitoring screens,
often using negative polarity displays.
Luminaires chosen for these spaces must be easy to clean and maintain and
should have an IP rating of 65 from below and 54 or better from above.
Ancillary areas & other specialist spaces
Healthcare buildings contain many ancillary areas to do with the efficient and
safe functioning of the whole building. Many of these are covered elsewhere,
but special care may need to be paid to protecting healthcare environments
from hospital bourn diseases. Improved IP ratings or luminaires suitable for
regular wash down and cleaning may need to be considered.
In specialist treatment and examination rooms not mentioned above there may
be other requirements too, such as dimming and glare control in ophthalmic
rooms, noise and EMC control in scanner and audiology and electromedical
screening rooms.
Applications and Techniques | 77

Healthcare
Schemes
Healthcare rooms
Scheme: 4-bed ward, 7.6m x 6.6m x 2.7m
Luminaire(s) used: Bedhead mounted uplight and reading light
Ward floor: E av = 141 lux ; E min /E av = 0.68
Scheme: Consulting room, 8m x 3m x 2.7m
Luminaire(s) used: 3 Diffusalux Hospital 2x35W T16
Desk height: E av = 440 lux ; E min /E av = 0.7
78 | Applications and Techniques

Healthcare
Lighting in hospital wards may use bed head luminaires with
integrated services such as oxygen, electricity, etc. or ceiling
mounted luminaires (either surface mounted or recessed). The
advantage of a bed head luminaire is the flexibility of lighting,
with uplighting supplying ambient light to the ward, and
differing amounts of down light allowing a patient to read or a
doctor to examine the patient. An additional advantage for bed
head systems is ease of access for maintenance and cleaning.
Ceiling mounted luminaires allow easier centralised control of
lighting by nursing staff and may be a more energy efficient
solution as, unlike bed head systems, they do not rely on uplight
being reflected from the ceiling to give ambient lighting to the
room. When using ceiling recessed lighting it is important that
it is planned in conjunction with other services to ensure a clear
space in the ceiling void for the luminaire.
Corridors and circulation areas should be well lit and airy.
Ideally ceiling mounted lighting should avoid the centre of
the corridor as recumbent patients being wheeled along the
corridor should not be looking directly into a luminaire as this
may be glaring, and looking into luminaires whilst travelling
down the corridor may create an unpleasant flicker effect.
Applications and Techniques | 79

6.7 Super/hypermarket
Techniques
General
The purpose of a super/hypermarket lighting scheme is to make the store as appealing
as possible to customers. It also needs to satisfy more down-to-earth requirements such as
facilitating orientation or to attract customer attention to special displays or points of
interests. Luminaires have to be chosen in order to underline and reinforce the individual
character of the shop brand or chain of stores. Colour appearance of the light
determines the overall ambience but colour rendering characteristics have a direct
impact on ensuring that the objects are shown to their best advantage.
The fundamental requirements for shop lighting could be as follows:
Creating atmosphere: the way goods are presented and lit, as well as the
general atmosphere, can positively influence a customer.
Creating interest: using accent lighting to create areas that make a customer
curious and wanting to see more.
Visual guidance: the lighting must help the customer navigate around the
shop.
Flexibility: marketing trends and initiatives change frequently and in order to
influence customers into rediscovering a shop it should be possible to easily
adapt the lighting to new requirements.
Lighting should allow consumers to examine the merchandise and should help
complete the sale.
General lighting
Main objective is to provide a background ambience and to give light for guidance,
especially in the case of frequent modifications to the store layout or promotions.
As well as good horizontal light levels vertical light levels are important as
shop goods tend to be held in vertical shelving units
As this is background store lighting a high uniformity is required
Luminaires should be placed perpendicular to shelving in order to facilitate
any reorganisation of the shelving and the possibility of variable spacing of
shelving due to different types of goods being sold in different areas.
80 | Applications and Techniques

Super/hypermarket
Key luminaires:
Accent lighting
By locally increasing or decreasing the quantity of light it is possible to create variation
in shadows and brightness. The aim of this is to give a maximum expression to
merchandise, enhancing form, texture and colour in contrast with the surroundings.
Ideally this should optimise the relationship between space, product and customer in
order to enhance the prospects of a sale.
Accent lighting should be at least 3x brighter than the surround to be
noticeable or 5x brighter to be meaningful.
Focal-point lighting, which highlights a specific central display with feature
merchandise, should be 10x brighter than the surround and generally uses
spotlighting
Display case lighting illuminates merchandise in glass or open cases and
shelves. It can be linear fluorescent or spotlighting depending on the type of
display
Perimeter lighting provides vertical illumination for merchandise along walls,
such as vertical shelving and can use valance systems or linear wall-washing
systems
Key luminaires:
Lighting clothing
The primary purpose of lighting is to make merchandise look good, increasing the
desirability of the item leading to a sale. When lighting clothing a flexible lighting
solution is needed to allow the lighting to be reconfigured when displays are altered or
moved. The market positioning of the store (high, mid, low-tier) should be considered
when designing the installation, and also the possible options for display, as clothing
Applications and Techniques | 81

Super/hypermarket
may be hung on rails, displayed on shelves or shown in an entirely novel way. Differing
materials used in the design of the display fittings and the size of the displays will require
differing lighting techniques. However lighting should remain discrete to ensure the main
focus is the merchandise, and should be as efficient as practicable.
One of the main issues with clothing is colour rendering and colour
temperature. Customers need to see the items they are thinking of buying in a
quality of light that shows the garment correctly. Any post purchase
dissatisfaction when seeing the article in the daylight must be avoided. The
Ra of the lamp must be at least 85 so that colours are reproduced as faithfully
as possible. Also note that the UV characteristics of the lamp should be
checked to ensure that it is suitable for the material being lit and will cause no
effects such as fading of colours.
New generations of metal halide lamp offer a wide choice of warm or cool
white light. LEDs with their improved performance are also becoming more
widely used. LED luminaires can be smaller and easy to blend into the
background. However, downlights and track mounted spotlights remain the
most common fixtures.
Key luminaires:
Greengrocery
Main objectives are to ensure that fruits and vegetables are shown under the best colour
rendering bright light. Using specific type of lamps that create colourful accents can
bring out freshness of produce. Warm accents are preferred with a low content of
actinic radiations (to prevent fading of colour in goods) and low heat radiation.
This kind of light is often realised with suspended structures hanging above
the displays allowing spotlights integration.
Key luminaires:
82 | Applications and Techniques

Super/hypermarket
Bakery, cheese and delicatessen
A warm, oven-fresh appearance can be created on the bread, while cream pastries
appear appetising when illuminated by halogen lamps or warm white metal halide.
Key luminaires:
Wines and spirits
A lower lighting level helps to recreate the atmosphere of a wine cellar. With lower dark
ceilings mounted with fluorescent downlights the atmosphere may be emphasised further.
Key luminaires:
Fresh food counters
The ceiling is often lower than in the rest of the hypermarket. Recessed luminaires
provide a good illuminance level, accentuating the freshness of the displays with a
combination of different high Ra colour lamps.
Key luminaires:
Applications and Techniques | 83

Super/hypermarket
Task lighting
This provides illumination for a specific functional area such as the checkout counter. This
is not to be confused with accent or focal-point lighting. Particular attention has to be
paid to avoid any glare at the cashier position in order to assure a comfortable activity
with no mistakes. The area beyond the checkout should be lit to a level that provides a
transition zone for shoppers leaving the supermarket and going into daylight or the dark
of night.
Key luminaires:
Guidance
Indoor guidance - due to the diversity of goods a clear communication with colours,
graphemes, and lighting has to be established in order to guide customers. This
guidance is sometimes mandatory for safety reasons: exit ways being indicated in case
of emergency evacuations.
Key luminaires:
Signage
Additional to guidance the use of lighting to signal locations and features is important.
For outdoor lighting, facades, communication, logos, etc. help present the sales policy
and brand positioning.
Key luminaires:
84 | Applications and Techniques

Super/hypermarket
Schemes
Super-store
Scheme: Computer super-store, 37m x 51m x 7m
Luminaire(s) used: Primata II 2x58W T26 with 5m mounting height, Sirios 150W HIT-DE
(spotlight) and 2x55W Voyager Twinspot (emergency lighting)
Sales area: Eav = 802 lux ; E min /E av = 0.68
Applications and Techniques | 85

Super/hypermarket
Schemes
Hypermarket
Scheme: Hypermarket, 80m x 63m
Luminaire(s) used: Arena 2x70W T26
Floor: E av = 980 lux ; E min /E av = 0.83
Wall-washing luminaires illuminating food products on shelving.
It is important to ensure a good level of vertical illuminance
on shelving so that products are adequately lit. Colour of light
can make a large impact on the appearance of goods and
should be carefully matched to the requirements of the product
on display.
86 | Applications and Techniques
Scheme: Hypermarket, 80m x 63m
Luminaire(s) used: Arena 2x70W T26
Floor: E av = 560 lux ; E min /E av = 0.76

Super/hypermarket
The lighting should allow for large obstructions such as signage
and seasonal decorations to be displayed without causing
shadowing.
Lighting demands may vary across the store, with differing
store configuration and colour needs. Accent lighting along the
front of counters can make them stand out and appear more
welcoming.
Consideration should be given as to the goods being lit. Glass
and crystal objects should be made to sparkle, light appearing
to come from inside the object, whilst solid objects such as
clothes need to have light projected onto them.
Applications and Techniques | 87

6.8 Road lighting
Techniques
General
The human eye does not perform well in the dark or at dusk when visual performance is
impaired by lower visual acuity, poorer colour discrimination and a much lower
tolerance to disability glare – hence the increased accident risk to drivers and
pedestrians.
Road lighting plays a very important role in reducing accidents, and research has
shown that good road lighting will significantly reduce accidents. Road lighting provides
guidance through conflict areas such as junctions. This can be reinforced by the use of
different lamp colours to distinguish a change of road classification or area definition.
Road lighting can also have a secondary effect of preventing crime.
The amount of light required on a road to reveal objects i.e. vehicles, pedestrians and
obstructions depends upon the amount or density of traffic, the speed of the traffic and if
pedestrians are present – mixed usage areas. Crime rates also determine the lighting
level required. For traffic routes a silhouette vision system is used.
Operating costs and environmental impact are important and the use of photocells to
reduce the number of hours the lighting is used can be very economical. Lighting control
systems can provide even further savings by allowing switching or dimming of lamps at
of-peak or night time situations. Points of note are:
Luminance is the main criteria for traffic route lighting, so the road
characteristics and the observer positions needs to be determined.
If illuminance has to be considered all the involved areas have to be taken
into account including vehicles and pedestrian.
As one of main concerns in road lighting is extended maintenance operations
luminaires with high IP ratings are recommended
In addition to extended maintenance periods it is also desirable to reduce the
maintenance and installation operations to a minimum, therefore the use of a
tool-free lantern is suggested.
Lamps with a high luminous efficacy are mainly used, preferably HST/E ones.
Additionally latest technology has improved efficacy in lamps with a higher
colour rendering such as CFL and HIT-CE and some of the latest standards
benefit this technology and allows using a lower class but improving the
quality of the light.
88 | Applications and Techniques

Road lighting
The use of electronic control gear is recommended. Although this increases
initial investment it is shortly repaid by extending lamp life and maintenance
periods.
Lighting controls for road lighting applications cover a wide range of
applications, from a single fitting controlled by a photocell to a large-scale
installation monitored from a remote control point and managing luminaire
data in real time. Therefore lighting controls should be considered because in
addition to reducing power consumption they extend lamp life and give the
possibility to remotely identify failures and optimise maintenance operations.
Multiple fitting enclosures are available although each has an optimal
application. Polycarbonate enclosures are more resistant to vandal attacks,
shallow glass maximises optical performance and flat glass reduces possible
glare issues.
In low mounting height installations with a risk of vandal attacks, a
polycarbonate bowl is highly recommended and the use of vandal proof
screws to fix the luminaire to the column and reinforced closing clips secured
by special screws are also recommended.
When considering a possible proposal for a road it is recommended to have
information of the existing road lighting. Many projects are a continuation of
previous installations or new parts from a previously light area. In these cases
it is good to introduce newer technologies without confusing the users. Better
optical fittings can be used but try to keep a similar layout, mounting height,
etc.
At the design stage not only the requirements for the road have to be
considered, in all cases the adjacent areas should be taken into account and
that will define the best option. When houses and the road are close to each
other low mounting heights, use of brackets and low glare fittings are a highly
recommended although this may not lead to be the best functional solution.
Highways and high speed roads - Points of note are;
These roads are designed for high speeds (>60km/h) and no pedestrians,
cyclists or slow vehicles are involved. There are no intersections and access is
controlled.
Traditional mounting heights are above 12 m to properly light a twin
carriageway with 3 or 4 lanes plus a hard shoulder at either side. Brackets
should be considered to optimise performance.
Applications and Techniques | 89

Road lighting
Although traditionally columns have been installed in a central reservation, an
opposite installation with columns behind the hard shoulder can improve
maintenance operations and reduce traffic disruption when in process.
As glare becomes a major concern an optimised designed optic and/or the
use of flat glass enclosures are necessary.
Key luminaires:
Main Roads - Points of note are;
The main usage of the road is for vehicles at high speed (>60km/h) but
pedestrians, cyclists or slow vehicles may also be present on footpaths, cycle
paths and slow lanes. Intersections can be present and need special
attention.
A common installation is using columns around 10m high and in an opposite
or twin central configuration but it needs to always be related to the road
layout, the number of lanes involved and the lighting criteria to achieve.
Where cycle and pedestrian pathways are present the use of luminaires with
different lamp settings is beneficial to comply with requirements for the road
and also to be able to correctly light the pathways without needing to change
the pole characteristics.
As in all road lighting applications a high IP rating has to be considered to
extend maintenance periods.
Key luminaires:
90 | Applications and Techniques

Road lighting
Ring roads and radial roads - Points of note are;
These are usually medium speed roads and high-speed urban roads where
pedestrians and cyclists are common.
Luminaire mounting heights around 8 and 10m in a staggered or single sided
arrangement are usual, although many other possibilities can be considered
due to the multiple layouts of these roads.
As these roads can be of multiple lanes the main concern is the common use
by cyclist and pedestrians usage.
In some cases, when a road has many lanes and cycle and/or pedestrian
pathways are also present the use of twin poles may be considered (i.e.
using an additional luminaire at a separate mounting height to light the
adjacent pathways) or alternatively the use of bollards which also provide a
physical separation between traffic types. In these cases using different light
sources for motorised and other traffic (such as high pressure sodium and a
white light lamp) can help to differentiate between the two areas.
Key luminaires:
Mixed traffic roads - Points of note are;
These are normally medium to low speed roads with a large number of slow
vehicles and pedestrians. Intersections are very common. Regional roads and
urban roads are mainly part of this group as well as commercial streets.
Columns no higher than 8m are commonly used in a single sided or
staggered layout, although in some commercial streets with wide footpaths an
additional column and luminaire may be used to achieve high quality lighting
and differentiate areas.
For regional roads low luminance classes should be applied and illuminance
classes where pedestrian usage is relevant.
Key luminaires:
Applications and Techniques | 91

Road lighting
Residential and local roads - Points of note are;
These roads are normally used by low speed mixed traffic. Pedestrian areas
and local and residential roads are mainly part of this group.
Low mounting heights are common, with column height usually under 6m.
Single sided layouts may be used to reduce installation costs although layouts
may vary due to multiple access points to private car parks or properties. The
use of staggered layouts is common when parking lanes and wide footpaths
are present.
Lighting classes tend to be from lower categories and in residential areas the
use of high colour rendering lamps to improve perception is recommended.
In applications where crime ratios are high and facial recognition is required
vertical and semi-cylindrical illuminance classes should be applied.
Low glare luminaires should be considered to reduce light trespass onto
adjacent residential housing. Additionally the location and the orientation of
the luminaires can help avoid any light trespass into houses.
Key luminaires:
Conflict areas and junctions - Points of note are;
In these areas traffic, either motorised or pedestrian, converges from many
directions. Lighting in these areas has to increase awareness and guidance to
drivers and pedestrians regarding the geometry of the area and the position
of other users.
In terms of lighting the highest applicable class should be used in these areas,
using the highest class of the incoming roads.
92 | Applications and Techniques

Road lighting
Access and exit lanes should be highlighted, including a short section of these
lanes away from the conflict area. This is to ensure any obstacle in these
areas is visible.
When positioning the luminaires the main aim is to help the incoming vehicles
visibility. When entering a junction from a minor road a luminaire should be
positioned to make vehicles visible as they approach the conflict area.
Columns can play a major role not only in terms of providing lighting but also
to give guidance to the geometry of the area. A common technique is to
increase the height of the columns in the conflict area and on the approaches.
On roundabouts columns placed in a single sided configuration around the
outer part of a curve provide a clear guidance for a driver as they approach
the area.
Key luminaires:
Applications and Techniques | 93

Road lighting
Schemes
Traffic
Scheme: Traffic route, 3 lanes, opposite arrangement. Total width 10.95m
Luminaire(s) used: Triumph 1 150W HST, 10m mounting height, 36m spacing, 5° tilt
Road: L av = 5.75 cd/m² ; E min /E av = 0.59;
Threshold increment = 2%
Scheme: Access ramp, width 4m
Luminaire(s) used: Orus 70W CDM-T, 0.9m mounting height, 10.5m spacing
Road: E av = 33 lux ; E min = 15 lux
94 | Applications and Techniques

Road lighting
Lighting columns and fixtures may be themed to blend into
and complement the area they are situated within. Careful
choice of column height is necessary to prevent lighting
becoming excessively visible and detracting from the view.
However, a column height that is too low will reduce installation
performance and require additional lanterns.
Whenever designing an installation the impact of the lighting
hardware on a scene during daylight hours should be
considered, as well as the performance of the lighting during
darkness.
Catenary lighting solutions in which the lanterns are suspended
along the centre of the carriageway are popular in many
countries and remove the need for lighting columns and
brackets. This can create a less cluttered environment at street
level, although in architecturally interesting areas thought should
be given as to the effect of the additional cabling on the field
of view.
Frequently lighting columns collect additional street furniture,
such as banners or signage. Lighting columns are constructed
to withstand a defined windage (that is the force of the wind
on the column). Windage is directly related to the surface
area of any furniture mounted on or fixed to the column, and
therefore adding additional objects to the column will increase
the windage loading, and may cause weakening of the column
and structural failure.
Applications and Techniques | 95

6.9 Urban – decorative roadlighting and
amenity areas
Techniques
General
Amenity lighting provides the essential lighting for the city or town shopping centres,
residential streets, cycle paths, pedestrian crossings, precincts, town squares, parks, car
parks both indoor and outdoor, underpasses and general security lighting. The mix of
slow moving vehicles and pedestrians creates a challenge and the main emphasis is
towards pedestrians, reducing accidents and helping prevent crime and the fear of
crime.
Lighting can fulfil both functional and decorative elements by providing sufficient lighting
to provide orientation and direction with security after dark. Good amenity lighting can
provide guidance through city or town areas by the use of themed lighting, whether by
using styled lighting equipment or by the use of different colour appearance light sources
to provide aesthetic interest.
Operating costs and environmental impact are important and the use of photocells to
reduce the number of hours the lighting is used can be very economical. Lighting control
systems can provide even further savings by allowing switching or dimming of lamps at
of-peak or night time situations.
Feeder Roads - Points of note are;
The risk of accidents is much greater on feeder roads from the high volume
and speed of vehicles, particularly where children, elderly, partially sighted
and handicapped pedestrians are present. Correctly designed lighting
systems however will help drivers and pedestrians recognise potentially
dangerous situations and will also help reduce crime against people, vehicles
and property.
Feeder Roads generally use asymmetric light distribution street lanterns on
8–10m columns with outreach arms to position the lantern in the optimum
location for road geometry. Alternatively lanterns can be post top mounted
(without the outreach arm) but the lanterns will need the ability to re-direct the
lantern peak intensity (typically using an adjustable lampholder) into road
centre to improve efficiency and reduce installation and running costs.
For dual carriageway installations lanterns mounted back to back on centrally
mounted lighting columns provide good economy and lighting efficiency.
However it is important to ensure the pavements are adequately illuminated.
96 | Applications and Techniques

Urban – decorative roadlighting and
amenity areas
White light sources – Metal halide, compact fluorescent and induction lamps
provide good colour rendering conditions for drivers and pedestrians,
improving visual perception and helping to provide early warning of
impending situations. High-pressure sodium light sources are more efficient but
suffer from poorer colour rendering characteristics.
Vandalism should not be a problem to lanterns mounted at 8-10m but in
extreme cases polycarbonate bowls might be required.
Key luminaires:
Local and residential roads - Points of note are;
For local and residential roads post top lanterns on 5-8m poles with a
symmetric or asymmetric distribution will help provide good vertical
illuminance. Light above the horizontal should be avoided to reduce sky
glow, improve efficiency and create less glare to drivers and residents.
Narrow pavements may need lanterns mounted using wall brackets.
Lanterns can be themed or styled to suit neighbourhood road and architectural
layout. Strongly themed lanterns may require a lower mounting height 4-5m.
White light sources provide good colour rendering conditions for drivers and
pedestrians improving visual perception and helping to provide early warning
of impending situations.
Vandal and impact resistant luminaires may be required using polycarbonate.
Key luminaires:
Applications and Techniques | 97

Urban – decorative roadlighting and
amenity areas
Open Pedestrian/Shopping Precincts
The object of the lighting should promote easy movement of pedestrian’s with a feeling
of general security and well-being. Points of note are:
For arcades and canopied areas lighting levels should be relatively high to
match those of the surrounding shop windows. Good colour rendering is
important and therefore compact fluorescent and metal halide white light
sources are preferred.
Creating visual interest can help to highlight architectural features within the
areas and can also provide guidance through the area.
Post top lanterns on 4-6m high columns with a symmetric lighting distribution
will help provide a good balance between the horizontal and vertical
surfaces. Wall mounted luminaires or recessed IP rated downlights can be
used to reduce installation costs associated with lighting columns.
Architecturally/period styled lighting equipment will provide a good
integration into the surrounding building architecture. This is especially
important where daytime integration needs to be considered in architecturally
sensitive areas.
Light above the horizontal should be avoided to reduce sky glow, improve the
efficiency of the installation and help prevent glare to drivers.
Vandal and impact resistant luminaires may be required.
Key luminaires:
Squares/Open areas
The object of the lighting should promote easy movement of pedestrian’s with a feeling
of general security and well-being. Points of note are:
Access to squares is often through mixed vehicle and pedestrian access routes
requiring high levels of illuminance for safety.
A pleasing effect may be created using decorative or themed post top
lanterns mounted on 5-6m high columns with architectural/themed styling.
98 | Applications and Techniques

Urban – decorative roadlighting and
amenity areas
Additional feature lighting for fountains, trees/shrubs and pathways should be
used. The use of LED or low wattage metal halide ground inset uplights can
create exciting lighting effects, guidance and interest, particularly when using
colour and movement, helping to attract pedestrians into the square. Care
must be taken to ensure good drainage is allowed for all inset uplights.
Lighting bollards can help to reduce the visual impact of lighting equipment
during the day. However care must be taken in positioning high brightness
light sources at almost the same height as a car driver’s eye-line. The use of
internal louvres or refractors will help reduce glare by shielding the bare
lamp.
The lighting of statues and adjacent buildings must be co-ordinated with the
general ambient lighting level within the square so they compliment the overall
effect.
Fountains can be effectively lit using submersible floodlights beneath the
falling water to make the light refract and spread over a wider area. The use
of colour filters will also help the effect. Fibre optics and LED’s can be used to
create colour and movement, particularly if the light emitting elements are
positioned adjacent or inside the fountain spouts.
Shrubberies, trees and flowerbeds can benefit from localised lighting to
provide a contrasting effect at night. Light and shadow can be effective
particularly on trees, even in winter. The use of colour filters can also help, but
too much colour will reduce the efficiency of the lighting system.
Key luminaires:
Footpaths
The object of the lighting should promote easy movement of pedestrian’s with a feeling
of general security and well-being. Points of note are:
The level of lighting is primarily determined by the crime risk whilst also
providing guidance and the ability to negotiate obstructions and stairways.
Dark patches and high light/dark contrasts should be avoided as they can
affect adaptation and impair visibility. The lighting of areas adjacent to
footpaths will help to improve the feeling of safety.
Applications and Techniques | 99

Urban – decorative roadlighting and
amenity areas
For open areas such as parks the same lighting principles apply however
crime prevention may require a higher uniformity and extra lighting to the
sides of the footpath to create a safer feel to the pathway. Good vertical light
onto adjacent areas to reveal shrubs and risk areas will help create a feeling
of safety.
Lighting is generally either by post top symmetric lanterns mounted on 5-6m
columns, bulkhead or amenity lanterns mounted on adjacent walls or
surfaces, or by low-level bollards. For areas with a high crime rate high level
floodlighting may be required.
White light sources provide good colour rendering conditions for pedestrians,
improving visual perception.
Vandal and impact resistant luminaires will be required.
Key luminaires:
Cyclepaths - Points of note are;
With increasing numbers of cycle paths being built from re-claimed railway
track beds and new build in city centres and housing developments it is
important that the safety of the cyclist is considered against possible collisions
with other cyclists, potholes or bumps on the pathway. At speeds of up to
40km/h good uniformity of the cycle path surface is paramount to allow
reasonable perception of danger as early as possible.
If cycle paths are set back from a main road or outside built up areas a
separate lighting system is required. This can comprise 5-6m high columns
with asymmetric post top lanterns that have a wide angled distribution to
provide a minimum number of lighting points. The wide beam distribution will
also provide a good vertical illuminance helping guidance along the path.
Metal halide, high-pressure sodium and compact fluorescent light sources will
provide the correct optical and economic running cost solutions. However, the
use of “white” light is preferred.
100 | Applications and Techniques

Urban – decorative roadlighting and
amenity areas
Key luminaires:
Pedestrian crossings - Points of note are;
It is important to ensure that all pedestrian crossings are lit to provide a safe
route to users across all traffic routes, whether they are routes with heavy
volumes of traffic, or relatively rural areas where traffic density is much lower.
In the dark it must be as safe as during the daytime and safety is enhanced
by the use of additional signalling and the use of a separate lighting system.
Light sources having a different colour to the general road lighting create
additional alertness or signalling effects.
By positioning lighting columns 0.5 -1.0 times the mounting height from each
side of the pedestrian crossing good positive contrast is achieved in the zone
helping motorists quickly see pedestrians.
When lighting a pedestrian crossing the lanterns are normally mounted
between 5- 6m and need to have a double asymmetric light distribution with
good glare control to ensure drivers are not dazzled. In some instances
additional baffling may be required on the lanterns. The lighting distribution
should be narrow along the road axis and wider along the axis of the
pedestrian crossing to ensure pedestrians on the edges of the crossing are
visible.
High-pressure sodium light sources should be considered if white light metal
halide or compact fluorescent lamps are used for the general road lighting.
Key luminaires:
Applications and Techniques | 101

Urban – decorative roadlighting and
amenity areas
Indoor multi-storey car-parks - Points of note are;
The provision of good lighting will aid in user orientation, ensure high levels
of visibility of vehicles and pedestrians and give a feeling of safety to
pedestrians. Good vertical lighting is required for all these criteria, especially
for approach roads, entrances and exits.
Additional or supplementary lighting should be installed in the access and exit
zones of the car park and also on ramps, corners and intersections for
additional guidance.
Emergency lighting will be required to allow the safe evacuation of
pedestrians in the event of an emergency.
The orientation and location of luminaires in the driver’s line of sight should be
arranged to prevent glare or distracting visual effects.
Good quality T16 or T26 fluorescent luminaires will provide good uniformity
and levels of vertical illuminance combined with low luminaire brightness to
prevent glare issues. When using T16 luminaires additional thermal protection
of the lamps may be necessary. Integration of emergency lighting is a normal
requirement.
Metal halide and high-pressure lamp luminaires may be used but care must
be taken to control glare and to ensure a separate lamp emergency lighting
system is provided.
All lighting equipment should be vandal-resistant.
Fluorescent, metal halide, and induction lamps all have good colour
rendering and will provide good colour perception. This is particularly
important in multi-storey car parks that identify floors by colour theme.
Key luminaires:
102 | Applications and Techniques

Urban – decorative roadlighting and
amenity areas
Outdoor car-parks - Points of note are;
Outdoor car parks are more likely to be subject to high crime rates of both
car theft and robbery. They are normally situated on the periphery of towns,
stations, schools and retail centres. Access routes, ticket dispensers, entrance
barriers and exits all need good lighting to ensure pedestrians and drivers
safety.
A common approach for lighting is to use 6–8m lighting columns, either on
the edge of the car park or centrally mounted using double asymmetric low
glare flat glass floodlights to provide a good level of horizontal and vertical
illuminance at ground level. Care must be taken to avoid spill light onto
adjacent housing, railway lines or other sensitive transport areas. The use of
street lanterns with double asymmetrical light distribution is also suitable,
however more centrally positioned lanterns will be required to achieve good
illuminance uniformity across the car park.
Supplementary white lighting at ticket dispensers, entrance barriers and exits
will help colour and perception, particularly if reading is required.
Multi-storey car park roof levels use a similar approach to outdoor car parks
where the column height is 6-8m and their location is co-ordinated into the
structural elements of the roof structure. Luminaires should be double
asymmetric distribution street lanterns as they have better glare and spill light
control.
Metal halide, high-pressure sodium and compact fluorescent lamps are the
preferred lighting sources to ensure low running and maintenance costs as
many car parks are illuminated through the night.
All lighting equipment should be vandal-resistant.
Key luminaires:
Applications and Techniques | 103

Urban – decorative roadlighting and
amenity areas
Underpasses / pedestrian tunnels - Points of note are;
All pedestrian underpasses require artificial lighting as they have a small cross
section, which means daylight decreases rapidly. Adaptation is less of a
problem for pedestrians as they move slowly compared to motorists; even so
the entrance zone of an underpass should be well lit. Lighting should help
pedestrians see the faces of other people to help give a feeling of security.
Light wall surfaces improve the vertical illuminance important for facial
recognition.
Depending upon the size and complexity of the underpass emergency lighting
may be required to allow the safe evacuation of pedestrians in the event of
an emergency.
Lighting equipment can be surface mounted or recessed, either individually or
in a continuous line. All equipment must be fully vandal proof including
electrical feeds. Fluorescent cornice mounted luminaires generally provide
good uniformity of illuminance and a good vertical component of illuminance.
These can be inset into cladding or decorative mouldings to create a clean
appearance with additional security protection against vandalism. Easy
access with a security key is essential to ensure good maintenance practice.
Discharge lamps may be used but good glare control is important to prevent
any loss of discrimination by pedestrians of other users of the underpass due
to glare.
As underpasses can remain illuminated throughout the night metal halide,
high-pressure sodium and fluorescent lamps are the preferred lighting sources
to ensure low running and maintenance costs. Care should be taken in the
use of high-pressure sodium lamps where good colour rendering is required.
Key luminaires:
104 | Applications and Techniques

Urban – decorative roadlighting and
amenity areas
Schemes
Footpaths
Scheme: Amenity park area, path width 2m
Luminaire(s) used: 26 x Promenade 42W CFL bollards, 1m mounting height
Footpath: E av = 8 lux ; E min /E av = 0.26
Scheme: Amenity park area, path width 8.4m
Luminaire(s) used: 27 x Avenue Virtual, 70W HIT-CE, 10m spacing, 3m mounting height
Footpath: E av = 21 lux; E min /E av = 0.25
Applications and Techniques | 105

Urban – decorative roadlighting and
amenity areas
Schemes
Shopping centre car parking
Mica recessed luminaires illuminating a pathway. The pools of
light give guidance and reassurance whilst still allowing darker
more intimate areas. Splashes of light on the wall reveal the
texture and warmth of the stone and provide visual interest,
whilst the lighting also provides good illumination for the steps.
The daylight appearance of lighting can be as important as the
lit effect. Lighting hardware should, as far as is possible, blend
into the surroundings and enhance the appearance of a space
even when not in use.
106 | Applications and Techniques
Scheme: Shopping centre car parking,
297m x 163m
Luminaire(s) used: 96 x Dyana 2 150W
HIT, 8m mounting height,
0° tilt
Park area: E av = 21 lux ; E min /E av = 0.32

6.10 Urban – architectural floodlighting
Techniques
General
The purpose of architectural floodlighting is to reveal the beauty of a structure or in some
cases add a dimension by showing a structure in a new way. Architectural lighting adds
an aesthetic quality to a scene. Points of note are:
Generally a structure will have one or more principal viewing positions.
Therefore the lighting should be sympathetic for an observer positioned at
these viewpoints.
The light levels used on a structure should be in harmony with the light levels
of the surrounding area. In darker areas comparatively little light can be used
to good effect, but in areas with a large amount of ambient lighting higher
light levels will be required.
A coherent flow of light across a structure is often desirable, implying one
general aiming orientation for the main floodlights. This direction should not
coincide with the most common viewing direction for the structure as no
shadows will then be visible and the scene will appear flat and uninteresting.
Care should be taken when mounting the floodlighting equipment to ensure
that the lighting units do not appear in silhouette against the lit scene, as this
will spoil the overall effect.
Structural detail
The main objective is to highlight significant features of the structure whilst ensuring the
structure still appears as a coherent whole. Points of note are;
Light naturally attracts peoples attention so highlighting specific features will
help an observer read the structure. Care should be taken to only light those
details that are required, as too many highlights will destroy the effect and
either makes the structure appear bland and uninteresting or disjointed and
incoherent.
Completeness of lighting is an important consideration to ensure a coherent
whole. Care should be taken to avoid a floating appearance, caused by the
base of the structure being under lit, or high level lit detail seeming
unconnected due to the upper parts of the structure being insufficiently lit.
Shadows can make as useful a contribution to the final lit effect as do
illuminated areas. A good technique is to highlight specific features and to
give a low-key wash of light to the rest of the structure. Therefore smaller
lighting units are needed to highlight the detail, as well as units with a more
general distribution to cover the broader area.
Applications and Techniques | 107

Urban – architectural floodlighting
Positioning floodlights at a distance from a structure and therefore giving light
closer to the horizontal will tend to reduce the visibility of the textures of the
materials used in the construction of the structure. Conversely positioning
floodlights in a close offset position, and therefore giving light closer to the
vertical will tend to enhance the visibility of the textures of the materials used
in the construction of the structure.
Daylight has a generally downward bias, forming shadows from architectural
details below the detail itself. Floodlighting a structure from above can mimic
this effect, whilst floodlighting from below will reverse the shadows and can
often give a fresh appeal to a structure by giving it an individual day time
and night time appearance. Lighting laterally will enhance any vertical
features of the structure.
Showing features in silhouette may enhance the lit appearance of a structure.
Lighting behind features such as columns will show the form of the structure
and display the columns in silhouette against the lit structure.
Obtrusive light
The main objective is to maximise the amount of useful light (that is light falling onto the
structure) and minimise waste light that spills light onto the surroundings or upwards into
the sky. Points of note are:
Close off set lighting will reduce waste light by minimising light lost through
scatter in the air, especially in urban areas with lower air quality.
When uplighting a structure the upward light ratio (ULR) is not very useful as
an indication of obtrusive light. A more useful measure is the utilisation factor,
that is the amount of light actually lighting the structure compared to the total
amount of light produced by the scheme. This gives the percentage useful
light, and therefore the percentage waste light. It should be remembered that
any reflected light will be in a predominantly upward direction and can give
a significant contribution to obtrusive light. Therefore where possible
uplighting should be used for structures that use low reflectance materials in
their construction.
To minimise obtrusive light additional attachments should be used on the
floodlight such as louvres or visors to shape the floodlight beam and help it
conform to the shape of the structure.
Where possible niches and overhangs should be used to contain obtrusive
light.
108 | Applications and Techniques

Urban – architectural floodlighting
Floodlight technology
The main objective is to ensure that the correct technology in terms of lamp, optic and
floodlight body is chosen for the application. Points of note are:
The fabric of a structure has a colour, or in many cases a mixture of colours.
Light sources that are monochromatic or strongly biased towards a small
range of colours can distort the structure appearance. Therefore, light sources
with a wide spectrum, (such as metal halide) or with a colour temperature that
blends with the structure materials (such as high-pressure sodium on sandstone)
should be used. Colour filters or RGB colour mixing should be used with care
but can be very effective for dramatic effects or seasonal/festive events.
Floodlights have a beam distribution that is mainly relative to the shape of the
reflector. A round reflector will produce a conical beam useful for long-throw
requirements, typically to pick out a single feature. A rectangular reflector will
produce an asymmetrical beam useful for lighting areas rather than small points.
Constraints in mounting position or specific application requirements often
require a modified beam distribution. Additional optical components such as
refractor glasses that vary the beam shape, or louvres that reduce obtrusive
light are useful in getting the correct result.
Floodlighting set-ups are generally aimed at night to enable fine-tuning of the
finished appearance. However maintenance will be done in daylight, and
often the floodlight will need to be moved to allow access to the lamp, etc.
Floodlights with a re-positioning lock system are helpful to ensure the lit
appearance is maintained over successive maintenance operations.
Key luminaires:
Schemes – Building facade
Scheme: Building façade
Luminaire(s) used: Avenue Deco bollard
50W MBF, Avenue
Deco 125W MBF at 3m
mounting height, Efact
LED, Mica B 70W HIT-DE
and Contrast Pinspot
70W Par 30.
Road Eav = 7lux
Pavement: E av = 15lux away from the façade,
E av = 35lux along store façade
Applications and Techniques | 109

Urban – architectural floodlighting
The curved roof is washed with light, making it appear to float
over the building. The structure itself glows from the interior light
spilling through the glass facades.
Lighting of glass facades is difficult and it is more usual to let
spill light from the interior light up the building and define its
night-time appearance.
The suspension tower and cabling are lit to provide a distinctive
appearance. Narrow beam floodlights are directed along the
cables to make then glow, whilst the central tower is washed
with light. The structure seems to float above the surface of the
water.
The appearance is built up using layers of light. The lower
section of the building has a general wash of light with
highlighting above the central columns. Lighter and darker areas
give depth to the façade. The upper storey mainly comprises
grand window openings, and these are lit with a white light
to accentuate the detail of the window surrounds. The detail
around the top of the façade (below the roof line) is lit to define
the transition to the roof space, and additional windows within
the roof space are lit, along with chimney work, with a small
amount of spill light showing the roofline.
110 | Applications and Techniques

6.11 Sports lighting
Techniques
General
The purpose of sports lighting is to provide lighting that allows a sport to take place
safely (i.e. designed to suit the speed of play and size of any objects used in the sport)
and provide good viewing conditions, both in visibility of the sports action and comfort
of the audience. Points of note are:
For all sports a good level of modelling is required. Modelling is the effect of
light and shadow produced when light flows from one main direction (known
as key light) and additional lower levels of lighting flow from other directions
(known as fill light), producing a coherent three-dimensional image of a
scene. If there is insufficient key light and all the lighting is fill light objects
become flat with little discernable detail. If there is insufficient fill light harsh
shadowing will occur, obscuring areas in the field of view. Both cases will
cause a reduction in the ability of sports participants to correctly see and
react to events on the field of play, and will also cause problems for
spectators and television cameras.
For high-speed sports the elimination of any stroboscopic effects from high
intensity discharge sources is important. Stroboscopic effects may make a
moving object appear stationary, or make the object seem to jump from one
position to another. For these sports the use of high frequency control gear is
recommended.
Lighting requirements are defined by EN 12193. Additional requirements
may be defined by sports governing bodies such as FIFA, Olympic Delivery
Authorities, etc. and by television authorities, such as Sky.
Some sports (notably FIFA regulations for football) also define requirements for
uniformity gradient (UG). This is measure of the rate of change of illuminance
across an area, and is expressed as the ratio between the illuminance levels
of two adjacent measurement points. That is
E measurement point 1
UG =
Emeasurement point 2
EN 12193 defines requirements based on the lighting class (I, II, or III). This
is derived from the level of competition, international and national, regional,
local, training and recreational. At the lower standard of play there is
flexibility with the light source options (i.e. high pressure sodium, metal halide)
but at class I and II metal halide or fluorescent light sources with high colour
rendering abilities are required.
Applications and Techniques | 111

Sports lighting
Each sport has a playing area that is the principal playing area (the area
inside the line marking for tennis or football for example) and a total area that
is defined as the principal playing area, plus an additional safety outside the
principal playing area.
Lighting levels for sports are normally defined in terms of the minimum
average horizontal illuminance on a reference plane, and a uniformity of
illuminance. In some instances the plane of illuminance will be relevant to the
sport and the spectator viewing distance, or TV camera-viewing plane. Here
the normal to camera illuminance and vertical illuminance will be relevant.
As some sporting areas are large, have the need for high levels of illuminance
or are used for a long period in the day, highly efficient lighting systems are
required to keep energy consumption low. Maintenance is also important to
ensure system efficiency and functionality and therefore all lighting equipment
should be safely accessible and maintainable throughout life.
When lighting exterior sports facilities to achieve good uniformity lighting
equipment must be mounted on masts of sufficient height to ensure floodlight
aiming angles are no greater than 70°. This will ensure a high utilisation of
lamp flux, minimum electrical load, and lower installed costs.
When designing lighting for sports facilities it is important to minimise
obtrusive and spill light. For guidance on this see section 6.8.
All sports facilities require safety lighting (that is lighting designed to allow
safe movement of players and spectators in the event of a power failure or
emergency). Relevant guidelines form the sports governing bodies should be
consulted for this information.
Sports halls - Points of note are;
Most sports halls are suitable for different sports and non-sporting events, all
requiring different visual requirements. The most demanding visual activity
should dictate the lighting design layout and light levels.
One lighting layout will generally not be sufficient to meet all requirements, as
specific sports require different lighting configurations. Therefore it is essential
that lighting controls are used to switch a selection of luminaires for different
requirements.
Luminaires should be impact resistant against balls and projectiles, and
designed and mounted to minimise the risk of objects becoming trapped
within or behind them.
112 | Applications and Techniques

Sports lighting
The layout of a sports hall may be altered using partitions, and therefore care
should be taken to ensure glare is controlled along all lines of sight, with and
without the partitions. Additional lighting may be required when partitions are
in place and this should be checked during design.
For aerial sports, e.g. badminton and volleyball, the positioning of the
luminaires outside the playing area may be necessary to avoid disability
glare for players looking upwards.
As a sports hall can support many types of activity it is important to ensure
good uniformity is achieved throughout the hall. This allows competitors to
quickly and accurately monitor an opponent’s movement, particularly
important in combat sports.
Key luminaires:
Table tennis and badminton - Points of note are;
Badminton shuttlecocks are small and fast. Players are continually required to
visually follow the trajectory of the shuttlecock and there are therefore specific
recommendations for luminaire positions and requirements for good vertical
illuminance. A low ceiling reflection factor will help to improve the visibility of
the shuttlecock.
For competition table tennis it is important that excellent uniformity is achieved
over the table top and up to five metres from the table edges. The elimination
of any stroboscopic effects from high intensity discharge sources is important.
A good level of vertical illuminance is required to ensure visibility of any high
balls.
Fluorescent lighting systems provide the best arrangements for high levels of
horizontal and vertical uniformity over the playing areas. Pendant, surface or
recessed T16 or T26 luminaires with a parabolic louvre are suitable.
Key luminaires:
Applications and Techniques | 113

Sports lighting
Fencing - Points of note are;
Fencing has specific requirements for both horizontal and vertical illuminance
as the movements are very fast with a fine foil blade and the visual task is the
torso of the players.
Fluorescent pendant, surface or recessed T16 or T26 luminaires with a
parabolic louvre are suitable.
Key luminaires:
Boxing - Points of note are;
In boxing the speed and force of movement over extremely short distances
requires very high lighting levels at competition levels, normally between
1000 lux and 2000 lux average horizontal illuminance. This also ensures
that the referee, judges and spectators can see adequately and comfortably.
Normally a purpose made lighting assembly will support the lighting
equipment above the ring. Narrow beam luminaires should be used to
provide the necessary high levels of illuminance efficiently.
High colour rendering qualities are required from the light source, which is
recommended to be metal halide with an Ra of 85+. This is also required for
video and CTV transmissions.
Pendant or surface narrow/medium beam metal halide floodlights are
suitable with baffle/louvre attachments to control glare.
Key luminaires:
114 | Applications and Techniques

Sports lighting
Indoor tennis halls - Points of note are;
Tennis can be a very fast sport demanding good visual conditions to allow
judgement of the ball trajectory, its speed and anticipated bounce position on
the court. Therefore good illuminance and uniformity with the elimination of
shadows and glare are a requirement from the lighting system. The lighting
will also need to extend beyond the playing area to cover the important
zones behind the baselines and sidelines.
To prevent players being dazzled when looking at high balls the luminaires
should be positioned outside the playing area, and not positioned behind the
baseline up to a distance of three metres where serving takes place.
Luminaires should be impact resistant against balls and projectiles, and
designed and mounted to minimise the risks of object becoming trapped
within or behind them.
Additional wall colouring or screening with low reflectance matt material will
help players to get additional information about the balls position on the
court.
Pendant or surface mounted T16 or T26 fluorescent reflector luminaires with a
protective grille are suitable. Alternatively pendant or surface mounted
low-bay metal halide luminaires with a louvre assembly and protective grill.
Key luminaires:
Squash courts - Points of note are;
The ball used for squash is smaller than a tennis ball, is dark coloured, travels
up to 200 km/h and bounces in any plane. As the walls are used to create
complex trajectories with players moving very quickly across each other’s line
of sight early anticipation and vision are required to hit the ball accurately.
Good illuminance on all four vertical planes together with high horizontal
illuminance uniformity is needed against a light vertical background to
improve perception of the ball.
Fluorescent lighting is most suitable with two asymmetric distribution luminaires
mounted parallel to the front to wash the wall, and an asymmetric distribution
luminaire washing each of the sidewalls. Mounting the luminaires at 1m from
the wall prevents reflected glare.
Applications and Techniques | 115

Sports lighting
Surface mounted or recessed T16 or T26 fluorescent asymmetric reflector
luminaires with a protective grille are most suitable.
Key luminaires:
Figure skating and ice hockey - Points of note are;
Most indoor rinks are used for recreational purposes with additional events
carried out on specific occasions. Therefore the lighting installation needs to
be flexible.
Luminaires are normally mounted over the ice in a regular array to provide
good uniformity of illuminance and general average horizontal illuminance.
The ice hockey puck is black and to help spectators see it when it is flying
through the air high reflectance surroundings should be used around the ice.
Decreasing the spacing between luminaires near the goal increases
illuminance in this critical area.
Luminaires should be impact resistant if mounted less than 5m above the ice.
High bay style luminaires with prismatic optics and metal halide lamps will
help provide a good level of vertical illuminance and a high uniformity of
illuminance on the horizontal plane whilst using the minimum number of
luminaires. Floodlights can also be used but care should be taken to control
both direct glare and reflected glare from the surface of the ice. The use of
double asymmetric beam floodlights will help.
Key luminaires:
116 | Applications and Techniques

Sports lighting
Swimming pools - Points of note are;
Swimming pool lighting caters for a variety of visual tasks. The competitive
swimmer has a much different seeing task to other swimmers where the main
attention is focussed on staying in lane and the turning point at the end of the
lane. Water polo players need lighting with a good ambient lighting effect.
Swimming instructors, coaches, pool attendants and spectators all need to
see across the pool and into the water to identify swimmers and situations.
For recreational swimming pools themed or decorative lighting effects may be
required.
Because water reflects direct incident light the positioning of the luminaires
needs to be carefully selected to avoid luminaire reflections and disability
glare. Luminaires positioned around the pool help to reduce unwanted
reflections. When this is not possible asymmetric distribution luminaires
positioned above the water may be used but maintenance of the luminaires
should be considered.
Underwater lighting will help to reduce reflected glare from the pool surface
as well as improving viewing conditions on the pool bottom. Synchronised
swimmers need underwater lighting to help monitor the movement and
position of other swimmers. However for competitive swimming and water
polo underwater luminaires should be switched off.
For diving pools supplementary lighting is required to improve the vertical
illuminance, particularly for judges who need to assess the divers
performance at the point of entry into the water. For springboard diving the
lighting in the diving zone requires a good ratio of horizontal to vertical
illuminance.
Luminaires for indoor swimming pools must be protected against chlorinated
and possibly salty air and as such need to meet high standards of electrical
reliability and protection against corrosion. Luminaires should be protected to
IP65 and have fixings that are made of stabilised austenitic stainless steel.
High ambient temperatures may require control gear to be mounted remotely
to ensure long life and reliability. The use of floodlights will help resolve some
of these issues as floodlights are mainly designed for exterior use and have a
high degree of protection and resistance to the elements built in.
Good colour rendering lamps are required to provide the correct ambience
and visual comfort for competitors and bathers. Metal halide lamps with a
warm or cool appearance can be used to good effect.
Surface mounted or recessed fluorescent luminaires with an acrylic panel/
bowl are suitable, as are metal halide or high pressure sodium floodlights
wall mounted or pendant mounted for uplighting or direct lighting of the pool.
Applications and Techniques | 117

Sports lighting
Key luminaires:
Outdoor football and rugby - Points of note are;
The most common approach is the use of lighting masts, approximately four
each side of 12m–20m height to achieve a minimum angle above the pitch
centre of 20° to the lowest floodlight, but preferably 25°. These are spaced
along the long axis of the playing area, positioned away from the touchlines
to avoid collisions. For football they are also positioned away from the
corners to avoid glare to goalkeepers. The floodlights are normally rated
1kW– 2kW and have a double asymmetric beam shape to ensure good
uniformity and glare control.
An alternative option is four corner masts where long throw symmetrical
narrow beam floodlights are used. The same conditions apply to mast
positioning and height to achieve high utilisation of lamp flux and the
avoidance of glare.
For rugby pitches the dead-ball zone, which can be up to 22m long, will
need to be adequately illuminated. In some instances the spill light from the
playing area will be sufficient but only to a depth of 6m. This is in addition to
the playing area length of up to 100m between goal lines. A total area shall
include a strip the length of the pitch including the dead ball area of no less
than 6m wide on each side of the pitch.
Lighting can be positioned on the roofs of adjacent grandstands if they are of
sufficient height and location to comply with floodlight positional requirements,
and of sufficient structural strength to allow the weight of the floodlights.
Double asymmetric or symmetrical beam floodlights using high-pressure
sodium or metal halide lamps are suitable for this application.
Key luminaires:
118 | Applications and Techniques

Sports lighting
Hockey - Points of note are;
The playing area for hockey is slightly smaller than for football, but the lighting
principles are the same with regards to mast positions and heights. The use of
a smaller ball and the speed of the sport require a higher lighting level for
Class III installations and a better uniformity for Classes II and III than for
football and rugby.
Double asymmetric or symmetrical beam floodlights using high-pressure
sodium or metal halide lamps are suitable for this application.
Key luminaires:
Track and field - Points of note are;
For track and field stadiums the most cost effective solution is to locate 6-8
masts around the whole perimeter of the track with a clearance of 4.5m from
the track edge. The mast height is determined as for football but with the
additional requirement of a maximum mast height to ensure adequate vertical
illuminance for competitors on the outside of the track. The masts mounted
along the straight section of track illuminate the centre field area providing
good vertical illuminance for javelin, shot, hammer and discus events.
Double asymmetric or flat glass double asymmetric beam floodlights using
high-pressure sodium or metal halide lamps are suitable for this application.
Key luminaires:
Applications and Techniques | 119

Sports lighting
Freestyle skiing and ski jumping - Points of note are;
Downhill skiers require the whole piste uniformly illuminated from beginning to
end so depressions and surface irregularities are revealed. As high speeds
can be achieved the position of floodlights are important to provide the
correct visual conditions, therefore floodlights are placed either side of the
piste whilst being aimed across and down the slope to reduce glare to the
skiers.
Wide horizontal and narrow vertical angle floodlights metal halide lamps
mounted on masts up to 12m high are suitable for this application.
Ski-jumpers require good horizontal lighting at the take-off and at the landing
or touchdown point for judging and safety. The landing area needs to have a
high level of uniformity (0.7) for the class III standard of skiing. The
illuminance on the jump hill is measured on the surface of the snow.
Key luminaires:
120 | Applications and Techniques

Sports lighting
Schemes
Tennis court
Scheme: Double tennis court, 24m x 11m
Luminaire(s) used: 4 x Champion 2kW HQI-TS/N/L, 12m mounting height
Pitch: E av = 397 lux, E min /E av = 0.81
Lighting from the edges helps prevent glare to players.
Applications and Techniques | 121

Sports lighting
Schemes
Football Stadium
Scheme: Football stadium with 4 x 25m corner columns
Luminaire(s) used: 48 x Mundial R 2kW HQI-TS
Pitch: E av = 538 lux; E min /E av = 0.76
122 | Applications and Techniques
A football stadium lit using Mundial
floodlights. The luminaires are mounted
along the roof of the stand down
two sides of the pitch, and a mix of
light distributions is used to correctly
illuminate all the playing area. Lighting
levels for television are supplied
by ensuring good levels of vertical
illumination in the camera directions.
Additional luminaires on the inside of
the canopy lights the seating areas
and ensures the security and safety of
spectators.

Sports lighting
Schemes
Ice Hockey Stadium
Scheme: Ice hockey stadium, 117.5m x 17.3m x 23m
Luminaire(s) used: 316 x Indus XS, 2 x 80WT16, 17m mounting height
Pitch: E av = 422 lux ; E min /E av = 0.07
A relatively high level of illumination is required due to the fast
moving nature of the game and the small size of the puck.
Lighting levels by the goals are increased to aid the ability of
the goalkeeper, officials and spectators to see the puck.
Applications and Techniques | 123

Sports lighting
Schemes
Indoor tennis court
Scheme: Indoor tennis court, 36m x 18m x 6m
Luminaire(s) used: 32 x Titus Sport, 3x49W 5m mounting height
Tennis court: E av = 531 lux ; E min /E av = 0.35
Indoor tennis courts lit using the Sporting luminaire. The
luminaires are integrated into the architecture of the roof and
are positioned to light from the edges of the playing areas,
preventing players having to look directly at a luminaire.
124 | Applications and Techniques

Sports lighting
Schemes
Ski shute
A ski slope lit using 270 Mundial 2kW floodlights. The
floodlights are positioned and aimed to prevent glare to skiers,
whilst revealing the texture of the surface of the slope to ensure
safety. This requires aiming away from the direction of view of
skiers, and the use of glancing angles to show surface texture.
Additional care should be taken to prevent reflected glare from
the snow.
Scheme: Ski shute, 30m x 150m
Luminaire(s) used: Either 36 x Sonpak
25/40 with HIT400W or
27 x Sonpak 25/40
with HST400W
Ski slope: HIT 400W E av = 1.24 lux;
E min /E av = 0.02
HST 400W E av = 1.41 lux;
E min /E av = 0.02
Applications and Techniques | 125

Sports lighting
Schemes
Sports hall
Scheme: Multi-purpose sports hall, 17m x 18m x 7.6m
Luminaire(s) used: 18 x Titus Sport 4 x 49W, 7.6m mounting height
Floor: E av = 364 lux; E min /E av = 0.61
Scheme: Multi-purpose sports hall, 17m x 18m x 7.6m.
Emergency lighting
Luminaire(s) used: 2 x Voyager Twinspot, 6m mounting height
Floor: E av = 2.46 lux; E min /E av = 0.23
When lighting sports venues it is essential to consider the
safety of the participants and spectators in the event of loss of
power or an emergency. Therefore emergency lighting should
be installed that complies with the relevant requirements and
standards.
126 | Applications and Techniques

7 Specific Techniques
7.1 Indoor lighting controls (ILC)
The purpose of Indoor Lighting Controls (ILC) is to provide the
right light at the right time and place, saving as much energy as
possible, whilst simultaneously providing the comfort expected
for any application, such as offices, lecture and conference
rooms, school classrooms, sport halls, or in hospitals and
supermarkets. Industrial installations may also benefit from the
energy savings provided by ILC if fluorescent luminaires such as
trunking systems are being used.
In offices up to 40 per cent of the energy used is needed for
lighting, within schools this percentage can be even higher.
In industrial applications that figure is between 10 and 15
per cent depending on the lighting technology used. Potential
energy savings are:
Electronic ballasts + dimming: 30%
Dimming + presence link: 50%
Dimming + presence link + daylight link: 70%
There are many different levels of controls to choose from.
These should be chosen to fit the needs and activities within
an application and to achieve the required energy saving and
comfort.
One of the most basic controls and the first step into manual
dimming is “RotaryDIM”, a very simple recess wall mounted
rotary DSI dimmer that can be connected to Thorn High
Frequency DSI dimmable (HFD) luminaires, controlling up to
20 DSI ballasts in total. The lighting can be raised, dimmed
and dimmed to off, by turning the control knob. This product
combines digital dimming with the intuitive operation known
from domestic lighting controls.
Thorn Pull SwitchDIM (PSWD) luminaires come with
integrated pull cord momentary action switches. Typically used
in offices lit with suspended luminaires. Using the pull cord
momentary action switch the user may manually set the light
level from 100% down to 1%, and switch the light on and off.
The easiest way to automate lighting is the use of
“SwitchLite” presence detectors, installed into recessed
ceilings, mounted onto ceilings, into corners or onto walls.
These detectors switch the lighting on when movement is
detected, and, after a configurable Off delay time, switch it
off when vacancy is detected. Different SwitchLite presence
Fig. 7.1 RotaryDIM DSI dimmer
Specific Techniques | 127

Specific Techniques
detectors are available suitable for various mounting needs
and detection patterns, and using passive infrared (PIR) or
microwave technology to detect presence and absence.
Some products additionally provide an integrated photocell
that can be set so that the detector only switches lighting on
when the ambient light level is below a preset level. This
kind of presence detection is typically used in spaces such as
corridors, staircases, warehouses, storerooms or lavatories,
and can reduce the energy usage by up to 90 per cent.
Instead of lamps being switched on for the whole day they are
automatically switched off when not needed.
Thorn High Frequency SensaDigital (HFS) luminaires
combine manual dimming with daylight and presence link.
These luminaires provide an integrated miniature multi-sensor
head. Depending upon the connections provided within the
luminaire HFS luminaires may also be used to control standard
HFD luminaires in a so-called master and slave arrangement.
The number of DSI ballasts incorporated in the master as well
as the slave luminaires can be up to four in total: E.g. in an
office or a meeting room up to four single-ballast luminaires can
be linked to maintain illuminance during the whole day (taking
into account the available daylight as well as the ageing of
lamps and dirt on the luminaires), and additionally can provide
a presence-link function as described above. Alternatively for
the control of a larger space with more luminaires, a remote
SensaDigital head can be used, for example the “SENSA
MRE SEND DSI”. This multi-sensor head can control a group of
HFD luminaires incorporating up to eight DSI ballasts in total,
and incorporates the same functionality as described above for
the SensaDigital luminaires.
This portfolio is called SensaDigital. For the manual control
of SensaDigital an infra-red handheld controller “SENSA
SENRC” is available, as well as an infra-red programming
tool “SENSA SENP” for the configuration of Off delay time,
operation mode, maintained illuminance level and many other
settings.
For applications such as classrooms and open plan offices
either several remote SensaDigital heads connected
to standard dimmable luminaires, or several master-slave
arrangements of SensaDigital luminaires with standard
dimmable luminaires can control several luminaire groups
individually, reflecting the flow of daylight within a bigger area
128 | Specific Techniques
Fig. 7.2 Presence detector
Fig. 7.3 HFS luminaire
Fig. 7.4 Handheld controller

Specific Techniques
and the presence of people within the different zones lit by the
luminaire groups.
For versatile one-room applications the “SensaModular”
system may be used. This is a Lego-like portfolio consisting
of two differently sized control modules, and accessories for
automation and operation. Both control modules have DSI/
DALI auto detection outputs for the use of either HFD or HFX
luminaires (“HFX” stands for High Frequency DALI dimmable).
The large SensaModular controller shows three digital
outputs, the small controller two digital outputs for controlling
luminaire groups: Table 6.1 shows the number of ballasts that
can be connected:
To keep commissioning and maintenance simple, the
addressing feature of DALI is not used with SensaModular
when DALI ballasts are connected (so called “broadcast”
operation). Both controllers show inputs for the connection
of standard double, single momentary action or centre-off
retractive switches to manually dim, brighten and switch each
output individually. The large controller also shows a switch
input for the joint operation of all three outputs. A standard
230VAC presence detector, for example a SwitchLite
detector, can be connected to the controllers, and the Off
delay time and operation mode (automatic, semi-automatic or
corridor) can be set via integrated rotary switches.
Using the intelligent interface - a polarity-free 2-pole connection
- the system can be extended. To link the luminaire groups
to the incoming daylight, SensaModular provides three
possibilities, all reflecting the daylight flow:
• Either one look down multi-sensor head per group, ideal in
larger and zoned applications such as open plan offices,
or
• one multi-sensor head for all groups, ideal for smaller
applications such as single offices, or
3-fold output controller 2-fold output controller
Using DSI ballasts only 50DSI + 50 DSI + 50DSI 50DSI + 50DSI
Using DALI ballasts only 25DALI + 25DALI + 25DALI 25DALI + 25DALI
Using DSI and DALI ballasts 25DSI + 25DSI + 25DALI, or 25DALI + 25DALI + 25DSI 25DSI + 25DALI
Table 7.1 SensaModular Controller Capacity
Daylight
0% 25% 50%
Fig. 7.5 Look down sensors
Daylight
0% 25% 50%
Fig. 7.6 Look out sensors
500lx
Artificial light
Artificial light
Specific Techniques | 129

Specific Techniques
• one look out photocell for all groups, ideal for applications
comprising rows of luminaires and not requiring infrared
control, such as classrooms and sports halls, but especially
any application with ceiling heights above 3m.
Both the multi-sensor head and the photocell are part of the
SensaModular offer. Different illuminance levels for the the
two or three luminaire groups can be set and stored. With the
multi-sensor heads the luminaire groups are not only linked to
daylight, but also to presence and absence. The configuration
of Off delay time and operation mode happens the same way
as when a standard detector is used (described above).
With the SensaModular infra-red handheld controller
the multi-sensor heads are allocated to the luminaire groups.
This remote control can also be used to set and recall three
scenes, and to switch, dim and brighten each luminaire group
individually.
Alternatively, or additionally, the SensaModular recess wall
mounted scene plate enables manual control of the luminaire
groups and the setting and recall of three scenes as well, and
the active scene is visualised via LED indicators.
In some countries Thorn offers the “SensaAdvanced”
portfolio, one of the most versatile systems on the market,
allowing the control of up to 99 luminaire, blind and screen
groups, in up to 99 rooms, and the possibility to create up
to 20 scenes per room. This portfolio works with any type of
luminaire and provides different DSI, DALI, relay outputs and
phase dimmers. Blinds, blackout blinds and projection screens
may also be controlled using SensaAdvanced. Different
operation and commissioning units, such as wall mounted scene
plates and touch panels are available, as well as infrared
control and software to use a PC or laptop for recalling scenes.
Time automation enables the installation to be switched at
130 | Specific Techniques
Fig. 7.7 SensaAdvanced components

Specific Techniques
certain times and days and, with sequence automation,
dynamic changes of light levels, direction and colour can be
achieved. Partition management enables the system to adapt
to partition walls being closed or opened, and enables the
individual or joint control of the adjacent areas. Scheme design
and commissioning of SensaAdvanced is available as
a service, please contact your Thorn representative where
applicable.
In some countries Thorn offers the “SensaLink” portfolio,
enabling the linking of several groups of multi-sensors, either
remote sensors or sensors integrated into HFL luminaires (“HFL”
stands for high frequency SensaLink) within a larger space,
throughout the floor of a building or through the whole building.
The sensor groups work as described for SensaDigital
above. Additionally these groups can be linked such that
a group listens to other groups. This feature is used to keep
lights on in corridors or notional corridors, and in staircases
and common zones while one of the adjacent areas reports
presence. Blackout blinds and projection screens may also
be controlled via SensaLink. Different operation units are
available such as wall mounted scene plates and infrared
control, allowing storing and recall of up to six scenes.
A versatile infra-red commissioning tool is used to configure and
address the system. This portfolio also provides relay outputs for
switchable luminaires. During commissioning DSI outputs can
be changed to DALI broadcast outputs if required. The partition
management functionality enables the system to adapt to
partition walls being closed or opened, and enables individual
or joint control of the adjacent areas. Scheme design and
commissioning of SensaLink is available as service, please
contact your Thorn representative where appropriate.
Fig. 7.8 SensaLink components
Specific Techniques | 131

Specific Techniques
Instead of HFD luminaires containing DSI ballasts, DSI
compatible transformers and phase dimmers are available and
can be connected to any DSI output:
• Phase dimmers allow the dimming of luminaires with
high voltage incandescent or tungsten halogen lamps,
as well as luminaires incorporating low voltage tungsten
halogen lamps plus electronic or magnetic transformers.
• Electronic transformers allow the control of
luminaires incorporating low voltage tungsten halogen
lamps without transformers.
Using these DSI controllable devices the connected luminaires
can be part of any scheme incorporating Indoor Lighting
Controls, can be daylight-linked, can contribute to lighting
scenes and much more.
132 | Specific Techniques
Fig. 7.9 A phase dimmer
Fig. 7.10 An electronic transformer

Specific Techniques
7.2 Lighting for display screen equipment
In areas containing display screen equipment (DSE) special
care must be taken to prevent bright images being reflected in
the screen from bright surfaces such as windows or luminaire.
Display screen equipment is any screen used for displaying
information, whether it is attached directly to a personal
computer, measuring equipment or specialist applications, for
instance air traffic control screens.
These reflections are caused by the geometry between the
glare source, screen and user allowing the image of the glare
source to be reflected into the users eyes. If the glare source is
a luminaire this tends to be the light emitted by the luminaire
above 65° (above the black lines in Figure 6.12).
To prevent this either the luminaire should have optical control to
remove any bright luminance above 65°, or the display screen
should be moved (either rotated or tilted) to alter the geometry,
thereby removing unwanted reflections. Note, this is more
critical in large rooms or open plan areas, as the geometry of
small office spaces normally means that luminaires are unlikely
to be seen in a display screen. Yet, in reconfigurable areas
care is still needed as removing walls may convert small office
spaces into an open plan area.
To help a designer in choosing a suitable luminaire for DSE
applications a table of luminance limits has been produced
for angles of 65° or higher. This table gives luminance limits
dependant upon whether modern screen technology (type
I and II) or older screen technology (type III) is being used.
Additionally the type of information being displayed has an
impact on the susceptibility of the screen to bright images.
Negative polarity information (i.e. bright text on a dark
background) is more susceptible to disturbing images than
positive polarity information (dark text on a light background).
This information can be used along with a luminaire
manufacturers data to ensure that the luminaires chosen for an
installation that contains DSE are suitable.
Fig. 7.11 Reflections in a computer screen
caused by lighting
Fig. 7.12 A polar curve showing light emitted
above 65°
Specific Techniques | 133

Specific Techniques
For critical applications, such as air traffic control screens, these
limits may need to be applied for angles of 55° or higher.
However increasing the degree of glare control can produce
gloomy spaces unless additional lighting is used to illuminate
the ceiling and upper walls.
Note, that whilst newer screen technology has been less
likely to reflect disturbing images due to anti-glare coatings
and matt screens, some new screens (notably for laptops)
are improving technology and are no longer matt, but highly
reflective. This development will continue as computers develop
as entertainment systems (for watching DVD’s etc.). This is due
to matt screen technology tending to blur images very slightly,
reducing their sharpness, and also the technology having
limited capability to correctly show black. Consequently to
correctly show audio-visual content in high definition matt screen
technology is not used. This will, unfortunately, mean these
screens are more susceptible to problems from glare sources.
134 | Specific Techniques
Table 7.1 Luminance limit recommendations

Specific Techniques
7.3 Light for learning
The importance of light in our learning environments cannot be
under estimated. Research shows that light impacts our health
and level of alertness and this extends to those spaces in which
we are taught. It is now widely accepted that good lighting in
schools can have an important effect on educational attainment
and rates of learning.
We also need to consider the impact of our designs on the
wider environment, from the use of material resources to the
impact on the community and the pupil. Lighting in schools
needs to be sustainable, to continue to serve the needs of
the community and future students, taking into account likely
changes in curriculum, demographics, methods of teaching,
computer use and so on.
Our lighting design for the future of educational facilities needs
to consider the following:
• The proven link between improved school environments
and student/staff morale and staff retention
• The need to create schools which would represent good
value for money and have a long functional life
• A requirement to diversify the school curriculum and to
extend community use of educational facilities
There is now, more than ever, an imperative to create
sustainable schools, which would have a low impact on the
environment, exploit natural light and ventilation and reduce
use of natural resources. Lighting has a large part to play in
each of these, and can do so by using the equipment and
complying with the legislation around product application and
performance.
Fig. 7.13 A PC intensive university teaching
space lit with direct/indirect luminaires
Specific Techniques | 135

Specific Techniques
Methods of teaching
There a generally considered to be three methods of teaching:
• Teacher-led discussions, an ‘interactive’ approach to
learning.
• Large group teaching, the more traditional formal
instruction.
• Small group learning, individual practical and project
work.
Each creates different requirements for the space in which they
happen. The first requires flexible lighting, creating a relaxed
informal atmosphere. The second is more focused on the tasks
within the space - the teacher, the board and the ambient. The
last is most specifically about ambient and task, where the task
lighting will be local to the student and varied according to
their need.
Lighting application
Generally there are two recognised illuminance levels required
in classrooms and these, whilst general targets to aim for, need
to be varied to account for task, time of day and the age of
the pupil.
Levels of ‘300-500 lux should not be exceeded, but should be
focused on 300 lux for the young and 500 lux for the mature
student. A task uniformity of 0.8 is desirable.
To maintain this level and maximise efficiency all teaching
spaces should use daylight as a primary source and dim the
artificial light accordingly, initially by the windows. To give true
sustainability lighting controls must be provided that are simple
to understand and operate, give flexibility of use and deliver
energy savings. Specific requirements will require task lighting
(i.e. the need to specifically light the task, rather than creating
high overall ambient lighting levels)
Specular, louvred fittings are not required, except perhaps in
dedicated computer suites, and even here their use should be
restricted and satin, rather than full mirrored louvres used.
Use of down lighting with a tight cut-off should be avoided
as this will lead to strong modelling of facial features making
it difficult for the visually, or hearing impaired, to see facial
features and to lip-read.
136 | Specific Techniques
Fig. 7.14 Lighting in large lecture rooms should
be flexible to allow different scene
setting options to be used to suit the
teaching requirements

Specific Techniques
It is recommended that light sources should be between
2000-4000K with a colour rendering in excess of Ra80.
All light fittings must be flicker-free and provide a Limiting Glare
Index of 19.
Primary artificial lighting choice should be direct/indirect in
nature to create the right balance of performance, efficiency
and comfort in learning spaces. The important thing is to put
light onto all surfaces, and in particular, light the face of the
teacher and pupils, so that true communicative learning can
take place.
While PC use is widespread, and growing, modern screen
technology can easily handle high luminance well beyond that
covered by EN 12464-1, but note that it has been shown
recently that students do not learn well with a high proportion of
self-motivated PC teaching alone. Lighting for computer screens
should not impinge on lighting for effective teaching.
Effective Distribution
Lighting for visual comfort is not just about the light sources – it is
also about the distribution of light:
• Walls and ceilings need lighting with both direct and interreflected
light
• This requires relatively high reflectance surface finishes
– e.g. >70% for the ceiling, >60% for the walls (display
boards may lower this to 30-50%) and as high as
practical on the floor
• Gloss finishes should be avoided as they can cause
veiling reflections and glare
• Some walls and displays should have accent lighting, to
create the effect of directional light that feeling of dappled
sunlight through a window for instance
• Average supplementary wall illuminance should be around
2/3rds of the task illuminance
The design approach should concentrate on providing ambient,
task and accent lighting
Fig. 7.15 Direct/indirect lighting with good light
distribution onto wall displays
Specific Techniques | 137

Specific Techniques
The basic principle is to achieve a well-balanced lighting
environment, with good brightness management, which avoids
sharp, distracting lighting contrasts. It is important to remember
that while working on PCs, students will probably be receiving
information from a teacher at the same time, so providing good
vertical lighting on the face, which might be viewed from any
position in the classroom, is equally important.
In fact, good vertical illuminance is important in all teaching
spaces – being able to see the face of the teacher and the
facial expressions of other students is a key component of good
communication – and is vital to effective learning. About 80%
of the information we take in is visual and in a teaching space
most of that happens on the desk or within the 40° band (20°
above and below the horizontal from the eye).
Get the lighting wrong and it becomes difficult to see the
teacher, or the board, for instance. If we can’t see the teachers
face because contrast or vertical illuminance is poor, then
we may fail to read their body language, or in the case of
the hearing-impaired, be unable to lip read. Also consider
the colour of the background compared to the teacher’s skin
tone. Lighting a light skin tone against a white background
presents different problems to a dark skin tone against a white
background. Good design will have to cater for all the diverse
ethnicities of teaching staff.
Using Daylight
Good daylighting is also paramount -- artificial lighting makes
up 25 per cent of the energy costs of a typical school. Recent
research in the US showed that high levels of daylight are
associated with improvements in learning rates, increased
attendance and 20 per cent higher results in reading and
maths. It also can also lead to energy savings of 30-60 per
cent (70 per cent if automatic blinds are used).
So ecologically and on a human level we cannot ignore
daylight. All schools need to use daylight as their primary
light source, with daylight factors of 4-5 per cent and a
minimum 20 per cent of glazing on external walls. As well
as letting in daylight, this allows students and staff to retain a
link to the outside weather, environment and changing light
conditions throughout the day. This helps to improve morale and
concentration and to maintain their circadian rhythms.
138 | Specific Techniques
Fig. 7.16 An example of lighting with good
vertical illuminance at the board
Fig. 7.17 A classroom with ample daylight

Specific Techniques
7.4 Emergency lighting
Emergency lighting is provided when the supply to the normal
lighting fails. It helps people to see their way and move to
evacuate quickly to a safe place out of the building. It also
avoids panic, restores confidence and enables specific tasks to
be made safe.
Emergency lighting should be provided in all areas where,
when the normal lights fail, there is insufficient daylight or
borrowed light available for those people on the premises.
A risk assessment should be made to identify the places and
routes where people may be at risk and need evacuating in the
event of the normal lighting failing.
An emergency lighting scheme should be designed with
sufficient consideration to the type of premise, size, complexity,
kind of activities and type of people involved. Special
consideration should be given to places where the elderly and
those with disabilities may be present.
There are four main points to consider for an effective
emergency lighting scheme:
1 – Exit Signage
Visible safety signs and signage to indicate the escape
route and final exit should be available at all material times
(luminance of the sign’s safety colours must be at least 2 cd/
m²). The escape route signs must be located so that occupants
from any part of the premises can see and identify the direction
for evacuation.
2 – Mandatory Points
Emergency luminaires have to be carefully positioned to ensure
a compliant emergency lighting scheme. To provide adequate
illumination they need to be mounted close to potential hazards
on the route, such as stairs, a change of direction or crossings
and places requiring emphasis, such as first aid posts, fire
fighting appliances and marshalling points. Also for places
where people may need reassurance in the event the normal
lights failing, such as lifts, toilets or closets.
Specific Techniques | 139

Specific Techniques
3 – Illumination levels and infill lighting
In addition to the lighting of mandatory points, infill luminaires
may be required to achieve the correct lighting levels.
An adequate level of illuminance on the floor of escape areas
(minimum 0.5 lx) and escape routes (minimum on centre line
1.0 lx) should be made available within 5 seconds of the mains
failing to avoid anxiety, and remain operative for at least 1
hour, or longer if required, for safe evacuation. Additionally
take care to illuminate the volume of space (from floor up to a
height of 2.0m) through which people move during evacuation
by mounting luminaires above head height.
High-risk task areas should be illuminated to an adequate level
(minimum 15 lx) within 0.5 seconds of the normal lights failing
for as long as required to complete making the task safe or
whilst people pass by if it is by the escape route.
Illumination should be carried out with light sources having a
colour rendering index of at least Ra 40 so that safety colours
in an escape area or on an escape route can be seen and
discriminated.
Stylish luminaires should be chosen to blend in with the
design of the overall lighting scheme, but they must suit the
environmental conditions of the location. For example use
IP65 emergency lighting luminaires outside the final exit. The
luminaires may be dedicated standalone types or integrated
into standard lighting luminaires. They can be self-contained or
central power fed depending on the size and complexity of the
premises, the operation and servicing and practicalities and
through life economics of the installation.
4 – Maintenance and testing
Once the scheme is installed and commissioned, it is essential
that the luminaires are properly maintained and ready to perform
in the event of an emergency. To make sure installed emergency
products are always fit for purpose, regular testing has to be
conducted by the building operator. Therefore consideration
should be given at the design stage to the intended method
- be it local switch, automatic self-testing or an automatic
remote/central controlled testing system. Also assess and plan
a schedule for servicing the lamps and batteries at required
intervals. Finally, remember the commissioning and certification
requirements for both the design and the installed scheme.
140 | Specific Techniques

Specific Techniques
Emergency lighting system considerations
Standby lighting is used as an alternative to normal lighting but
it can also form the emergency escape lighting solution. When
it does it must follow the rules governing escape lighting.
Escape lighting covers the need for clearly defined escape
routes in the premises formed by corridors or paths indicated by
painted lines. Open areas are defined as places where there
is no clear route or where the routes are changing such as a
large shop, open plan office or multi purpose hall. A high-risk
task area is where some uninterruptible activity is ongoing,
such as a chemical dip process, or some other process that
requires unbroken lighting conditions for safe shut down. In
some places where there is high risk of smoke accumulation
(airlines, passenger ships) low location way guidance systems
are provided to supplement the escape route lighting.
Emergency escape lighting
Escape route lighting
Low location way guidance
Emergency Lighting
Open area (anti-panic) lighting
Standby lighting
High risk task area lighting
Fig. 7.18 Specific forms of emergency lighting
Specific Techniques | 141

Specific Techniques
Clearly defined escape routes
Clearly defined escape routes are taken to be up to 2m wide.
Here the horizontal illuminance at floor level on the centre line
should be not less than 1 lux, and the centre band of at least
50 per cent of the route width should be illuminated to at least
half the centre line value. The diversity of illuminance should not
exceed 40:1. Wider routes may be treated as 2m wide strips
of escape routes but preferably as open areas. The design
illuminance is to be provided within 60 seconds, but preferably
within 5 seconds of the supply failure. To avoid dazzling
people it is important not to exceed the intensity limits related to
the mounting height of the luminaires.
Safety signs
Strategically placed signs permanently indicating the escape
directions from the premises are essential to alleviate anxiety
and confusion by the people present. The signs should conform
to the graphic design, colour and luminance criteria given in
the EN1838 standard. It is important that during an emergency
only signs that give a positive indication to the way out should
be illuminated and that the signs are mounted high enough
(above 2.0m) so that they are not obscured.
Open areas
Areas where the furnishing or equipment on the floor is
frequently reconfigured will not have clearly defined escape
routes and are therefore treated as open areas, as defined
above.
In these the illuminance on the floor should be a minimum
0.5 lux anywhere up to 0.5m from the walls and 50 per cent
should be provided within 5 seconds, 100 per cent being
provided within 60 seconds of the normal lights failing. The
diversity of illuminance should not exceed 40:1. To avoid
dazzling people the intensity limits for the luminaire should not
be exceeded for the mounting height in the scheme.
Exit signs should be located so that they are visible from any
part of the space.
142 | Specific Techniques
not less than 0.5 lx
not less than 0.5 lx
50% of width
not less than 1.0 lx along centreline
Fig. 7.19 Escape route plan (up to 2m wide)
Large areas require
min 0.5 lx up to
border of 0.5m
of the perimeter
area. Max. to min.
illuminance
ratio not greater
than 40:1.
Exit sign
must be
visible from
all parts
of open area
Fig. 7.20 Escape route illuminance requirements

Specific Techniques
High risk task areas
During the failure of the normal lighting supply, emergency
lighting is required in places where machinery, plant or other
processes may present a hazard if left in operation, and that
must be shut down before evacuating the area, In some cases
the escape route may be alongside these hazardous tasks
and therefore needs to be highlighted. There are also places
where the task activity cannot be halted and needs standby
emergency light (such as in an operating theatre).
The high risk tasks areas should be illuminated as required by
the task and in any event the maintained illuminance should
be not less than 10 per cent of the required maintained
illuminance for that task and should not be less than 15 lux and
be available in full within 0.5 seconds. The uniformity should
not be less than 0.1. For this a no-break or maintained system
should be considered.
Power systems for emergency lighting
Emergency lighting systems are usually powered from batteries
or generators that are automatically triggered by a detection
system as soon as the mains system fails. The system duration
or category is defined by the period the system is able supply
power to the load. Usually given as 60 minutes (1 hour) or 180
minutes (3 hours). The two main types of electrical systems in
use are self-contained and central power:
Self-contained systems
Each luminaire is equipped with battery, charger, indicator
and changeover device. These elements may be integral to the
luminaire or housed in a separate unit mounted less than 1m
from the luminaire. The mains supply charges the battery, which
cuts in when the mains system fails. Self-contained systems are
easy to install and extend, and require minimal maintenance.
The system may include a self- testing facility that can carry
out the routine monthly and annual operational tests and give
local indications of the status. They can also be connected to a
central managed automatic testing system and can give printed
report of any defects.
Each luminaire is equipped with batteries and
inverter to power one lamp on mains failure
The gear may be remote mounted, if so the box
should be within 1m of the luminaire.
Fig. 7.21 Self-contained system
Specific Techniques | 143

Specific Techniques
Central systems
Here the power is provided by remote central batteries or
generators and is distributed through sub-circuits to a number
of slave luminaires. These systems are best suited for large
premises. They will require space to house the large battery
sets or generator. The wiring of the sub-circuits has to be
protected and be of high-integrity. During design due allowance
should be made for voltage drops. As part of the high
integrity considerations the luminaires with loop-in/out wiring
facility must also have protected glands and terminal blocks,
alternatively the luminaires may be treated as an individual spur
connection to a protected emergency power ring sub-circuit.
The system must include monitoring of the mains supply and
detection of failure of local circuits in each part of the premises
to bring on the emergency lighting.
Mains Mains Mains mode mode mode Emergency Emergency Emergency mode mode mode
Non-ma Non-ma intained intained
Non-maintained (NM)
(NM) (NM)
Mains mode Emergency Mains mode
lamp is off
lamp is on
lamp lamp is off is
mode
off
Emergency
lamp lamp is on is on
mode
Maintained Maintained
Non-ma intained
(M)
Mains
(NM)
(M) (M) mode Emergency mode
Mains mode Emergenc
lamp is off
lamp lamp is on
lamp is on
lamp is on
lamp is on
Combined (C)
Mains
lamp
lamp is on
Non-ma mode
is
is
on
off
intained Emergency
lamp
lamp
mode
is
is
on
on
Combined Non-ma
Combined
Maintained
Mains mode Emergency mode
intained
(NM)
(C) (NM)
(C)
(M) Non-ma intained
lamp
(NM)
is off
lamp is on
lamp is off
lamp i
lamp is on
lamp
mains lamp
mains
lamp is on
mains lam Maintained
lamp is p lam
is
off is onp
on
on is on emergency emergency
lamp is
lamp is lam emergency on p lam
on
is lamp p on is is on
Combined
lamp is off
lamp is on
Maintained
(M)
(C) Maintained
Fig. 7.23 Summary of modes of operation
lamp
Fig (M)
lamp is on
lamp i
. Fig 6.21 (M)
is on
lamp is on
mains lam. 6.21 p Su is mmary on Su mmary emergency of mode of mains mode s lam of lam s p oper of is p on oper is ation on ation emergency lam p is on
Luminaire mode of operation lamp lamp Combined is on is on lamp lamp is on is on
There Combined are Combined a number of ways that emergency (C) luminaires can
of mains mode operate.
(C) Fig lam s (C) of In . 6.21 p all oper is cases, on Su ation where mmary emergency a battery of mode is present, lams p of it is on charged oper ation mains lam p is on emergency
by the mains supply.
mains mains lam p lam is on p is on emergency lam p lam is on p is on
of mode Non-maintained s of oper (NM) ation Fig . 6.21 Su mmary of mode s of oper ation
The lamp is only lit when the mains fail and is operated by an
Fig emergency . Fig 6.21 . 6.21 power Su mmary Su source. mmary of mode of mode s of s oper of oper ation ation
Maintained (M)
The lamp is lit at all material times and is powered by the mains
supply under normal conditions. In an emergency, when the
mains fail, an emergency power source cuts in to power the
lamp.
144 | Specific Techniques
Fig. 7.22 Central system

Specific Techniques
Combined (C)
This is a variant of the maintained luminaire in which one lamp
is powered by the mains supply during normal conditions.
A second lamp operates only under emergency conditions
powered by an emergency power source. This type of
luminaire provides light at all material times and is best suited
for signage.
Planning Schemes
The lighting calculations involved in emergency lighting are
straightforward. It is important to base all calculations on real
photometric data for the specific lamp and luminaire, with the
output in the worst (minimum) condition. The EN 13032-3
European standard gives the format of the photometric data and
defines the critical factors for to be used in calculations.
Planning Sequence
There is no precise sequence to be followed, but this
checklist indicates a possible course. (It is most important that
consultation with relevant bodies over the specific plans is
carried out early in the design process).
1. Establish licensing requirements
2. Examine building plans
3. Mark exits and final exits
4. Mark escape routes
5. Identify open areas and special locations
6. Mark location of hazards, fire-fighting appliances, and
alarm call points.
7. Identify small toilets with no windows and toilets over 8m².
8. Identify closets, control rooms, special plant rooms and lifts
9. Note illuminance and other specification requirements.
10. Select signs and escape luminaires fit for the purpose.
11. Position luminaires at essential locations.
12. Add extra luminaires to complete scheme.
13. Check uniformity and glare.
14. Prepare installations instruction.
15. Prepare commissioning procedure, including illuminance
checks.
16. Prepare operation testing service instructions.
17. Prepare logbook.
Specific Techniques | 145

Specific Techniques
Inspection and Servicing
Regular inspection and servicing of emergency lighting
schemes is essential. In the scheme design these matters must
be considered and adequately documented. The standards EN
1838 and EN 50172 provide the framework for certification
of completion of installation and certification for periodic
testing and servicing. The onus for these activities falls on the
competent person of the owner/user of premises. Any faults
noticed should be recorded in the logbook
To verify that adequate emergency lighting is available at all
material times the system needs to be inspected and tested
monthly and to make full duration tests annually. At the end of
each test the circuit is restored to charge conditions and the
charge indicator should glow to show that the battery is on
charge. The inspection needs to confirm that the luminaires
are in place as designed, the lamp in maintained luminaires
is functioning and the signs are visible. The testing may be
made by automatic systems but these must provide noticeable
feedback and warning if action is required.
Servicing considerations are straightforward. The batteries or
fuel tank for the generator may need topping up. The luminaires
need cleaning, failed lamps changing and the batteries
in self-contained luminaires replaced at the manufacturers
recommended interval. Regular servicing will keep the systems
effective and reliable for operation at all material times.
146 | Specific Techniques

Specific Techniques
7.5 Low mount road lighting
When lighting roads there are a number of cases where
conventional lanterns do not provide the best solution to the
real road situation. Mounting heights may be restricted by
structures or local regulations, obtrusive light may be an issue,
or maintenance may have to be completed at very high speeds
– for example to reduce operators’ exposure to fast-moving
traffic, or where downtime for service has to be reduced to
the absolute minimum. In situations such as these conventional
lighting is often deficient and an alternative solution is to use a
luminaire that incorporates flat beam technology, such as the
Thorn Orus lantern. A flat beam lantern is designed to satisfy
standard lighting criteria in a low height format, and therefore
offers engineers a new resource in road lighting. In the case
of the Orus lantern a mounting height of 0.9m is standard.
Therefore where the use of high columns or other structures is
an issue flat beam lanterns can deliver optimised performance
without glare for road users.
Fig. 7.24 A flat beam installation on a road
bridge
Specific Techniques | 147

Specific Techniques
The flat beam concept
Flat beam technology must address two issues unique to
low-level mounting, glare and performance. By positioning the
optical light engine below the driver’s eye line the risk of direct
glare is reduced, and by projecting light transverse to the road
the optical system can offer a very sharp and controlled light
distribution, maximising performance. This controlled distribution
lights a road surface at ‘grazing’ incidence angles, and drivers
perceive higher levels of road lighting because the peak of
the reflected beam is roughly in the direction of the eye. This
does not mean higher glare because the light distribution is
sharply reduced, practically nil when the lantern is installed at
the optimum height below the driver’s eye line. Therefore flat
beam technology can give road users the benefits of increased
perceived ‘brightness’ and visibility. An added benefit is that the
low mounting height acts as a good optical and visual guide to
the road layout.
With conventional luminaires, the ratio of spacing to mounting
height is between 3.5 and 5, but with a flat beam lantern the
figure is between 10 and 18. Similarly taking the ratio of lit
width to mounting height conventional luminaires produce a
figure between 0.8 and 1.2, whilst with flat beam technology
the figure improves to between 8 and 13. This allows
increased spacing of the lanterns, between 8m and 15m for
Orus, which is important to prevent a flicker effect from the
lanterns. With these spacings the eyes can adjust dependent on
speed, meaning that the flicker effect is maintained below 4Hz
and in most cases less than 2.5Hz, keeping driver discomfort to
an acceptable minimum.
Conventional Installation
8m
8m
New concept
0,90m
8m
148 | Specific Techniques
24m
24m
Fig. 7.25 A flat beam lantern mounted on a
bridge structure
Fig. 7.26 Conventional versus low mount lighting

Specific Techniques
Application of flat beam technology
As mentioned flat beam lanterns can be used where traditional
road lighting using columns or façade mounting is not feasible,
for reasons such as:
• Ease of access
• Extreme weather
• Structural fragility
• Maintenance difficulties
• In the vicinity of airfields or other sensitive areas
• Risk of obtrusive light
• Other environmental or resource issues
Flat beam lanterns can be specified for use on roads with
or without pedestrian traffic. Without pedestrians, the
optical design can direct light entirely onto the road. Where
pedestrians are present an alternative optical design that
creates a ‘circle’ of light around the luminaire helps drivers
to detect a pedestrian’s entire body. This option also allows
for facial recognition by other pedestrians. Flat beam lighting
is also an excellent solution where obtrusive light has to be
reduced. For example, it can be specified in certain residential
areas, or in areas where the surrounding buildings are
illuminated and road lighting should therefore be unobtrusive.
Flat beam technology is also suitable for use in parks and
gardens. Here the luminaires can spread light at low level
without distracting attention from other illuminated features.
Durability
Obviously a potential problem when using flat beam
technology is the additional rigors imposed through the lanterns
closeness to the road and therefore the harsh effects of road
usage, and also the ease of access for vandalism. It is essential
that the lanterns are constructed from high quality materials and
engineered for low maintenance and a long operating life.
Optical components such as the visor need to be strong, UV
stabilised and scratch resistant. Tamper resistant screws will be
needed and the lantern and mounting will need a suitable IK
rating, such as IK10/40 joules. As the lantern is close to the
road and therefore the spray caused by road traffic both optic
and gear should comply with IP66.
8m
8m
10m
10m
Fig. 7.27 Flat beam lighting in road
configurations (upper) and pedestrian
configuration (lower)
Specific Techniques | 149

Specific Techniques
Lighting Data for the Thorn Orus lantern
When flat beam technology was integrated into Orus, priority
was given to the limitation of glare. Calculations show that
TI is considerably below 10 per cent while luminance and
uniformity exceed relevant standards. The system is designed
with a specific lamp burner cap so that direct light cannot reach
the eyes of a driver or the rear mirrors of a car when installed
at the compulsory height of 0.9m. In a complete installation,
Orus offers drivers a unique ‘guidance’ effect which tracks the
contours of the road, ahead and behind. Orus can be installed
either single-sided, with luminaire spacing between 8 and 15m,
or on both sides of the road with the same spacing. In the latter
configuration it will cover roads up to 20m wide, giving ample
coverage for roads with multiple lanes including cycle lanes
and central reservations. The wide choice of lamps – from 35
to 70W HIT-CE G12, or 60W HIT-CE PGZ12 CosmoWhite –
gives planners ample scope to adjust Orus to any project. Light
output from Orus luminaires is surprisingly resistant to obstruction
by queues of traffic. Tests have shown that there is no
occultation nor distracting shadows, while light emitted from the
system is distributed ahead of, behind and beneath vehicles. It
is also reflected by the road surface. Spacing options between
8 and 15m also reduce any ‘pools’ of darkness, while lighting
from vehicles further maintains lighting levels. Orus luminaires
mix perfectly with classic column mounted systems. Because
they use white light they can be used to highlight sections of the
highway where care is required, as in a hazard black spot or
area of restricted speed.
150 | Specific Techniques
Fig. 7.28 The Orus lantern

Specific Techniques
7.6 Road tunnel lighting
The aim of lighting a tunnel is to create a safe environment
that allows road users to pass through the tunnel without any
accidents, and the lighting needs to be suitable for both
daytime and night-time hours. The most critical requirement is to
detect obstacles on the road, especially when you are entering
and leaving the tunnel.
To help in the design process tunnels are normally divided into
five zones, the entrance zone, the threshold zone, the transition
zone, the interior zone and the exit zone.
Entrance
zone
Portal
Threshhold
zone
Transition
zone
The entrance zone is the part of the tunnel just before the
entrance, and it has a length equal to the stopping distance
of a car at the traffic design speed. During daylight hours the
driver is adapted to the high luminance outside the tunnel. To
avoid the entrance to the tunnel appearing as a black hole and
to ensure that a driver approaching the tunnel entrance can
detect obstacles on the road, suitable lighting must be installed
in the tunnel entrance, the threshold zone.
The threshold zone is the first zone inside the tunnel and has
a length equal to the stopping distance of a vehicle at traffic
design speed. Luminance values (Lth) should be calculated
according to the calculation method shown in the document CIE
88:2004 and this is related to the luminance outside the tunnel
and the speed of the traffic passing through the tunnel. The
road luminance can be reduced after a distance of half of the
stopping distance into the tunnel.
Interior
zone
Exit
zone
Fig. 7.29 The five zones of a tunnel
Fig. 7.30 The entrance zone
Exit
Specific Techniques | 151

Specific Techniques
Between the threshold zone and the interior zone a number of
transition zones occur. In these transition zones the luminance is
gradually reduced until it reaches the level of the interior zone.
The luminance values can be reduced in steps of 3:1, but the
last step from transition zone to interior zone should not be
greater than two times the interior zones values.
The interior zone is the longest part of the tunnel and the
luminance level should comply with the recommendations given
in the standard. These recommendations give the luminance
level as a function of the stopping distance and traffic flow. For
very long tunnels the interior zone may be split into two subzones.
The first sub-zone is equivalent to the distance of travel of
a vehicle at traffic design speed. The second sub-zone contains
the remaining length of the interior zone.
The exit zone has to follow the same luminance level as the
interior zone, but where additional hazards may occur in the
tunnel, or in long tunnels, it is recommended to increase the
luminance level immediately prior to the exit.
For all zones the lighting levels on the walls is recommended
to be at least 60 per cent of the road luminance values of
the relevant zone up to a height of 2 meters above the road
surface. Uniformity of luminance in the zones must be a ratio of
0.4 (minimum to average on the road and walls up to a height
of 2m above the road surface). A longitudinal uniformity of 0.6
is required along the centre of each lane of the road.
The perception of flicker can occur in a tunnel. This generally
occurs when the luminaires are not mounted in a continuous
row when discomfort from flicker occurs due to the luminance
changes from that of the bright luminaires to the darker surface
between luminaires. The length of the experience, the amount
of light (peak value and duration) and flicker frequency has
an impact on the experience. To minimise flicker discomfort it
should be ensured that the flicker frequency is either below 2.5
Hz or above 15Hz.
For example: For a traffic design speed of 60Km/h
(16.6m/sec) and a luminaire spacing of 4m
the flicker frequency is 16.6/4 = 4.2Hz.
152 | Specific Techniques
Fig. 7.31 The interior zone of a tunnel lit from
one side by a continuous row of
luminaires
Fig. 7.32 A tunnel lit using floodlights in an
opposite configuration

Specific Techniques
Optics for a tunnel
The main aim for the lighting is to provide a good contrast
between the object and the road. For this luminaires may be
placed either above the road surface, or at the side of the
road surface. Two main types of luminaire optics exist for tunnel
lighting, giving a different distribution.
Symmetrical optics
This optic type is often placed above the lanes and the light
distribution is symmetrical both along the road and transverse
to the road. Symmetrical optics may sometimes be placed in
the junction between wall and ceiling making maintenance of
the luminaires easier and removing the need to close the tunnel
during maintenance time.
Counter beam optics
This optic type is asymmetrical and main beam is orientated
against the traffic, to create a maximum contrast between the
object and the road. Luminaires are placed above the traffic
lanes
To design a complete tunnel lighting installation takes a high
amount of knowledge and experience. The international
document CIE 88:2004 gives information on designing a
tunnel lighting scheme, and local standards should be consulted
for relevant national requirements.
Fig. 7.33 Symmetrical optics
Fig. 7.34 Counter beam optics
Specific Techniques | 153

Specific Techniques
7.7 Lighting maintenance
When a lighting installation is first commissioned conditions
are at their optimal, that is the luminaires, lamps and reflective
surfaces in the space are new and clean. Through the life of
the installation these conditions will deteriorate as age and dirt
reduce the effectiveness of the lighting. Consequently when
designing a lighting installation it is common to design for a
maintained lighting value, that is the lighting level achieved
when the luminaires, lamps and reflective surfaces are at their
oldest or dirtiest.
To calculate maintained lighting levels it is necessary to
calculate the light loss at the point when the luminaires, lamps
and reflective surfaces are at their oldest or dirtiest. This means
that the maintenance cycle for the installation must be defined.
The maintenance cycle consists of three main activities:
1. Cleaning and maintaining the luminaire
2. Cleaning and maintaining the lamp
3. Cleaning and maintaining the reflective surfaces in the
lit space. In exterior area lighting the impact of reflective
surfaces may be negligible. However in applications
such as tunnels and underpasses, and also the lighting
of building facades regular cleaning can improve the
performance of the lighting scheme.
154 | Specific Techniques
Fig. 7.35 The maintenance cycle

Specific Techniques
An example is shown in Figure 7.35, in which the luminaire
is cleaned every two years, and is cleaned and re-lamped
and the reflective surfaces are cleaned every six years. In this
example the installation maintenance factor is 67 per cent,
so at worst case only 67 per cent of the initial lighting level is
being realised. Note, the installation will never reach the initial
lighting levels achieved when new, as deterioration of some of
the components within the luminaire, and of the surface finishes
within the space, cannot be fully recovered by cleaning.
The main factors that influence the loss of lighting performance
through life for an installation are:
• The cleanliness of the environment. In industrial or urban
environments airborne dirt will be much higher than in
clean room or rural environments. Therefore either the
luminaires and reflective surfaces within the space will
need cleaning more often or the maintenance factor for
the installation will be reduced.
• The type of luminaire specified within the installation. In
dirty environments using an open luminaire will allow
dirt deposition within the luminaire that is very difficult to
clean. Using a sealed unit prevents dirt from entering the
luminaire and therefore only the external surfaces require
cleaning and may be cleaned more vigorously.
• The lamp technology used within the installation. Different
lamp types have different characteristics with respect to
lumen maintenance and lamp life and deciding when
to relamp is a compromise between these two factors.
Selecting a lamp with good lumen maintenance through
life will reduce the light loss due to lamp aging. However,
the installation performance also relies on all (or at least
the majority) of lamps working. So either a spot lamp
replacement system must be used where any failed lamps
are immediately replaced, or the installation maintenance
factor must include an adjustment for the percentage of
broken lamps expected before relamping. Therefore,
relamping must be done when the lamp lumens have
reached a minimum acceptable value and the number of
failed lamps in the installation has reached a maximum
acceptable level.
Specific Techniques | 155

Specific Techniques
The installation maintenance factor is then the product of all the
maintenance factors of the installation components.
MF installation = luminaire MF x lamp lumen MF x lamp
survival MF x reflective surface MF
Where
luminaire MF the amount of light lost due to the
luminaire through aging and dirt
deposition on the luminaire
lamp lumen MF the amount of light lost due to a
reduction in lamp flux as the lamp ages
lamp survival MF the amount of light lost due to failed
lamps which are not immediately
replaced
reflective surface MF the amount of light lost due to reduced
reflection from surfaces within the
installation
Data for these factors should be available from manufacturers.
However the data will assume the unit is operating within
normal conditions as specified by the manufacturer. Operating
outside these conditions could (and probably will) alter the
characteristics of the unit. For example operating a lamp in a
hot environment may increase the lumen output of the lamp, but
at expense of lumen maintenance and lamp life.
Many lighting design software allow the maintenance
schedule to be defined and use this to calculate an installation
maintenance factor. However further guidance on calculating
and using maintenance factors may be found in publications
CIE 97-2006 - Maintenance of Indoor Electric Lighting Systems
and CIE 154:2003 - The Maintenance of Outdoor Lighting
Systems
Standard tables for luminaire and room surface maintenance
factors exist in CIE 97 and in the absence of more
comprehensive manufacturers data these may be used. They
rely on the classification of the environment being lit into very
clean, clean, normal or dirty, and classification of the luminaire
according to its resistance to the effects of dirt (type A to G).
156 | Specific Techniques

Specific Techniques
Table 7.2 gives help in deciding which environment should be
used, along with advice on typical cleaning intervals.
Inspection interval Environment Activity or Task area
3 years
Very Clean Clean rooms, semi conductor plants, hospital clinical areas*, computer centres
Clean
Offices, schools, hospital wards
2 years Normal Shops, laboratories, restaurants, warehouses, assembly areas, workshops
1 year Dirty Steelworks, chemical works, foundries, welding, polishing, woodwork
Table 7.2 Typical inspection periods for differing environmental conditions
Table 7.3 gives guidance on deciding the type of luminaire,
which is then used in the luminaire maintenance table to
determine the luminaire maintenance factor.
Type Luminaire type Luminaire description
A Bare batten Bare lamp luminaires
B
C
Open top housing
(natural ventilated and
“self cleaning” types)
Closed top housing
(unventilated)
*In clinical areas more frequent inspections may be required
Direct-indirect luminaires without cover, direct-indirect luminaires with indirect reflector and
closed optical device, wallwashing luminaires (vertical opening), wall mounted luminaires
open top and base, downlights with open top
Recessed and surface mounted luminaires (e.g. with louvres), downlights, spotlights
D Enclosed IP2X General purpose luminaires with closed covers and optics
E Dust proof IP5X Dust proof IP5X (protected, clean room luminaires)
F
Indirect lighting and
uplight
Free standing, pendant, wall mounted uplighters with closed base, cove lights
G
Air handling and forced
ventilated
Air handling body and optic used with air-conditioning or ventilation systems
Table 7.3 Luminaire type and description
When the environment and luminaire type have been
determined the tables shown below may be used to give the
luminaire maintenance factor and room surface maintenance
factor. The room surface maintenance factor depends upon
the downward flux fraction (DFF) for the luminaire, which is
defined as
DFF = downward light output ratio / total light output ratio.
Specific Techniques | 157

Specific Techniques
Elapsed time
between
cleanings
in years
0 0.5 1.0 1.5
Environment
Luminaire type
Any VC C N D VC C N D VC C N D
A 1 0.98 0.95 0.92 0.88 0.96 0.93 0.89 0.83 0.95 0.91 0.87 0.80
B 1 0.96 0.95 0.91 0.88 0.95 0.90 0.86 0.83 0.94 0.87 0.83 0.79
C 1 0.95 0.93 0.89 0.85 0.94 0.89 0.81 0.75 0.93 0.84 0.74 0.66
D 1 0.94 0.92 0.87 0.83 0.94 0.88 0.82 0.77 0.93 0.85 0.79 0.73
E 1 0.94 0.96 0.93 0.91 0.96 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.92 0.92 0.88 0.83
F 1 0.94 0.92 0.89 0.85 0.93 0.86 0.81 0.74 0.91 0.81 0.73 0.65
G 1 1,00 1.00 0.99 0.98 1.00 0.99 0.96 0.93 0.99 0.97 0.94 0.89
Elapsed time
between
cleanings
in years
0 2.0 2.5 3.0
Environment
Luminaire type
Any VC C N D VC C N D VC C N D
A 1 0.94 0.89 0.84 0.78 0.93 0.87 0.82 0.75 0.92 0.85 0.79 0.73
B 1 0.92 0.84 0.80 0.75 0.91 0.82 0.76 0.71 0.89 0.79 0.74 0.68
C 1 0.91 0.80 0.69 0.59 0.89 0.77 0.64 0.54 0.87 0.74 0.61 0.52
D 1 0.91 0.83 0.77 0.71 0.90 0.81 0.75 0.68 0.89 0.79 0.73 0.65
E 1 0.93 0.91 0.86 0.81 0.92 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.92 0.90 0.84 0.79
F 1 0.88 0.77 0.66 0.57 0.86 0.73 0.60 0.51 0.85 0.70 0.55 0.45
G 1 0.99 0.96 0.92 0.87 0.98 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.98 0.95 0.90 0.85
Table 7.4 Luminaire maintenance factors based upon type and environment
158 | Specific Techniques

Specific Techniques
time/yrs 0.00 0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00 5.50 6.00
reflectances
environment room surface maintenance factors – utilisation plane
ceiling/walls/floor
0.80/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95
clean 1.00 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91
normal 1.00 0.88 0.86 0.86 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85
dirty 1.00 0.81 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80
0.80/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97
clean 1.00 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94
normal 1.00 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90
dirty 1.00 0.86 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85
0.80/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
clean 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
normal 1.00 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93
dirty 1.00 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90
0.70/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
clean 1.00 0.94 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92
normal 1.00 0.89 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87
dirty 1.00 0.83 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81
0.70/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97
clean 1.00 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94
normal 1.00 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90
dirty 1.00 0.87 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86
0.70/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
clean 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
normal 1.00 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93
dirty 1.00 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91
0.50/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
clean 1.00 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93
normal 1.00 0.91 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89
dirty 1.00 0.85 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84
0.50/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97
clean 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95
normal 1.00 0.94 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92
dirty 1.00 0.89 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88
0.50/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
clean 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97
normal 1.00 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95
dirty 1.00 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92
Table 7.5 Room surface maintenance factors for DFF=1.0 (direct luminaires)
Specific Techniques | 159

Specific Techniques
time/yrs 0.00 0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00 5.50 6.00
reflectances
environment room surface maintenance factors – utilisation plane
ceiling/walls/floor
0.80/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93
clean 1.00 0.90 0.88 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87
normal 1.00 0.81 0.78 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77
dirty 1.00 0.70 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67
0.80/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95
clean 1.00 0.93 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90
normal 1.00 0.85 0.83 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.82
dirty 1.00 0.76 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73
0.80/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
clean 1.00 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92
normal 1.00 0.89 0.87 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86
dirty 1.00 0.81 0.79 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78
0.70/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.96 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93
clean 1.00 0.91 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88
normal 1.00 0.83 0.80 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79
dirty 1.00 0.72 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69
0.70/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95
clean 1.00 0.93 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91
normal 1.00 0.87 0.84 0.84 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83
dirty 1.00 0.77 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75
0.70/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
clean 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93
normal 1.00 0.90 0.88 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87
dirty 1.00 0.82 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80
0.50/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.97 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95
clean 1.00 0.93 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90
normal 1.00 0.86 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83
dirty 1.00 0.76 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74
0.50/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
clean 1.00 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92
normal 1.00 0.89 0.87 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86
dirty 1.00 0.81 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79
0.50/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97
clean 1.00 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94
normal 1.00 0.92 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90
dirty 1.00 0.85 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84
Table 7.6 Room surface maintenance factors for DFF=0.5 (direct/indirect luminaires)
160 | Specific Techniques

Specific Techniques
time/yrs 0.00 0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00 5.50 6.00
reflectances
environment room surface maintenance factors – utilisation plane
ceiling/walls/floor
0.80/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.93 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89
clean 1.00 0.86 0.82 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81
normal 1.00 0.72 0.67 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66
dirty 1.00 0.54 0.50 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49
0.80/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91
clean 1.00 0.88 0.85 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84
normal 1.00 0.76 0.72 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71
dirty 1.00 0.59 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55
0.80/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.96 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93
clean 1.00 0.90 0.88 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87
normal 1.00 0.80 0.76 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75
dirty 1.00 0.64 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60
0.70/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.93 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90
clean 1.00 0.86 0.83 0.82 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81
normal 1.00 0.73 0.68 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67
dirty 1.00 0.55 0.51 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
0.70/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92
clean 1.00 0.89 0.86 0.85 0.85 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84
normal 1.00 0.77 0.73 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72
dirty 1.00 0.60 0.56 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55
0.70/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.96 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93
clean 1.00 0.91 0.88 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87
normal 1.00 0.80 0.77 0.76 0.76 0.76 0.76 0.76 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75
dirty 1.00 0.65 0.61 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60
0.50/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.94 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91
clean 1.00 0.87 0.84 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83
normal 1.00 0.75 0.70 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69
dirty 1.00 0.57 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52
0.50/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92
clean 1.00 0.90 0.87 0.86 0.86 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85
normal 1.00 0.78 0.74 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73
dirty 1.00 0.61 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57
0.50/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94
clean 1.00 0.91 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88
normal 1.00 0.81 0.78 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77
dirty 1.00 0.66 0.62 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61
Table 7.7 Room surface maintenance factors for DFF=0 (indirect luminaires)
Specific Techniques | 161

Specific Techniques
To determine the lamp lumen maintenance factor and lamp
survival factor data published by lamp manufacturers should be
used. Examples are shown below.
Maintenance %
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
100
162 | Specific Techniques
Lumen maintenance FH/FQ and FC
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000
Lifetime hours
Figure 7.36 Example lumen maintenance curve (courtesy Osram)
Maintenance %
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
100
Lumen maintenance T5 FQ HO, FH HE and FC
Lifetime hours
FC
FC
FH/FQ
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000
Figure 7.37 Example lamp survival curve (courtesy Osram)
FH/FQ

Specific Techniques
For example, a closed top recessed louvred luminaire with an
upward light output ratio of zero uses 14W T16 lamps (Osram
FH), and is installed in an office with surface reflectance’s
of ceiling:70%, walls:50% and floor:20%. The room and
luminaires are cleaned every three years, and the lamps are
replaced every 8000 hours. Therefore:
Luminaire maintenance factor (LMF)
Luminaire is a closed top recessed louvred fitting, which
is type C. As the luminaire is installed in an office this is a
clean environment. Therefore, from Table 7.4 for a cleaning
interval of three years the luminaire maintenance factor is
given as 0.74.
Room surface maintenance factor (RSMF)
As the luminaire has an upward light output ratio of zero
the downward light output ratio must be the same as the total
light output ratio, and therefore the DFF equals one. Using
Table 7.5 for reflectance’s 0.80/0.50/0.20 gives a room
surface maintenance factor of 0.94.
Lamp lumen maintenance factor (LLMF)
From Figure 7.36 when the lamp has been running for 8000
hours the lamp lumens has reduced to 92% of the original
output (red curve).
Lamp survival factor (LSF)
From the red curve on Figure 7.37 when the lamps have
been operating for 8000 hours 96% of the lamps will still be
functional (e.g. 4% of the lamps will have failed).
Thus the maintenance factor is:
MF = MF * RSMF * LLMF * LSF
= 0.74 * 0.94 * 0.92 * 0.96
= 0.614
Specific Techniques | 163

Specific Techniques
7.8 Control of obtrusive light
Obtrusive light is the light that does not illuminate a task or
reference area but spills onto other non-related areas. This
not only reduces the efficiency of the lighting installation as a
proportion of the light produced is being wasted, but can also
cause inconvenience or damage in the surrounding areas.
Obtrusive light may be thought of as having three components;
• Spill light, which is light emitted by a lighting installation
that falls outside the boundaries of the property for which
the lighting is designed.
• Sky glow, which is light that contributes to the brightening
of the night sky.
• Light trespass, which is a special case of spill light when
light spills onto surrounding properties. An additional form
of light trespass is when the direct view of bright luminaires
from normal viewing directions causing annoyance,
distraction or discomfort.
Light
trespass
164 | Specific Techniques
Waste light
Waste light
ULOR
DLOR
Fig. 7.38 An example of an installation
producing sky glow
Sky glow direct and reflected flux
Spill light
Reference area Immediate surrounds Surrounds
Fig. 7.39 The components of obtrusive light

Specific Techniques
A selection of lighting technical parameters are used to define
limits for obtrusive light, depending upon the type of obtrusive
light being experienced or measured. All the parameters
depend upon the environmental zone the installation is within,
which effectively defines the amount of background brightness
from the surround area. The environmental zones are shown in
Table 7.8.
Zone Surrounding Lighting Environment Examples
E1 Natural Dark National parks and protected sites
E2 Rural Low brightness Industrial or residential rural areas
E3 Suburban Medium brightness Industrial or residential rural suburbs
E4 Urban High brightness Town centres and commercial areas
Table 7.8 Definitions of environmental zones
The lighting technical parameters used to define limits for
obtrusive light are;
• ULR, the upward light ratio. This is the proportion of light
that is emitted at or above the horizontal when a luminaire
is mounted in its installed position. For an installation it is
the sum of individual luminaire upward light ratios in their
installed orientation and this indicates the contribution of
an installation to sky glow.
Light
Technical
Parameter Application Conditions
Upward
Light Ratio
(ULR)
Table 7.9 Upward light ratio limits
Ratio of luminous flux incident on horizontal
plane just above luminaire in its installed
position, to total luminaire flux.
Environmental Zones
E1 E2 E3 E4
0 0 – 5 0 – 15 0 – 25
Specific Techniques | 165

Specific Techniques
• Ev, the vertical illuminance on surrounding properties.
Limits apply to nearby dwellings and special attention
should be taken to vertical illuminance on windows. If land
has been designated for dwellings but no construction has
occurred these limits still apply for the potential dwellings.
Light
Technical
Parameter Application Conditions
• I, the maximum intensity of a luminaire in a designated
direction. Limits apply to every luminaire in an installation,
and are evaluated from every direction where views of
bright surfaces of luminaires are likely to be disturbing to
residents. Mind you, this only applies where the viewing
direction is not short-term, but is likely to be maintained.
166 | Specific Techniques
Environmental Zones
E1 E2 E3 E4
Illuminance in vertical plane (Ev) Pre-curfew: 2 lux 5 lux 10 lux 25 lux
Table 7.10 Vertical illuminance limits on properties
Light
Technical
Parameter Application Conditions
Luminous intensity emitted by
luminaires (I)
Table 7.11 Luminous intensity limits in a designated direction
Post-curfew: 0 lux 1 lux 2 lux 5 lux
Environmental Zones
E1 E2 E3 E4
Pre-curfew: 2500 cd 7500 cd 10000 cd 25000 cd
Post-curfew: 0 cd 500 cd 1000 cd 2500 cd

Specific Techniques
• TI, the value of threshold increment. Threshold increment is
a measure of the loss of visibility caused by the disability
glare from a luminaire installation. The limits apply where
users of a transport system are subject to a reduction in
visibility caused by a non-transport installation, and limiting
values are for positions and viewing directions relevant to
the direction of travel for users of the transport system.
Light
Technical
Parameter
Threshold
Increment
TI
Light
Technical
Parameter Application Conditions
Building Facade Luminance (L b )
Sign Luminance (L s )
Taken as the product of the
design average illuminance and
reflectance factor divided by �.
Taken as the product of the
design average illuminance and
reflectance factor divided by
�, or for self-luminous signs the
average luminance.
Road classification (see section 4.05)
No road lighting M5 M4 / M3 M2 / M1
15 %
based on adaptation
luminance of 0.1 cd/m 2
Table 7.12 Threshold increment limits
15 %
based on adaptation
luminance of 1 cd/m 2
• L b , the luminance of a building façade. This is the
average luminance of the building façade, and may be
approximated using
E x � av
L = b �
Where E av is the average illuminance of the building
façade and � is the reflectance of the building façade.
• Ls, the luminance of a sign. This is the average luminance
of a sign and may be approximated similar to that
described above, using the average illuminance and
reflectance values for the sign.
Table 7.13 Luminance limits for building facades and signs
15 %
based on adaptation
luminance of 2 cd/m 2
Environmental Zones
15 %
based on adaptation
luminance of 5 cd/m 2
E1 E2 E3 E4
0 5 cd/m 2 10 cd/m 2 25 cd/m 2
50 cd/m 2 400 cd/m 2 800 cd/m 2 1000cd/m 2
Specific Techniques | 167

Specific Techniques
To control obtrusive light various strategies may be used
depending upon the application;
• Using floodlights that have a tightly controlled beam
allows more precise control of the light. Therefore the best
level of beam control for the application should be used.
• Using floodlights that allow the luminaire to be aimed
close to the vertical (i.e. with the face of the floodlight
nearly horizontal and pointing downwards) reduces
the impact on sky glow due to reduced upward light.
Applications which can use specialist “flat-glass”
floodlights (which are designed to be mounted with the
front face of the floodlight horizontal) should do so, as
these are ideal for controlling obtrusive light.
• A higher mounting height can allow floodlights to be
aimed closer to the vertical, and can allow floodlights with
tighter beam control to be used. This allows better control
of glare and spill light. However, the structures will be
more intrusive during daylight hours.
• Similarly the closer a column is to the area to be lit the
better the control of the lighting as this allows floodlights to
be aimed closer to the vertical and floodlights with a wide
distribution can be used with simplified shielding (such as
a visor).
• Using luminaires with lamps that have a lower lumen
output leads to a reduced mounting height, which
helps reduce spill light. However, more luminaires will
be required which may reduce the efficiency of the
installation (but consider that if the control of light is better
then more of the light is being usefully utilised within the
scheme, therefore less light overall may be required. This
is because a scheme that has less light control is over
lighting to compensate for the spill light).
Relevant publications for further reading are
CIE S 015/E:2005 Lighting of Outdoor Work Places
EN12464-2:2007 Lighting of workplaces – part 2: outdoor
work places
168 | Specific Techniques

Specific Techniques
7.9 Lighting for crime prevention
A firm body of evidence now exists to support the theory that
lighting can have a positive effect on crime prevention. With
the increasing prevalence of CCTV cameras in shops and
public spaces lighting also has an important role in aiding the
authorities in identifying suspects. These benefits however have
to be designed into a lighting installation, and it should be
accepted that improvements in lighting cannot overcome bad
design of structures or of a space. (For example the pedestrian
tunnel shown has untended shrubs, a perfect hiding place, and
an overhang ideal for a person to hide on, even before the
pedestrian has entered the blackness of the tunnel).
Lighting can be used to affect two aspects related to crime
• Actual crime. This is the act of a criminal event occurring.
Lighting can either inhibit crime, or aid in the identification
of a suspect.
• The fear of crime. This is the mental worry of a criminal act
occurring. Fear of crime tends to be more prevalent than it
used to be due to improved communications. Knowledge
of crime that occurs in a different geographical area can
induce fear of crime in a totally unrelated area, however
irrational. Lighting can be used to create a safe and
reassuring atmosphere.
It is important to understand that when considering lighting for
a space it is not always possible to understand the problems
of the space without seeing it in all conditions. Frequently the
daytime appearance is completely different to that at night.
How can lighting be used as a tool in the fight against
crime? Some general points can be made. For exterior areas,
including car parks, light fixtures and fittings should incorporate
vandal resistant features such as polycarbonate or reinforced
glass fittings with sources positioned out of reach. The effect of
lighting should not be restricted, either by internal fixtures and
furnishings or by exterior structures or landscaping.
Lighting columns/fixtures should not aid access, for example
over perimeter fencing/walls. And cables and wiring serving
lighting systems should be enclosed to restrict accidental
damage or criminal attacks.
Fig. 7.40 A forbidding entrance to a pedestrian
tunnel
Specific Techniques | 169

Specific Techniques
When lighting for crime prevention the main requirement of
lighting is to ensure a high level of visibility and modelling. It
must be understand that whilst precisely targeted increases in
lighting generally have crime reduction effects, more general
increases in lighting seem to have crime prevention effects
but this outcome is not universal. However, even untargeted
increases in lighting generally make people less fearful of crime
and more confident of their own safety.
To increase visibility and modelling requires consideration to the
illumination on the vertical or semi-cylindrical planes. Pedestrians
need to be able to see other people clearly at a maximum
distance, to be able to perceive any possible threat, either from
facial expression, posture or objects carried (such as a knife)
allowing them sufficient time to react to the threat.
When considering street lighting a change in design approach
is required. Generally street lighting is designed for maximum
efficiency, using the fewest lanterns/columns and switching
lanterns dependant on time. However, lighting should be
designed for both road users and pedestrians, either by using
lanterns that have a high level of performance in lighting both
the road and paths, or with combined lighting units (Figure
7.41), or by separate lighting units for each task. Lighting
should provide maximum quality and reduce shadows. Hence,
lower wattage lamps spaced closer together are preferable,
and lamp type should be chosen carefully to ensure a good
colour of light and colour rendering (white light has been
shown to increase peoples feelings of security, whilst a lamp
that obviously renders colour incorrectly reduces a person’s
confidence in the lighting).
If lighting units are dimmed or switched off during the night high
levels of maintenance are essential as the failure of a lighting
unit will have a larger effect if only some of the lighting units are
lit compared with the case if all the lighting units were on.
When lighting footpaths and cycle paths they should be lit in
a manner that shows the direction that the path takes. Care
should be taken where necessary to illuminate beyond the
boundaries of the path in order to increase the visual area and
provide more confidence to people using those routes. It should
170 | Specific Techniques
Fig. 7.41 Combined lighting units with high
mount lanterns and bollard height
lighting

Specific Techniques
be recognised that steps and changes in level are also part of
the path and they should not be considered as independent
areas. In urban areas it is important not to rely on lighting from
commercial premises to supplement the amenity lighting as if the
commercial lighting is switched off heavy shadows may occur.
Lighting of commercial buildings should be controlled to prevent
high levels of illumination resulting in adjacent areas appearing
gloomy or dark (as shown). For open areas such as parks or
large pedestrian spaces the lighting should give guidance on
the configuration of the space.
A specific hazard for footpaths are pedestrian tunnels. These
generally have two problems, dark inside and light outside
during the daytime, or light inside and dark outside during the
night. This has implications for visibility as the eye has to adjust
to the different conditions which takes time, especially when
passing from relatively bright light into darkness. The lighting
needs to be controllable to adjust to the different lighting
requirements (e.g. higher light levels during the day and lower
light levels at night with lighting outside the tunnel matched to
the light levels inside the tunnel). As lighting units in pedestrian
subways are generally accessible by the public they should be
vandal-resistant and maintained to a high standard.
Car parks should also be considered as pedestrian areas.
N.B.;
• Cars are generally stationary at entrance and exit points.
Therefore these areas need higher lighting levels.
• Special consideration should be given to stairwells, lift
areas and areas with payment machines.
• If possible light coloured surface treatments should be
applied to ceilings, columns and walls to maximise and
reflect the effect of the lighting system
Fig. 7.42 Façade lighting creating areas of
deep shadows
Specific Techniques | 171

Specific Techniques
When lighting for CCTV cameras additional points need
consideration. To aid in the production of a good image the
following ratios should be checked;
Ratio 1 = Upward horizontal illuminance
Downward horizontal illuminance
Ideally Ratio 1 > 0.3
Ratio 2 = Downward horizontal illuminance
Vertical illuminance towards camera
Ideally Ratio 2 < 5.0
Ratio 3 = Average luminance of subject Ideally Ratio 3 > 0.3
Average luminance of background and < 3.0
Ratio 4 = Vertical illuminance left Ideally Ratio 4 > 0.3
Vertical illuminance right and < 3.0
Ratio 5 = Vertical illuminance to the back
Vertical illuminance toward the camera
Ideally Ratio 5

Specific Techniques
7.10 Lighting and health
When producing a lighting design the ability of lighting to
provide an atmosphere by manipulating the lit effect is one of
the key skills of the designer. The feel of a space can affect
the experience of an observer within that space. Within the
Thorn PEC philosophy this is the Comfort attribute, and has
descriptors such as calm, lively, balanced, reassuring, inspiring,
welcoming, glitter, etc. This use of the lit experience whilst
possibly affecting our mood does not normally affect our health,
except under inappropriate use of lighting for a given situation.
Recent research, however, has shown that how we design
luminaires and lighting installations does have implications on
our health. Research has discovered a third receptor in our
eye, which exists along with the rods and cones that allow us
to see. This receptor does not produce a visual effect and has
an action spectrum towards the blue end of the visible light
spectrum (the yellow curve labelled NI in the diagram).
Fig. 7.44 The photic, scotopic and non-image forming receptor response curves
Fig . 6.45 The pho tic, scotop ic and non -image forming
rece ptor respon se curves
Specific Techniques | 173

Specific Techniques
The third receptor has direct implications on our feelings of
wellness and well-being. It links into the body’s hormone
mechanisms, affecting the body clock, alertness, mood
and others. This opens up the possibilities of using light and
designing lighting to modify the operation of the body, thereby
affecting a person’s physical health. Indeed this is already
used in the treatment of seasonal affective disorder (SAD) when
very high levels of blue rich light are used to help alleviate
this condition, and light has shown promise in treating sleep
disorders caused by illnesses such as Alzheimer’s disease, in
treating sufferers of delayed phase sleep disorder which is
characterised by late sleep onset and late awakening (generally
younger people) and in treating advanced phase sleep
disorder which is characterised by early sleep onset and early
awakening (generally elderly people).
174 | Specific Techniques
Vision
roads and cones
Non-vision
wellness
3rd receptor
Fig. 7.45 Effects due to the visual and non-visual pathways. The red and blue
lines indicate light signal paths through the head.
Nevertheless it is a large step from using light therapy for
treatment of specific conditions in a controlled environment to
applying this knowledge in general lighting applications to
aid health, with a consequent shift of responsibility towards
rigorous medical ethics and testing. Research shows it is quite
possible to modify the biological clock to optimise its timing
for night shift workers. It is also possible to give a burst of blue
light at suitable times during the day to enhance alertness, or
in a nursing home to increase sleep quality at night. However
research also raises questions as to possible side effects.
• Visual acuity
• Visual performance
• Emotions
• Hormones (melatonin)
• Sleep quality
• Biological clock
• Mood and depression
• Alertness

Specific Techniques
A body of knowledge indicates, for example, that during
periods of darkness the body produces hormones which
act as inhibitors to cancer. The implication of this is that by
manipulating the bodies hormone production we would also be
affecting the bodies defence against some diseases.
Equally using lighting for health in situations such as residential
care homes or nursing homes could be beneficial to the
patients, but at the expense of care staff that may be working
shift patterns at odds with their patients sleep patterns.
As well as medical factors, practical problems arise. With
respect to the shifting of the body clock for night workers the
process of shifting the body clock can take several days, which
would be inappropriate for rapidly changing shift patterns. Also
given a worker will probably travel to or from work in daylight
conditions, and daylight normally supplies a much larger
illuminance at the eye than that achieved by artificial lighting,
this would inhibit the effects of trying to reset the body clock.
However, evidence suggests that the body clock does become
adjusted without any direct intervention for those doing semipermanent
night shift work, taking a period of approximately
15 nights for adaptation.
It is necessary to understand and accept that people react
differently to a stimulus and internal research within Thorn
indicates that some people are more sensitive to blue enhanced
light than others. As an example, in blue enriched light some
workers found white paper to be a glare source, producing
headaches. Additionally there was a case of a worker
who had had eye surgery finding the blue enhanced light
uncomfortable when returning to work immediately after the
operation.
Manipulating the lit effect to produce stimulating and interesting
environments or controlling light to give dynamically changing
spaces can improve the quality of life for users of the space.
Yet, until more is known about the effects and side effects of
the non-visual effects of lighting, designing to modify biological
mechanisms should be treated with extreme caution.
Specific Techniques | 175

Specific Techniques
7.11 Sustainability
One of the worlds most pressing concerns is achieving
a sustainable environment. So what is “sustainability?
Sustainability, just like light, is essential to life and needs to be
taken seriously. It encompasses the need to conserve resources,
reduce energy demands, limit harmful emissions, reduce waste
and encourage renewable processes.
All these considerations are to protect our natural environment
and life for the future. The urgent need for action is recognised
by all and there are an increasing number of national and
international initiatives and legislations to drive for sustainable
living. A sustainable approach will ensure that the needs
of today are fulfilled without compromising the ability of
future generations to meet their needs. The ideal sustainable
arrangement is when a solution can be perpetually used,
reused or renewed with no waste. Electric lighting has a major
impact on sustainability. The key to sustainability in lighting is
ecodesign, efficient operation and planned recycling at the end
of the product life. These are fundamental considerations in the
Thorn PEC programme. Eco-design is practiced in the creation
of a lighting product, whilst operation is when the product is put
into service in lighting schemes. End of life is when the product
is no longer required or is unable to fulfil its function.
Maintain
End of life
Recycle
176 | Specific Techniques
Extraction
Refining
raw
materials
LCA
Distribute
Install
Operate
Fig. 7.47 Product life cycle analysis (LCA)
Design
Manufacture
Package
Sustainable design
Fig. 7.46

Specific Techniques
Eco-design is design of product with the entire life cycle in
mind. The life cycle covers consideration of the product from
extraction and refining of raw materials, through design,
manufacture, installation, use and maintenance to the end of
useful life, when dismantling and recycling of the materials
commences. Employing life cycle assessments will check the
environmental impact of the solution through life. It ensures that
care is taken during design to employ absolutely the minimum
amount of restricted hazardous substances and that the
minimum amount of virgin materials, water and energy are used
during manufacture.
Consider also the energy efficiency during the operation
phase and the need to dismantle the product quickly and
without waste at the end of life. Luminaires should be designed
for disassembly and dematerialisation (eg use of snap fit
connectors rather than screws) and making parts multifunctional.
All products should be marked for easy identification and
removal. The generation of electrical energy required for
lighting is a major contributor to CO emissions. For every
2
kWh of energy 0.42kg * of CO is liberated and added to
2
the “greenhouse” gases in the atmosphere, increasing global
warming. The proportion of energy demand by lighting
products can be split into three phases: creation (12%), use
(80%) and disposal (8%). The most energy consumption by the
product is clearly during operation and much of this can be
influenced by prudent design and component selection. The key
elements of this selection are lamps and control circuit including
ballast type. Today the most useful and efficacious light source
is the fluorescent lamp. It can be linear or compact and employ
poly-phosphor coatings yielding good colour and light output.
The lamp requires a ballast to operate, which can be magnetic
or electronic. Magnetic ballasts (copper and iron) have the
advantage of being lower in cost and recyclable. Electronic
ballasts, however, can operate the lamp at high frequencies, in
excess of 10 kHz thus eliminating flicker, are more efficacious,
use less energy, and are lightweight one-piece control gear that
can be dimmable and automatically controlled. Lighting controls
add much to operational efficiency. The controls maybe a
simple on/off switch or a sophisticated computer programmed
system.
* EU average
Fig. 7.49
Fig. 7.48
Specific Techniques | 177

Specific Techniques
Controls save energy use by providing electric light only where
and when needed. Controls can link up to respond to constant
illuminance, daylight availability and presence of people. With
efficient products, correct lighting scheme design and the use of
control systems substantial energy saving can be made without
jeopardising the quality of the required lighting condition.
The next obvious step is to protect the rapid depletion of raw
materials. In this process sustainable product designs must use
less material, make greater use of more recycled materials and
plan to use more recyclable materials. With such practice of
good management of resource, increased energy efficiency,
employment of new technologies and the drive for renewable
energy generation will ensure good future for light and lighting. Fig. 7.50
178 | Specific Techniques
Fig. 7.51 Recycling plant

Specific Techniques
7.12 Outdoor lighting controls (OLC)
The prevalent technology used in conventional outdoor lighting
has minimal control. Time clocks or photocells determine if a
luminaire is on or off and monitoring and reporting of luminaire
faults is dependant upon local residents or street patrols. The
lighting is therefore inflexible and the quality of maintenance
can be poor.
The use of modern outdoor lighting controls can overcome these
difficulties and supply many additional benefits. Benefits of
using lighting controls can be
• A reduction in unnecessary night-time lighting by providing
facilities to dim or turn-off luminaires based upon user
needs.
• Contributing to the reduction of traffic accidents and crime
rates by providing needs-specific lighting, for example
increasing lighting levels during busy times at road
junctions, motorway exits or areas of mixed pedestrian
and motorised traffic.
• To allow lighting to easily adapt to special occasions. For
example during a street festival lighting can be controlled
to ensure suitable light levels based on the needs of
the event (this may involve increased lighting or even a
decrease in light levels if festival lights are being used).
• Allowing energy needs to be more accurately defined and
optimised, reducing energy consumption and therefore
CO 2 emissions and also saving money.
Additional benefits in the management of the lighting equipment
may be
• Allowing the status of luminaires to be monitored and
failures to be automatically reported, so that defective
components may be replaced when they fail.
• Allowing maintenance schedules to be rationalised based
upon computer records of lamp burning hours, luminaire
cleaning schedules, etc.
Specific Techniques | 179

Specific Techniques
• Reducing travel costs through automatic reporting of faults,
removing the need for street patrols
Lighting control and monitoring are the two central abilities
of the Thorn Telea system. Telea offers the flexibility of two
communication technologies :
• A Powerline communication system uses the mains cabling
to transmit signals
• An RF communication system uses radio frequency to
transmit data.
In both cases there is no need to install new cables, and both
systems allow instant reporting of fault conditions using SMS
messages to an assigned person.
A Telea installation consists of:
• Luminaire controllers
• Comboxes
• Central Management server
180 | Specific Techniques
Network
connection,
e.g. TCP/IP
Powerline Data
Communication
Radio
Frequency Data
Communication
Powerline Data
Communication
Fig. 7.52 Components of a Telea installation

Specific Techniques
Luminaire controllers
These are installed in each individual luminaire, either inside the
lantern or within the column. The controller switches the lamp on
and off and depending on the capabilities of the ballast may
also control power reduction/dimming. The controller allows
various operating parameters to be measured (such as burning
hours, lamp faults, etc) and feeds the information back to the
Combox. It contains an astrological clock and internal memory
enables programmes to continue to operate in the event of
signal breakdown. The two types of controller (Powerline and
Radio Frequency) may be mixed on one single installation.
Repeater functionality integrated into Telea controllers make the
communication extremely reliable and adaptable to any grid
topology and also remove the need for external relays.
Combox features
A Combox consists of the following components :
• one Combox controller
• one transceiver (PL or RF)
• one 24V power supply
• three filters (PL only)
• one GSM modem
Installed at the switch cabinet, the Combox controls up to 255
luminaire controllers. It integrates all switching programmes and
feedback from the controllers and feeds information back to the
central server. It can send error messages reporting luminaire
faults to one or several designated mobile phones.
There are two types of Comboxes, used respectively for
Powerline or Radio Frequency luminaire controllers. Both types
can control up to 255 luminaire controllers. The RF Combox
does not actually need to be contained within a switch cabinet,
only requiring power to operate, but the use of a switch cabinet
is normal practice.
Maximum distances between the Combox and the first luminaire
controller, or between two controllers are approximately 200m
for Powerline and 100m for Radio Frequency installations.
Fig. 7.53 Telea Powerline luminaire controller
Fig. 7.54 Telea Combox RF SMS
Specific Techniques | 181

Specific Techniques
CME central server features
Installed in the control room this comprises a hardware and
the CME software. The CME server is optional (an installation
may run with only Comboxes and luminaire controllers) but is
necessary for central monitoring and offers an intuitive interface
for configuring and monitoring the installation.
Data transfer between the server and Comboxes is achieved
through telephone (GSM) or computer network (TCP/IP)
communication protocols. In the case of GSM communication
the data transfer is usually programmed to occur at the end of
night, so that errors that might have arisen during the night can
be visualised on the screen the following morning.
The CME server can be interfaced with existing servers within
technical limitations. For example, the Geographical Information
System (GIS) enables lighting points to be visualised on a map
and faults or maintenance data such as burning hours to be
easily recognisable using colour coding. Please contact your
Thorn representative for further information.
Upgrading existing luminaires
The Telea system can be implemented into existing as well as
new lighting installations. For example the RF switch controller
(LSRF) fits into any luminaire equipped with a NEMA socket,
adding Telea functionality to the standard photocell. In addition,
all Powerline controllers can be supplied in boxes designed
for installation in poles, enabling retrofit installation when
mechanical and temperature constraints prevent the integration
into the gear compartment.
Telea for new lighting installations
For new installations Thorn can integrate Telea luminaire
controllers into several Thorn streetlighting luminaires. This
completely in-house service guarantees the conformity of all of
the luminaires to existing standards, including Electro-Magnetic
Compliancy (EMC).
182 | Specific Techniques
Fig. 7.55 Telea CME software

8 Checklists
8.1 Life cycle analysis
When installing new lighting, or refurbishing an existing
scheme, it is important to quantify and compare the benefits
of possible alternative replacement lighting systems. These
benefits are quantified in terms of a life cycle calculation
for each lighting system, that is over the planned life of the
installation how much will each system cost. These values can
be compared and the most favourable option chosen. (Note
that the most favourable option from a financial viewpoint may
not be the best option from a lighting viewpoint. At some point
a decision will have to be made as to the relative importance
of these factors and a compromise reached).
If the chosen system is to be a replacement for an existing
installation a cost benefit of the new system compared to the
existing installation may be made by calculating the pay back
period, as shown Section 8.2.
Worksheet 8.1 aids life cycle analysis. Formulae used is this
worksheet are:
Luminaire costs = Number of luminaires x cost of one luminaire
Lamp costs = number of luminaires x number of lamps per luminaire x cost of one lamp
Installation costs = number of luminaires x installation cost per luminaire
Room cleaning costs = cost of room cleaning x service life of system (years)
room cleaning interval (years)
Luminaire cleaning costs = cost of luminaire cleaning x service life of system (years)
luminaire cleaning interval (years)
Lamp replacement costs = cost of lamp replacement x service life of system (years)
lamp replacement interval (years)
Energy costs = (number of luminaires x system power of luminaire x service life of system x annual burning hours x
energy cost per kWh x %energy savings due to controls)/1000
Operating costs = room cleaning costs + luminaire cleaning costs + lamp replacement costs + energy costs
Annual operating costs = operating costs/service life of system
(Note that the model given on the following page is a static
model in that it ignores the costs of depreciation of equipment
and interest payments).
Checklists | 183

Checklists
Building Project
Luminaire type (1)
Luminaire data
Number of lamps per luminaire (2)
System power of luminaire (W) (3)
Operating data
Service life of system (years) (4)
Annual burning hours (5)
Lamp replacement interval (years) (6)
Luminaire cleaning interval (years) (7)
Room cleaning interval (years) (8)
Number of luminaires
Lamp lumens maintenance factor (9)
Lamp survival factor (10)
Luminaire maintenance factor (11)
Room surface maintenance factor (12)
Maintenance factor [ (9)x(10)x(11)x(12) ] (13)
Number of luminaires (14)
Itemised investment costs
Cost of one luminaire (15)
Cost of one lamp (16)
Installation costs per luminaire (17)
Itemised operating costs
Cost of lamp replacement (18)
Cost of luminaire cleaning (19)
Cost of room cleaning (20)
Energy costs per KWh (21)
%Energy savings due to control system (22)
Investment costs
Luminaire costs [ (14)x(15) ] (23)
Lamp costs [ (14)x(2)x(16) ] (24)
Installation costs [ (14)x(17) ] (25)
Investment costs [ (23)+(24)+(25) ] (26)
Operating costs
Room cleaning costs [ (20)x(4) / (8) ] (27)
Luminaire cleaning costs [ (19)x(4) / (7) ] (28)
Lamp replacement costs [ (18)x(4) / (6) ] (29)
Energy costs [ (14)x(3)x(4)x(5)x(21)x(22) / 1000 ] (30)
Operating costs [ (27)+(28)+(29)+(30) ] (31)
Annual operating costs [ (31) / (4) ] (32)
Total costs over installation life [ (31)+(26) ] (33)
184 | Checklists
Option 1 Option 2
Worksheet 8.1

Checklists
8.2 Economics
When refurbishing an existing installation it is important to
be able to quantify the benefits of the new lighting system
compared with the existing system. These benefits are quantified
in terms of the payback period. This is a comparison of the
expenditure in terms of investment costs to buy and install a
new system, compared with the savings in annual operating
costs through having the new system. Thus if a payback time
is 5 years this means that after 5 years the savings from using
the new system have cancelled out the costs of buying the new
system.
Worksheet 8.2 aids in the calculation of this value. Formulae
used is this worksheet are:
Luminaire costs = Number of luminaires x cost of one luminaire
Lamp costs = number of luminaires x number of lamps per luminaire x cost of one lamp
Installation costs = number of luminaires x installation cost per luminaire
Room cleaning costs = cost of room cleaning x service life of system (years)
room cleaning interval (years)
Luminaire cleaning costs = cost of luminaire cleaning x service life of system (years)
luminaire cleaning interval (years)
Lamp replacement costs = cost of lamp replacement x service life of system (years)
lamp replacement interval (years)
Energy costs = (number of luminaires x system power of luminaire x service life of system x
annual burning hours x energy cost per kWh x %energy savings due to
controls)/1000
Operating costs = room cleaning costs + luminaire cleaning costs + lamp replacement costs + energy costs
Annual operating costs = operating costs / service life of system
Pay back period = investment cost proposed installation – investment cost existing installation
annual operating costs existing installation - annual operating costs proposed installation
(Note that the model given in Worksheet 8.2 is a static model
in that it ignores the costs of depreciation of equipment and
interest payments).
Checklists | 185

Building Project
Luminaire type (1)
Luminaire data
Number of lamps per luminaire (2)
System power of luminaire (W) (3)
Operating data
Service life of system (years) (4)
Annual burning hours (5)
Lamp replacement interval (years) (6)
Luminaire cleaning interval (years) (7)
Room cleaning interval (years) (8)
Number of luminaires
Lamp lumens maintenance factor (9)
Lamp survival factor (10)
Luminaire maintenance factor (11)
Room surface maintenance factor (12)
Maintenance factor [ (9)x(10)x(11)x(12) ] (13)
Number of luminaires (14)
Itemised investment costs
Cost of one luminaire (15)
Cost of one lamp (16)
Installation costs per luminaire (17)
Itemised operating costs
Cost of lamp replacement (18)
Cost of luminaire cleaning (19)
Cost of room cleaning (20)
Energy costs per KWh (21)
%Energy savings due to control system (22)
Investment costs
Luminaire costs [ (14)x(15) ] (23)
Lamp costs [ (14)x(2)x(16) ] (24)
Installation costs [ (14)x(17) ] (25)
Investment costs [ (23)+(24)+(25) ] (26)
Operating costs
Room cleaning costs [ (20)x(4) / (8) ] (27)
Luminaire cleaning costs [ (19)x(4) / (7) ] (28)
Lamp replacement costs [ (18)x(4) / (6) ] (29)
Energy costs [ (14)x(3)x(4)x(5)x(21)x(22) / 1000 ] (30)
Operating costs [ (27)+(28)+(29)+(30) ] (31)
Annual operating costs [ (31) / (4) ] (32)
186 | Checklists
Existing
installation
Pay back period* = (26)Proposed – (26)Existing (years)
(32)Existing – (32)Proposed
Pay back period* = – = years
–
*excludes depreciation and interest
0
0
0
0
Proposed
installation
Worksheet 8.2

Checklists
8.3 Lighting energy numeric indicator (LENI)
It is becoming increasingly important to estimate the energy
requirements of lighting in buildings and to quantify these
requirements against best practice. To help, the CEN EN
15193 document has been produced, which introduces the
Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator (LENI). The document also
provides guidance with notional limits derived from reference
standards. Note that whilst responsible use of energy is
important it must not lead to inadequate lighting schemes being
produced. Both the lighting requirements and energy usage
requirements should be fulfilled.
Some terminology used in the LENI calculation may be
unfamiliar and is, therefore, given below.
Total installed charging power for emergency lighting (P ) em
– installation input charging power, in watts, of all emergency
lighting luminaires in an area. Units: kWh/(m2 x year).
P em = � P ei
i
Where P ei is the emergency lighting charging power in watts.
Total installed control circuit parasitic power (P pc ) – installation
input power, in watts, of all control systems within luminaires in
an area when the lamps are not operating.
Units: kWh/(m 2 x year).
P pc = � P ci
i
where P is the parasitic power consumed by the controls when
ci
the lamps are off, in watts.
Total installed lighting power (P ) – installation power in watts
n
of all luminaires in an area. Units: W/m2 .
P n = � P i
i
where P is the luminaire power in watts.
i
Daylight operating hours (t ) – installation operating hours
D
when daylight is present. Units: hours.
Non-daylight operating hours (t ) – installation operating
N
hours where daylight is not present. Units: hours.
Checklists | 187

Checklists
Annual operating time (t O ) – the annual number of hours with
the lamps operating (i.e. turned on)
188 | Checklists
t o =t o +t n
where t D and t N are defined above.
Standard year time (t ) – the time taken for one standard year
y
to pass, taken as 8760 hours.
Emergency lighting charge time (t ) – the operating hours
e
during which the emergency lighting batteries are being
charged. Units: hours.
Constant illuminance factor (F ) – this is a factor relating to the
C
usage of the total installed power when constant illuminance
control is in operation in the area . When constant illuminance
control is not in operation this has the value of 1. Units: none.
Occupancy dependency factor (F ) – this is a factor relating
O
the usage of the total installed lighting power when occupancy
control is in operation in the area. When occupancy control is
not in operation this has the value of 1. Units: none
Daylight dependency factor (F ) – this is a factor relating the
D
usage of the total installed lighting power to daylight availability
in the area. When daylight control is not in operation this has
the value of 1. Units: none
The LENI formula is
W
LENI =
A
where
W is the total energy used for lighting a room or zone in kWh/
year and A is the total useful floor area of the building in m2 .
W is composed of two components
W=W +W L P
where
W is the annual lighting energy required to provide illumination
L
so that the building may be used.
W is the annual parasitic energy required to provide charging
P
energy for emergency lighting systems and standby energy for
lighting control systems.

Checklists
W L may be calculated using the formula
W L = � {(P n xF C )x[(t D xF O xF D )+(t N xF O )]}/1000
where the individual terms are defined above.
W P may be calculated using the formula
W P = � {{P PC x[t y – (t D + t N )]} + (P em xt e )}/1000
where the individual terms are defined above.
Worksheet 8.3 helps calculate the LENI value. Note that values
entered in the spreadsheet are the total values for all luminaires
in the installation. If more than one luminaire type is used the
total energy usage value (18) should be calculated for each
luminaire type and the results summed. This summed value
should then be used to calculate the LENI value.
Checklists | 189

Checklists
Building Project
Parasitic power
Total emergency charging power (P em ) (1)
Total lighting controls standby power (P pc ) (2)
Luminaire data
Total installed power (P n ) (3)
Operating hours
Daylight operating hours (t D ) (4)
Non-daylight operating hours (t N ) (5)
Standard year time (t y ) (6)
Emergency lighting charge time (t e ) (7)
Factors
Constant illuminance factor (F C ) (8)
Occupancy dependency factor (F O ) (9)
Daylight dependency factor (F D ) (10)
Parasitic energy
Lighting controls parasitic power
(2) x [ (6) - ( (4) + (5) ) ] (11)
Emergency lighting parasitic factor
(1) x (7) (12)
Total parasitic energy usage
( (11) + (12) ) / 1000 (13)
Illumination energy
Energy usage without daylight/occupancy
control (3) x (8) (14)
Daylight energy usage
(4) x (9) x (10) (15)
Non-daylight energy usage
(5) x (9) (16)
Total energy usage for illumination
{ (14) x [ (15) + (16) ] } / 1000 (17)
Total annual energy usage (13) + (17) (18)
Total useful floor area in m 2 (19)
Lighting energy numeric indicator (LENI)
(18) / (19)
190 | Checklists
Installation 1 Installation 2
8760 8760
Worksheet 8.3

Checklists
Worked example – LENI calculation
Project – Electronic device assembly plant
Location North East England
Size Length = 55m, Width = 48m, H = 6m,
Useful area = 2640m²
Roof 20% glazed to allow entry of daylight
Walls 2 sides 30% glazed to allow daylight
Interior Light colour with open plan assembly line layout
Operational hours = 4000 hrs/year (2500 daylight,
1500 no daylight)
Standard year hours = 8760 hrs/year
Lighting requirements – 500 lx on work plane, Uo > 0.7,
UGR 80,
Lighting quality class – medium (two star)
Lighting solution –
230 off Primata II 2x49W T16 lamps battens with slotted white
reflector optic and DALI controlled dimmable HF ballast linked
daylight detection and auto off control
30 off as above but with E3 emergency lighting capability
6 off 1x18W T26 Exit signs
Required data –
Circuit watts of the Primata II luminaire – 106 W
Charge power for Primata II emergency lighting circuit –
3.5 W/luminaire
Standby power for DALI ballast in the Primata II –
0.4 W/luminaire
Charge power for Exit sign luminaires – 10 W/luminaire
Estimations
P – {(3.5 x 30 x 8760) + (10 x 6 x 8760)}/(2640 x 1000)
em
= 0.55 kWh/m²/year
P – (0.4 x 260 x 8760)/(2640 x 1000) = 0.35 kWh/
pc
m²/year
P – (106 x 260)/2640 = 10.4 W/m²
n
F (constant illuminance control MF = 0.8) – 0.9
c
F (daylight link control medium daylight supply) – 0.8
d
F (presence control manual on/auto off) – 0.9
o
LENI = (0.9 x 10.4)/1000 x {(2500 x 0.8 x 0.9) + (1500
x 0.9)} + 0.55 + {0.35/8760 x (8760 – (2500 + 1500)]}
= (8.4/1000) x (1800 + 1350) + 0.55 + (0.35/8760 x
4760) = (9.36 x 3.15) + 0.55 + 0.19 = 30.22 kWh/m²/year
LENI = 30.22 kWh/m²/year
Checklists | 191

Checklists
Table 8.1 shows the parameters and results for this project in
line B. It shows that the addition of the controls will yield a 21%
reduction in the energy requirements.
Line A shows the energy requirements if daylight was not
admitted into the building and Line C show the Benchmark
values for this type of project taken from EN 15193-2007
Annex F Table F1.
Building Q P m P pc P load t D t N F c F O F D
192 | Checklists
Quality
class
Parasitic
Emergency
kWh/
(m 2 x year)
Parasitic
Control
kWh/
(m 2 x year) W h h
no constant constant
illuminance illuminance
Manual
-
Auto
-
Manual
-
Manufacture ** A 0.55 0.35 10.4 2500 1500 1 0.9 1 0.9 1 1
** B 0.55 0.35 10.4 2500 1500 1 0.9 1 0.9 1 0.8
** C 1 5 20 2500 1500 1 0.9 1 1 1 1
Building LENI LENI LENI LENI
no constant illumination constant illumination
Manual Auto Manual Auto
Gain
kWh/(m %
2 /year) kWh/(m2 /year)
Manufacture 42.3 38.2 38.2 34.4 10
Table 8.1
42.3 33.5 38.2 30.2 21
83.7 83.7 75.7 75.7 0
Auto
-

9 Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
9.1 Choosing the right lamp
Part of the expertise of the lighting designer is the ability to
find the most suitable combination of lamp and luminaire to
light a given environment. Choosing the correct lamp depends
upon what is required of the lighting. The relevant key lighting
characteristics of lamps are given below.
Luminous flux/luminous efficacy
The total amount of light generated by the lamp. The rated
luminous flux is measured under standard conditions at 25°C
in units of lumen (lm). The ratio of luminous flux to electrical
power consumption gives the luminous efficacy (lm/W). The
system luminous efficiency also includes the power consumption
of the control gear. The greater the efficacy for a given output,
the lower the electricity cost, and therefore the lower the
contribution of the power station to global warming.
Rated life
The average rated life is normally specified. This is the time by
which statistically half of a test sample of lamps are still working
(e.g. half have failed) under standardised conditions.
Light colour
The light colour relates to the correlated colour temperature
(CCT) of a white light source. This describes the colour
impression made by a light source; from relatively warm (low
colour temperature with predominant red) to cool (high colour
temperature with predominant blue).
Colour rendition
The spectral components present in light produced by a lamp
determine how well the lamp reproduces object colours. The
higher the colour rendition index (R a or CRI), or the lower the
colour rendition group number, the better the colour rendition.
Colour rendering group R a
1A 90-100
1B 80-89
2 60-79
3 40-59
4 20-39
-

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Burning position
Certain lamps only permit a restricted selection of mounting
orientations for correct operation. Manufacturers specify these
permitted burning positions for their lamps. For example for
some metal halide lamps only certain burning positions are
allowed to prevent unstable operating conditions, whilst
compact fluorescent lamps may generally be mounted in any
orientation (although luminous flux output may vary with burning
position).
Dimming capability
Incandescent, tungsten halogen, fluorescent and compact
fluorescent lamps may all be dimmed over almost any range.
The output of high-pressure sodium and mercury vapour lamps
may be varied, but in a more limited fashion and generally only
by discrete levels. Metal halide lamps are not approved for
dimming by most manufacturers due to the effect this may have
on light quality and lamp life.
Warm-up time
Many lamps need between 30 seconds and several minutes to
warm up and output their full luminous flux. These include highpressure
discharge lamps and fluorescent lamps.
Re-start time
When high-pressure discharge lamps (also known as highintensity
discharge lamps or H.I.D. lamps) are turned off they
need to cool down for several minutes before they can be
started again. This has implications in applications where after
a dip in the power supply instant re-strike is required.
Lamp power
The electrical power consumed by the lamp, as opposed to the
electrical power consumed by a system consisting of lamp and
control gear.
Luminous flux maintenance
As a lamp ages through life the peak luminous flux output by
the lamp decreases due to deterioration in the performance
of the lamp chemicals and in the physical lamp structure.
Manufacturers produce lumen maintenance curves for their
lamps showing how the luminous flux depreciates over time.
194 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
9.2 Tungsten halogen lamps
Key attributes
For mains or low-voltage operation
Longer rated life and higher luminous efficacy than
incandescent lamps
Easy to dim
Brilliant light
Low-voltage types are very small and are ideal for precise
direction of light (but do require a transformer)
Excellent colour rendition
Key application areas
Retail and domestic
Restaurants and catering
How they work
Current flows through a filament and heats it up, just as
in incandescent lamps. These lamps therefore generate a
relatively large amount of heat. The halogen cycle increases
the efficiency and extends the rated life compared with
traditional incandescent lamps. (The halogen cycle is a
chemical mechanism that causes tungsten that evaporates
from the filament during operation to be deposited back onto
the filament, thereby reducing blackening of the bulb wall.
Chemicals used in the halogen cycle also slow down the rate
of diffusion of filament material, thereby increasing the filament
life, which is the principal failure mechanism)
9.3 Fluorescent lamps
Key attributes
High to very high luminous efficacy
Good to excellent colour rendition
Long rated life
Extensive range of types
Dimmable
Key application areas
Extensively used in most application areas
How they work
An alternating electric field generates UV radiation (which is
in itself invisible to the human eye) between the two electrodes
in the discharge tube. This UV radiation is converted into
Fig 9.2 Tungsten halogen lamps
Fig 9.3 Fluorescent lamps
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 195

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
visible light in the phosphor coating on the tube wall. The
colour rendering and colour temperature attributes of the light
produced depend upon the chemical composition of the
phosphors. The lamp needs a starting aid and a current limiting
device, which may be combined in an electronic ballast. The
luminous flux is highly dependent on the ambient temperature
around the lamp.
Application notes
T16 fluorescent lamps differ from T26 versions in several
characteristics that the user should be particularly aware of.
1. Luminous flux vs. temperature curve
As with all fluorescent lamps, the luminous flux produced
by the lamp is temperature dependant. An optimum
ambient temperature exists for which the light output is a
maximum, and the light output decreases as the ambient
temperature moves away from this optimum. Both the
T16 and T26 lamps have the same basic shaped curve,
however the optimum temperature for a T16 is 35°C,
whereas the optimum temperature for a T26 lamp is
25°C. The reason for this is that the lamp cool spot for a
T16 lamp is at the end of the tube with the manufacturers
label printed on it, whereas the cool spot for a T26 lamp
is in the centre of the tube.
One effect of this differing optimum temperature is that
the rated luminous flux quoted by manufacturers is at a
standard temperature of 25°C. For the T16 lamp the
maximum value of flux lies above this value, and therefore
the luminaire light output ratio (LOR) may have levels
greater than 100%.
110
100
90
80
T16
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
T26
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
Ambient temperature ˚C
Relative luminous flux %
Fig. 9.4 Curves relating luminous flux to ambient temperature for T16 and T26
linear fluorescent lamps
196 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
2. Lamp Orientation
Owing to the two electrodes (tube ends) not being
identical in design it matters how one or more lamps
are fitted in the luminaires, In general, lamp ends should
always have the same orientation (so that the lamp labels
should be at the same lamp ends for all luminaires). In
cold environments it could be a benefit to lamp output to
have the lamp labels at opposite ends to aid heating of
the lamp cold spot.
3. Ageing/burning in
Brand new lamps stabilise during the initial aging phase.
This is the period immediately after the lamps are switched
on for the first time, when the initially encapsulated
mercury is vaporised and evenly distributed throughout
the lamp. Unstabilised lamps may differ in brightness and
light colour, and may exhibit flickering at low dimming
levels. To ensure perfect operation a period of two to four
days of operation without switching or dimming should be
allowed, particularly in installation which allow dimming.
One should also wait for proper ageing before assessing
an installation for illuminance levels and light quality.
T16 T26
Rated
Rated
Length Power luminous Length Power luminous
flux (25°C)
flux (25°C)
549mm 14W 1200lm 590mm 18W 1350lm
24W 1750lm
849mm 21W 1900lm 895mm 30W 2350lm
39W 3100lm
1149mm 28W 2600lm 1200mm 36W 3350lm
54W 4450lm
1449mm 35W 3300lm 1500mm 58W 5200lm
49W 4300lm
80W 6150lm
Table 9.2 Summary of selected lamps
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 197

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
9.4 Compact fluorescent lamps
Key attributes
Compact designs
High luminous efficacy
Excellent colour rendition
Extensive range of types
Dimmable
Key application areas
Commercial
Domestic, hotels and many exteriors
How they work
These lamps are compact versions of the linear or circular
fluorescent lamps and operate in a very similar way. The
luminous flux depends upon the burning position and ambient
temperature around the lamp.
Application notes
1. Amalgam lamps
The strong temperature dependence of the luminous flux
of traditional and compact fluorescent lamps can be
compensated by adding amalgam that helps to trap
mercury and slow its release. This helps to check the steep
drop-off of luminous flux at higher or lower temperatures
so that at least 90% of the maximum luminous flux is
achieved over a wide temperature range, typically about
+5 to +70°C. Above and below this range however, the
light level still falls off sharply. Note that amalgam lamps
are comparatively slow to run-up and should not be used
for emergency lighting of dangerous workplaces (100%
luminous flux required after 0.5 seconds). Amalgam
lamps are also unsuitable for installations with high quality
dimming requirements since lamps may not dim uniformly.
2. Lamp orientation
The luminous flux from compact fluorescent lamps is highly
dependant upon the burning position. Ensuring the lamps
are correctly inserted can therefore optimise the light output
ratio. Standard types of lamp have a cool spot in the
exposed lamp bend, so that self-heating and convection
may lead to a temperature rise here. (In amalgam lamps
the cool spot lies in the base). In compact luminaires with
198 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Fig. 9.5 Compact fluorescent lamps

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
horizontal lamp arrangement, such as downlights, it is
therefore recommended to fit the lamps with electrodes
uppermost wherever possible. Since the lamp end does
not allow consistent identification of the electrode position,
that lamp side on which adjacent tubes are not connected
should be placed uppermost – these are the two tube ends
containing the internal electrodes.
9.5 Metal halide lamps
Key attributes
High luminous efficacy
Good to excellent colour rendition
High colour stability for ceramic discharge-tube lamps
Limited dimming. Some manufacturers advise no dimming
of this lamp
Key application areas
Industrial
Spotlighting
Floodlighting
Retail areas
How they work
In metal halide lamps a highly compact electric arc is produced
in a discharge tube. The composition of the chemicals in
the tube determines the quality of light produced. An ignitor
is needed to switch on the lamp, and the current must be
controlled by a ballast. The use of ceramic discharge tubes
further improves the lamp properties.
Application notes
1. Ballasts
The manufacturers of metal halide lamps use a range
of operating principles, resulting in different electrical
operating values. Some lamps are therefore approved for
operation with both ballasts for metal halide lamps and
with ballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps. The
higher operating current then leads to higher luminous flux
levels for the same lamps, together with slightly altered
light quality. In both cases suitable ignitors are required.
Fig. 9.6 Metal halide lamps
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 199

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
2. Ignitors
An ignitor is a starting device that generates voltage pulses
to start a discharge lamp. A basic ignitor will do this until
the lamp strikes, which means that if there is a problem
with the lamp or circuit that prevents the lamp starting the
ignitor will continue to try to start the lamp until the circuit
is turned off or potentially the ballast is damaged. Modern
ignitors therefore normally incorporate anti-cycling control
that can sense the normal end-of–life mode of a lamp
and disables the ignitor. This normally happens after the
ignitor has tried to start the lamp a few times, and for
metal halide lamps this is generally after approximately 15
minutes. (For high pressure sodium lamps this will be after
approximately 5 minutes).
3. Glass covers
In general metal halide lamps require a glass cover to
protect people and property in the event of the lamp
exploding. It is the manufacturers responsibility to decide
whether to permit individual lamp types to be used in
uncovered luminaires. Suitable safety devices are installed
in the lamps for this purpose (e.g. integral safety tube,
outer protective coating). The detailed information from the
manufacturer must be observed without fail.
4. Rated life characteristics
The average rated lamp life and the reduction in luminous
flux with age can vary markedly between lamp types.
They also depend on the switching frequency and the
position of use. Detailed data from the manufacturer
should be used to determine suitable maintenance factors
for the operation of the lamp (lamp survival factor and
lamp luminous flux maintenance factor).
9.6 Sodium vapour high pressure lamps
Key attributes
High luminous efficacy and long rated life
Satisfactory to poor colour rendition
Can be dimmed in discrete steps
Colour improved sodium lamp - Good colour rendition
Warm light
200 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Fig. 9.7 Sodium vapour high pressure lamps

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Key application areas
Industrial
Street lighting
Colour improved sodium lamp - Retail areas
How they work
The discharge in the linearly extended ceramic discharge tube
is defined by sodium, so the light is yellowish and only suitable
for certain applications although colour improved versions of
the lamp do exist, An ignitor is needed to switch on the lamp
(although some lamps have a built-in ignitor and do not need
any external starting aids), and the current must be controlled
by a ballast.
Note, sodium vapour low pressure lamps generate poor quality
yellow light with extreme high efficacy. They are often used for
street lighting.
9.7 Mercury vapour lamps
Key attributes
No starter required, just a ballast
Satisfactory to poor colour rendition
Can be dimmed in discrete steps
Low efficacy
Key application areas
Industrial
Street lighting
Walkways
How they work
The almost obsolete high-pressure mercury lamp is actually
the forerunner to the modern metal halide lamp, although it
provides poorer colour rendering and efficacy. The lamps can
be started at mains voltage, and so only need a ballast to limit
the current.
Fig. 9.8 Mercury vapour lamps
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 201

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
9.8 Induction lamps
Key attributes
Rotationally symmetrical light distribution
Long rated life
Not dimmable
Key application areas
Areas where it is difficult to replace lamps
Commercial and industrial interiors
Retail
Indoor and outdoor public areas
How they work
A very high-frequency electromagnetic field is coupled into
the glass bulb using an antenna protruding into the bulb. This
field excites the mercury to produce UV radiation that is then
converted into visible light using phosphors, just as in fluorescent
lamps. The amalgam technology used in these lamps makes
their luminous flux only very slightly temperature dependant. The
lamps can only be operated with special electronic ballasts and
have a built in microwave screen. Systems have a very long
service life due to the absence of any electrodes, however the
effects of lumen depreciation should still be considered. As yet
there are no dimmable electronic ballasts available.
9.9 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
Key Attributes
Good luminous efficacy
Long service life
Low voltage
Durable
Emit very little heat
Small dimensions
Key application areas
Exterior signage, display and directional lighting
Dynamic colour effects
How they work
An LED is a small solid-state semiconductor device that emits
light when an electric current passes through it. The LED consists
of a diode chip that is encased in an epoxy, plastic, resin
202 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Fig. 9.9 Induction lamp
Fig. 9.10 LED

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
or ceramic housing. This LED housing may be in a variety of
shapes and sizes and helps determine the optical characteristics
of the LED. Generally a second optical controller is used in the
form of a lens mounted on the epoxy housing, and the overall
characteristics of the system, from the shape and size of the LED
to the configuration of the lens and distance from the diode chip
to the lens define the final optical performance of the system.
As well as the optical control of the system, designing using
LEDs requires careful control of heat removal from the package.
Whilst the ratio of light to heat produced by LEDs is much
higher than for an incandescent light source (such as a GLS
light bulb) they do still produce a significant amount of heat.
This heat must be removed from the LED using heat sinking, as
LEDs are very sensitive to the junction temperature of the internal
diode, and excess heat will shorten the life of the LED or cause
failure.
Finally to operate LEDs requires a regulated direct current
supply, usually supplied by a self-contained “driver” which
converts the AC mains electricity to the correct DC voltage. This
driver must be correctly matched to the LED it is powering as
incorrect voltage and current will at best provide poor light, and
may severely reduce the life of the LED or cause instantaneous
failure of the system. The driver must also protect the LED
system from voltage fluctuations that may cause damage. The
driver can provide a quite advanced level of control, allowing
dimming down to 0%, and with a cluster of different coloured
diodes and the use of technology such as DMX protocols linked
to a light mixing console extremely complex lighting effects may
be produced.
LEDs have reasonable electrical efficiency in terms of lumens
per watt (i.e. the power input to the driver compared with the
light produced by the LEDs) and they are improving all the time
but currently they do not compare with the high values from
discharge lamp technology.
So the LED is not a true lamp, generally being supplied as a
complete electrical and optical system, which is then embodied
into a housing.
Cathode pin
Heat
–
LED chip
Copper cladding
Fig. 9.11 Structure of an LED
+
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 203

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
The light produced by an LED is monochromatic and the
colour of the emitted light depends on the material used in the
fabrication of the LED and varies from red through orange,
yellow, green and blue. To produce white light a variety of
methods are used. The best method in terms of quality of the
spectrum of light is produced using a blue LED with a yellowish
phosphor coating, in principal similar to a fluorescent lamp.
This is termed a phosphor down conversion. The use of a
phosphor does, however, decrease the efficiency of the system.
LED packages may also be configured to produce mixed or
blended light, either through the use of three or more different
coloured LEDs (such as a mixture of red, yellow, green and
blue) or through a multicolour LED that incorporates two or
more different colour chips within the same epoxy package.
These blended systems whilst suitable for lighting within the
entertainment industry or in colour changing applications should
be used with caution in the wider lighting environment as while
they may visually produce white light the actual spectrum of
the light is still three or more monochromatic peaks of light and
therefore accuracy of colour rendering can be poor.
An additional consideration is that the process for producing
LEDs cannot accurately reproduce LEDs with identical colour
appearances, especially for white LEDs. If a random set of
LEDs was taken which were all nominally white they would
have differing appearances. To overcome this a process called
binning is used, in which the LEDs are sorted into groups of
similar colour appearance. The accuracy of the colour match
depends upon the bin size, a larger bin size will contain a
wider spread of colour appearance than a smaller bin size.
However, decreasing the bin size increases manufacturing
and LED costs. When using groups of LEDs or LED luminaires
it is essential that the LEDs come from the same bin to give a
consistent appearance.
When buying LEDs, either as a component to insert into a
fixture or as a complete luminaire the LEDs may be supplied
in various configurations, varying from individual LEDs to
clustered or linear formats. They may also be supplied with or
without a secondary lens. This gives flexibility in application,
the configuration being chosen to suit the fixture it is to be used
within.
204 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Phosphor
downconversion
Colour
mixing
RYGB white
RYGB white
RYG(B)
Phosphers
Blue or UV
LED
Fig. 9.12 White LED using phosphor coating
Mixing
optics
RYGB
LEDs
Fig. 9.13 White LED using colour blending

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
A benefit of LED technology is the relatively long life of the
systems, manufacturers quote upwards of 50,000 hours life
for LEDs, but other factors should be considered. Whilst an
LED may produce light for a long period the amount of light
produced will deteriorate over time. Therefore, and especially
in critical applications such as emergency lighting, care should
be taken to ensure that there is still sufficient light output at
end of life. This depreciation of light output is mainly due to
discoloration of the epoxy housing of the LED over time. Lumen
depreciation and LED life varies between manufacturers, and
even between colours of LEDs so manufacturers data should be
consulted.
So how is an LED luminaire used? A major advantage of LEDs
is their small size and long life. This makes them ideal for effects
lighting where hidden lights are used to create an atmosphere
in a space. Additionally, LEDs are already used extensively in
signage and signaling, and in the entertainment industry. The
use of LEDs in emergency lighting is becoming more common, Fig. 9.14 Examples of LED package
and LED luminaires are good for providing guidance and
Fig . 8.14 Examples configurations of LED packa ge
emphasis due to their small size and availability in many colours
configura tions
of light. Impressive applications of LEDs may be seen, including
domestic residences, retail and social environments, and in the
exterior lighting of buildings. Additionally as the light produced
by an LED is “cold” it has major benefits in applications such
as museums where heat produced by the lighting of an artifact
may cause significant damage to that artifact. However, a
limitation of LEDs for this type of lighting is their monochromatic
nature, except for phosphor white LEDs.
At the moment the technology is not suitably advanced to
allow extensive use in the general lighting environment or more
specialized applications such as streetlighting or floodlighting,
but with future developments this may come.
Fig. 9.15 An example of an LED system
integrated with building architecture
Fig . 8.15 An exampl e of an LED
syst em in tegra ted with buil ding
arch itecture
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 205

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
9.10 Lamp coding systems – LBS/ILCOS
ILCOS lamp code
To support the worldwide identification of compatible lamp
types the IEC has produced a generic lamp coding system
standard, called the International Lamp Coding System or
ILCOS, published in 1993 as IEC TS 61231. The system is
directly linked to the IEC standard for specific lamps. The lamp
standard has data sheets that are identified by the ILCOS code.
ILCOS offers a short code “ILCOS L” that can be expanded, in
code, to cover several features of the lamp. The standard code
“ILCOS D” gives the complete designation of the lamp. All lamp
manufacturers made a direct link between their private brand
code and the ILCOS system. The responsibility for maintaining
the ILCOS system is with the IEC lamp technical committee.
LBS lamp code system
In 1994 the Zentralverband Elektrotechnik und
Elecktronikindustrie, better known as ZVEI, the Industry
Federation in Germany, produced a lamp coding system called
Lampenbezeichnungssystem or LBS for short. The codes are
widely used by luminaire makers and clients in Europe. The
system is of simple codes and has short descriptions and is
maintained by ZVEI, but it is not supported by all lamp-makers
or by international standards.
A selection of ILCOS and equivalent LBS codes with their
meanings are given in Table 9.3.
206 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Fig. Fig 9.16 . 8.16 LED LED lighting lighting providing provi a distinctive ding a
distinctive atmosphere atmosp to here a space to a space
Fig. 9.17 An LED ground recessed luminaire

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Description
A IA General purpose incandescent lamp
R IRR Reflector lamps
QT HSG Halogen incandescent lamps
QT-DE HDG Halogen incandescent lamps, linear double-ended
QPAR HA Halogen incandescent lamps for mains voltage with reflector
QR HAG / HMG Low voltage halogen incandescent lamps with reflector
QR-CBC HRG Low voltage halogen incandescent lamp with dichroic reflector and glass cover
T16 FDH Fluorescent lamps Ø16mm
T26 FD Fluorescent lamps Ø26mm
T16-R FSC Circular fluorescent lamps Ø16mm
TC-S FSD Compact fluorescent lamps (1 tube)
TC-SEL FSDH Compact fluorescent lamps (1 tube) for electronic ballast up to 80W
TC-L FSD Compact fluorescent lamps (1 tube) up to 36W
TC-D FSQ Compact fluorescent lamps (2 tubes)
TC-DEL FSQH Compact fluorescent lamps (2 tubes) for electronic ballast
TC-T FSM Compact fluorescent lamps (3 tubes) up to 36W
TC-TEL FSMH Compact fluorescent lamps (3 tubes) for electronic ballast up to 120W
TC-DD FSS Compact fluorescent lamps (double D)
LMG-lHf FSS Induction lamps (Philips QL type)
HIT-DE MD Double ended tubular metal halide lamp
HIT-DE-CE MT Double ended tubular metal halide lamp with ceramic burner
HIT MT Single ended tubular metal halide lamp
HIE ME Single ended elliptical metal halide lamp
HIE-CE ME Single ended elliptical metal halide lamp with ceramic burner
HME QE High pressure mercury discharge lamp
HSE SE Single ended elliptical high pressure sodium lamp
HSE-I SE/I Single ended elliptical high pressure sodium lamp with internal ignitor
HST ST Single ended tubular high pressure sodium lamp
HSE-MF SE Single ended elliptical high pressure sodium lamp, increased light output
(MF = more luminous flux)
HST-MF ST Single ended tubular high pressure sodium lamp, increased light output
(MF = more luminous flux)
HSE-CRI SEM Single ended elliptical high pressure sodium lamp improved colour rendering
(Philips SON Comfort Pro type)
HST-CRI STH Single ended tubular high pressure sodium lamp improved colour rendering
(Philips SON-T Comfort Pro type)
HST STH Single ended tubular high pressure sodium lamp with high colour rendering
(e.g. Philips SDW-T, Iwasaki NHT-SDX)
HST-DE SD Double ended tubular high pressure sodium lamp
LST LS Single ended tubular low pressure sodium lamp
Table 9.3 Selection of LBS and ILCOS lamp coding systems
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 207

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Peak
intensity
cd
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Rated
life
hours
Colour
rendering
group
Colour
temp.
K
Lamp
wattage
W
Luminous
efficacy
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Type Designations Lamp
cap
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous
Fluorescent lamps
Linear fluorescent, standard - halophosphate (other colour temperatures available)
150mm T16 FD T5 (T16) G5 White,White(23),White TL 37.5 4 3500 3 5000 150 -
300mm T16 FD T5 (T16) G5 White,White(23),White TL 50 8 3500 3 5000 400 -
530mm T16 FD T5 (T16) G5 White,White(23),White TL 65.4 13 3500 3 5000 850 -
450mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Warm White,Warm 63.3 15 2950 3 9000 950 -
White(30),Warm White
TLD
1500mm T38 FD T12 (T38) G13 White 76.9/62.5 65/80 3450 3 9000 5000 -
Linear fluorescent, Tri-phosphor (other colour temperatures available, especially 6500K)
550mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FH,TL5 HE 85.7 14 2700 - 1B 20000 1200 -
4000
850mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FH,TL5 HE 90.5 21 2700 - 1B 20000 1900 -
4000
1150mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FH,TL5 HE 92.9 28 2700 - 1B 20000 2600 -
4000
1450mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FH,TL5 HE 94.3 35 2700 - 1B 20000 3300 -
4000
550mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FQ,TL5 72.9 24 2700 - 1B/1A 20000 1750 -
HO
4000
T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Lumilux FQ,TL5 HO 66.7 24 6000 1B 20000 1600 -
850mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FQ,TL5 79.5 39 2700 - 1B 20000 3100 -
HO
4000
T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Lumilux FQ,TL5 HO 73.1 39 6000 1B 20000 2850 -
1450mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FQ,TL5 87.8 49 2700 - 1B/1A 20000 4300 -
HO
4000
1150mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FQ,TL5 82.4 54 2700 - 1B/1A 20000 4450 -
HO
4000
1150mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FQ,TL5 76.9 80 2700 - 1B 20000 6150 -
HO
4000
600mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Polylux XLR 840,Lumilux 75.0 18 4000 1B 15000 1350 -
L840,Super 80/840
1050mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Polylux 830,Super 86.8 38 3000 1B 12000 3300 -
80/830
1200mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Polylux XLR 840,Lumilux 93.1 36 4000 1B 15000 3350 -
L840,Super 80/840
1500mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Polylux XLR 840,Lumilux 89.7 58 4000 1B 15000 5200 -
L840,Super 80/840
1800mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Polylux XRL 840,Lumilux 88.6 70 4000 1B 15000 6200 -
L840,Super 80/840
208 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Peak
intensity
cd
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Rated
life
hours
Colour
rendering
group
Colour
temp.
K
Lamp
wattage
W
Luminous
efficacy
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Type Designations Lamp
cap
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous
2400mm T38 FD T12 (T38) G13 Polylux 840 94.0 100 4000 1B 12000 9400 -
Linear fluorescent, Multi-phosphor (other colour temperatures available)
600mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Polylux Dlx 940,Lumilux de 55.6 18 4000 1A 12000 1000 -
Luxe 940,90 deluxe/940
1200mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Polylux Dlx 940,Lumilux de 65.3 36 4000 1A 12000 2350 -
Luxe 940,90 deluxe/940
1500mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Polylux Dlx 940,Lumilux de 64.7 58 4000 1A 12000 3750 -
Luxe 940,90 deluxe/940
Circular fluorescent lamps
T16-R FSCH T5-C 2GX13 FC,TL5C 81.8 22 2700 - 1B 16000 1800 -
(T16-R)
4000
T16-R FSCH T5-C 2GX13 FC,TL5C 82.5 40 2700 - 1B 16000 3300 -
(T16-R)
4000
T16-R FSCH T5-C 2GX13 FC,TL5C 81.8 55 3000 - 1B 16000 4500 -
(T16-R)
4000
Compact fluorescent lamps (other colour temperatures available)
TC-EL FBT - E27 Dulux EL Integral gear 57.1 7 2700 1B 10000 400 -
TC-S FSD 2L 2-pin G23 Biax S,Dulux S,PL-S/2p 50.0 5 3500 1B 10000 250 -
TC-S FSD 2L 2-pin G23 Biax S,Dulux S,PL-S/2p 57.1 7 3500 1B 10000 400 -
TC-S FSD 2L 2-pin G23 Biax S,Dulux S,PL-S/2p 66.7 9 3500 1B 10000 600 -
TC-S FSD 2L 2-pin G23 Biax S,Dulux S,PL-S/2p 81.8 11 3500 1B 10000 900 -
TC-SEL FSD 2L 4-pin 2G7 Biax S/E,Dulux S/E,PL- 66.7 9 4000 1B 10000 600 -
S/4p
TC-SEL FSD 2L 4-pin 2G7 Biax S/E,Dulux S/E,PL- 81.8 11 4000 1B 10000 900 -
S/4p
TC-L FSD 2L 4-pin 2G11 Biax L,Dulux L,PL-L 69.4 18 3500 1B 10000 1250 -
TC-L FSD 2L 4-pin 2G11 Biax L,Dulux L,PL-L 75.0 24 3500 1B 10000 1800 -
TC-L FSD 2L 4-pin 2G11 Biax L 82.4 34 3500 1B 10000 2800 -
TC-L FSD 2L 4-pin 2G11 Biax L,Dulux L,PL-L 80.6 36 3500 1B 10000 2900 -
TC-L FSDH 2L 4-pin 2G11 Biax L,Dulux L,PL-L 87.5 40 3500 1B 10000 3500 -
TC-L FSDH 2L 4-pin 2G11 Biax L,Dulux L,PL-L 88.2 55 3500 1B 10000 4850 -
TC-L FSDH 2L 4-pin 2G11 Biax HLBX,Dulux L,PL-L 75.0 80 3000 1B 12000 6000
TC-DD FSS 2D 2-pin GR8 Biax 2D,CFL Square 65.6 16 3500 1B 10000 1050 -
TC-DD FSS 2D 2-pin GR8 Biax 2D,CFL Square 73.2 28 3500 1B 10000 2050 -
TC-DDEL FSS 2D 4-pin GR10 Biax 2D/E,CFL Square 65.6 16 3500 1B 10000 1050 -
TC-DDEL FSS 2D 4-pin GR10 Biax 2D/E 64.3 21 3500 1B 10000 1350 -
TC-DDEL FSS 2D 4-pin GR10 Biax 2D/E,CFL Square 73.2 28 3500 1B 10000 2050 -
TC-DDEL FSS 2D 4-pin GR10 Biax 2D/E,CFL Square 75.0 38 3500 1B 10000 2850 -
TC-DDEL FSS 2D 4-pin GR10 Biax 2D/E 70.9 55 3500 1B 10000 3900 -
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 209

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Peak
intensity
cd
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Rated
life
hours
Colour
rendering
group
Colour
temp.
K
Lamp
wattage
W
Luminous
efficacy
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Type Designations Lamp
cap
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous
TC-D FSQ 4L 2-pin G24d-1 Biax D,Dulux D,PL-C/2p 60.0 10 3500 1B 10000 600 -
TC-DEL FSQ 4L 4-pin G24q-1 Biax D/E,Dulux D/E,PL- 60.0 10 3500 1B 12000 600 -
C/4p
TC-D FSQ 4L 2-pin G24d-1 Biax D,Dulux D,PL-C/2p 69.2 13 3500 1B 10000 900 -
TC-DEL FSQ 4L 4-pin G24q-1 Biax D/E,Dulux D/E,PL- 69.2 13 3500 1B 12000 900 -
C/4p
TC-D FSQ 4L 2-pin G24d-2 Biax D,Dulux D,PL-C/2p 66.7 18 3500 1B 10000 1200 -
TC-DEL FSQ 4L 4-pin G24q-2 Biax D/E,Dulux D/E,PL- 66.7 18 3500 1B 12000 1200 -
C/4p
TC-D FSQ 4L 2-pin G24d-3 Biax D,Dulux D,PL-C/2p 69.2 26 3500 1B 10000 1800 -
TC-DEL FSQ 4L 4-pin G24q-3 Biax D/E,Dulux D/E,PL- 69.2 26 3500 1B 12000 1800 -
C/4p
TC-F FSS Flat 4L4-pin 2G10 Dulux F 77.8 36 3500 1B 10000 2800 -
TC-T FSM 6L 2-pin GX24d-1 Biax T,Dulux T Plus 68.5 13 3500 1B 10000 890 -
TC-TEL FSM 6L 4-pin GX24q-1 Biax T/E amalgam,Dulux 68.5 13 3500 1B 12000 890 -
T/E Plus
TC-T FSM 6L 2-pin GX24d-2 Biax T,Dulux T Plus,PL-T/2p 63.9 18 3500 1B 10000 1150 -
amalgam
TC-TEL FSM 6L 4-pin GX24q-2 Biax T/E,Dulux T/E IN 63.9 18 3500 1B 12000 1150 -
amalgam
Plus,PL-T/4p
TC-T FSM 6L 2-pin GX24d-3 Biax T,Dulux T,PL-T/2p 65.8 26 3500 1B 10000 1710 -
amalgam
TC-TEL FSM 6L 4-pin GX24q-3 Biax T/E,Dulux T/E IN 65.8 26 3500 1B 12000 1710 -
amalgam
Plus,PL-T/4p
TC-TEL FSM 6L 4-pin GX24q-3 Biax T/E,Dulux T/E IN 68.8 32 3500 1B 12000 2200 -
amalgam
Plus,PL-T/4p
TC-TEL FSM 6L 4-pin GX24q-4 Dulux T/E IN Plus,PL-T/4p 76.2 42 3500 1B 10000 3200 -
amalgam
TC-TEL FSM 6L 4-pin GX24q-5 Dulux T/E IN Plus 75.4 57 3000 1B 10000 4300 -
amalgam
TC-TEL FSM 6L 4-pin GX24q-6 Dulux T/E IN Plus 74.3 70 4000 1B 10000 5200 -
amalgam
TC-TELI FSM 8L 4-pin 2G8-1 PL-H 66.7 60 3000 1B 20000 4000 -
TC-TELI FSM 8L 4-pin 2G8-1 PL-H 70.6 85 3000 1B 20000 6000 -
TC-TELI FSM 8L 4-pin 2G8-1 Dulux HO Constant,PL-H 75.0 120 3000 1B 20000 9000 -
210 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
35 3000 1B 6000+ - 30000
Metal halide discharge lamps
Reflector-ceramic
HIR 35/10° MR - GX8.5 Powerball HCI-
R111,CDM-R 111

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Peak
intensity
cd
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Rated
life
hours
Colour
rendering
group
Colour
temp.
K
Lamp
wattage
W
Luminous
efficacy
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Type Designations Lamp
cap
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous
HIR 35/24° MR - GX8.5 Powerball HCI-
35 3000 1B 6000+ - 8500
R111,CDM-R 111
HIR 35/45° MR - GX8.5 Powerball HCI-R111
35 3000 1B 6000+ - -
(40°),CDM-R 111
HI-PAR 20/10° MR - E27 CMH-PAR,Powerball HCI-
35 3000 1B 6000 - 23000
PAR,CDM-R PAR20
HI-PAR 20/30° MR - E27 CMH-PAR,Powerball HCI-
35 3000 1B 6000 - 5000
PAR,CDM-R PAR20
HI-PAR 30/10° MR - E27 CMH-PAR,Powerball HCI-
70 3000 1B 6000 - 68000
PAR,CDM-R PAR30
HI-PAR 30/40° MR - E27 CMH-PAR,Powerball HCI-
70 3000 1B 6000 - 10000
PAR,CDM-R PAR30
Double ended compact (choice of colour 3000 - 5400K)
HIT-DE MD MBI-TD RX7s Arcstream,Powerstar HQI- 78.6 70 4200 1B 6000 5500 -
TS,MH(N)-TD
HIT-DE MD MBI-TD RX7s Arcstream,Powerstar HQI- 80.0 150 4200 1B 6000 12000 -
TS,MH(N)-TD
HIT-DE MD MBI-TD Fc2 Arcstream,Powerstar HQI- 80.0 250 4000 1B 6000 20000 -
TS,MHN-TD
HIT-DE MD - Fc2 Powerstar HQI-TS/D 80.0 250 5100 1A 6000 20000 -
HIT-DE MD MBI-TD Fc2 Powerstar HQI-TS 90.0 400 5400 1A 15000 36000 -
Double ended compact - ceramic (choice of colour 3000 - 4200K)
HIT-DE-CE MD MBI-TD RX7s CMH-TD,Powerball HCI- 100.0 70 3000 1B 15000 7000 -
TS,Mastercolour CDM-TD
HIT-DE-CE MD MBI-TD RX7s CMH-TD,Powerball HCI- 96.7 150 3000 1B 15000 14500 -
TS,Mastercolour CDM-TD
Single ended compact (choice of colour 2600 - 4200K)
HIT MT MBI-T G12 Arcstream,Powerstar HQI-T 74.3 70 4200 1B 6000 5200 -
HIT MT MBI-T G12 Arcstream,Powerstar HQI-T 80.0 150 4200 1B 6000 12000 -
HIT MT MBI-T GY9.5 MSD 67.5 200 5900 1B 2000 13500 -
HIT MT - PGZ 12 CosmoWhite 114.2 60 2800 2 12000 6850 -
HIT MT - PGZ 12 CosmoWhite 117.9 140 2800 2 12000 16500 -
Single ended compact - ceramic
HIT-TC-CE MT - G8.5 CMH-TC,Powerball HCI-TC 85.0 20 3000 1B 9000 1700 -
HIT-TC-CE MT MBI-T G8.5 CMH-TC,Powerball HCI- 97.1 35 3000 1B 10000 3400 -
TC,Mastercolour CDM-TC
HIT-TC-CE MT MBI-T G8.5 CMH-TC,Powerball HCI- 88.6 70 3000 1B 9000 6200 -
TC,Mastercolour CDM-TC
HIT-TC-CE MT - PGJ5 Mastercolour CDM-TM 75.0 20 3000 1B 9000 1500 -
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 211

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Peak
intensity
cd
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Rated
life
hours
Colour
rendering
group
Colour
temp.
K
Lamp
wattage
W
Luminous
efficacy
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Type Designations Lamp
cap
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous
HIT-CE MT - PG12-2 Mastercolour CDM-TP 85.7 70 3000 1B - 6000 -
HIT-CE MT - PGX12-2 Mastercolour CDM-TP 86.7 150 3000 1B - 13000 -
HIT-CE MT MBI-T G12 CMH-T,Powerball HCI- 97.1 35 3000 1B 10000 3400 -
T,Mastercolour CDM-T
HIT-CE MT MBI-T G12 CMH-T,Powerball HCI- 91.4 70 3000 1B 15000 6400 -
T,Mastercolour CDM-T
HIT-CE MT MBI-T G12 CMH-T,Powerball HCI- 93.3 150 3000 1B 12000 14000 -
T,Mastercolour CDM-T
HIT-CE MT - G12 Powerball HCI-T,CDM- 86.0 150 4200 1A 9000 12900 -
SA/T
HIT-CE MT - G12 Mastercolour CDM-T 92.0 250 3000 1B 9000 23000
Elliptical coated (ceramic versions also available)
HIE ME MBIF E27 Powerstar HQI-E 70.0 70 3800 1B 9000 4900 -
HIE ME MBIF E27 Arcstream 85.0 100 3200 2 15000 8500 -
HIE ME MBIF E40 Arcstream 78.0 250 4000 2 12000 19500 -
HIE ME - E40 Powerstar HQI-E 76.0 250 5200 1A 19000 -
HIE ME HIE E40 WhiteLux 82.0 250 3700 2 10000 20500 -
HIE ME MBIF E40 Kolorarc 80.0 400 4000 2 14000 32000 -
HIE ME - E40 Powerstar HQI-E 107.5 400 3800 2 43000 -
HIE ME HIE E40 Whitelux 90.0 400 3700 2 20000 36000 -
HIE ME HIE E40 Powerstar HQI-E 110.0 1000 3750 2B 12000 110000 -
Elliptical coated - for enclosed fittings only
HIE ME HIE E40 Whitelux 87.2 250 3700 2 15000 21800 -
HIE ME HIE E40 Whitelux 97.0 400 3700 2 20000 38800 -
Tubular clear (other colour temperatures available)
HIT MT MBI-T E27 Color Arc MT-SDW 71.4 70 4500 1A 6000 5000 -
HIT MT MBI-T E40 Arcstream 84.0 250 4200 2 6000 21000 -
HIT MT - E40 Arcstream,Powerstar 80.0 250 5300 1A - 20000 -
HQI-T/D
HIT MT - E40 HSI/TSX 84.0 250 4000 2 - 21000 -
HIT MT MBI-T E40 Arcstream,Powerstar HQI-T 87.5 400 4200 2 6000 35000 -
HIT MT MBI-T E40 HPI-T+ 76.0 250 4500 2 - 19000 -
HIT MT MBI-T E40 HPI-T+ 87.5 400 4300 2 - 35000 -
HIT MT - E40 Powerstar HQI-T/N 105.0 400 3700 2B - 42000 -
HIT MT - E40 Powerstar HQI-T/N 80.0 400 5200 1A - 32000 -
HIT MT MBI-T E40 HPI-T 85.0 1000 4500 2 - 85000 -
HIT MT MBI-T E40 Powerstar HQI-T 80.0 1000 6000 1A 9000 80000 -
HIT MT - E40 Powerstar T 90.0 2000 6000 1A - 180000 -
212 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Peak
intensity
cd
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Rated
life
hours
Colour
rendering
group
Colour
temp.
K
Lamp
wattage
W
Luminous
efficacy
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Type Designations Lamp
cap
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous
HIT MT - E40 Powerstar T/N 120.0 2000 4000 2B - 240000 -
Tubular clear - ceramic
HIT-CE MT - E27 CMH-TT,Powerball HCI- 91.4 70 3000 1B 12000 6400 -
TT,CDO-TT
HIT-CE MT - E40 CMH-TT,Powerball HCI- 93.3 150 3000 1B 120 14000 -
TT,CDO-TT
Double ended - high wattage
HIT-DE MD - Cable MHN-LA 90.0 1000 5600 1A - 90000 -
HIT-DE MD - Cable MHN-LA 100.0 1000 4200 1B - 100000 -
HIT-DE MN MBIL RX7s Sportlight 80.0 1500 5200 2 6000 120000 -
HIT-DE MN MBIL Cable Sportlight 100.0 2000 5200 2 6000 200000 -
HIT-DE MD MBIL Cable MHN-LA 95.0 2000 5600 1A - 190000 -
HIT-DE MD MBIL Cable MHN-LA 110.0 2000 4200 1B - 220000 -
HIT-DE MD MBIL Cable Powerstar HQI-TS/D/S 100.0 2000 5800 1A 4000 200000 -
HIT-DE MD MBIL Cable Powerstar HQI-TS 112.5 2000 4400 2B 8000 225000 -
HIT-DE MD MBIL Cable MHN-SB 100.0 2000 5600 1B - 200000 -
HIT-DE MD MBIL Cable Sylvania HSI-TD 100.0 2000 5600 1A 3000 200000 -
Compact metal halide lamps
HIR 6° MR CSI G38 CSI/PAR 64 76.0 1000 4000 2 3500 76000 -
High pressure mercury discharge lamps (colour temperatures vary)
HME QE/R MBF E27 Kolorlux
36.0 50 4000 3 12000 1800 -
Standard,HQL,HPL-N
HME QE/R MBF E27 Kolorlux
47.5 80 4000 3 16000 3800 -
Standard,HQL,HPL-N
HME QE/R MBF E27 Kolorlux
50.4 125 4000 3 20000 6300 -
Standard,HQL,HPL-N
HME QE/R MBF E40 Kolorlux
52.0 250 4000 3 20000 13000 -
Standard,HQL,HPL-N
HME QE/R MBF E40 Kolorlux
56.3 400 4000 3 20000 22500 -
Standard,HQL,HPL-N
HME QE/R MBF E40 Kolorlux Standard,HQI- 57.0 1000 3550 3 29000 57000 -
E,HPL-N
HME QE/R MBFSD E27 Kolorlux Deluxe,HQL DE 40.0 50 3500 3 16000 2000 -
LUXE,HPL Comfort
HME QE/R MBFSD E27 Kolorlux Deluxe,HQL DE 50.0 80 3400 3 16000 4000 -
LUXE,HPL Comfort
HME QE/R MBFSD E27 Kolorlux Deluxe,HQL DE 52.0 125 3350 3 20000 6500 -
LUXE,HPL Comfort
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 213

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Peak
intensity
cd
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Rated
life
hours
Colour
rendering
group
Colour
temp.
K
Lamp
wattage
W
Luminous
efficacy
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Type Designations Lamp
cap
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous
56.0 250 3350 3 24000 14000 -
60.0 400 3400 3 24000 24000 -
HME QE/R MBFSD E40 Kolorlux Deluxe,HQL DE
LUXE,HPL Comfort
HME QE/R MBFSD E40 Kolorlux Deluxe,HQL DE
LUXE,HPL Comfort
High pressure sodium discharge lamps
Standard Tubular and Elliptical
214 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
HSE SE HPS-E E27 Lucalox E,Vialox NAV- 66.0 50 2000 4 28500 3300 -
E,50SON-E
HSE-I SE HPS-E-I E27 Lucalox I,NAV-E
68.0 50 2000 4 12000 3400 -
50/1,50SON-I
HSE SE HPS-E E27 Lucalox E,Vialox NAV- 82.9 70 2000 4 28500 5800 -
E,70SON-E
HSE-I Diffuse SE HPS-E-I E27 Lucalox I,NAV-E
82.9 70 2000 4 12000 5800 -
Diffuse
70/1,70SON-I
HSE-I Clear SC HPS-E-I E27 Lucalox I,70SON-I 85.7 70 2000 4 12000 6000 -
Clear
HST ST HPS-T E27 Lucalox T 68.0 50 2000 4 28500 3400 -
HST ST HPS-T E27 Lucalox T,Vialox NAV- 85.7 70 2000 4 28500 6000 -
T,70SON-T
HSE SE HPS-E E40 Lucalox E 92.0 100 2000 4 28500 9200 -
HST ST HPS-T E40 Lucalox T 96.0 100 2000 4 28500 9600 -
HSE SE HPS-E E27 Lucalox E-Z,Vialox NAV-E 80.0 110 2000 4 16000 8800 -
HSE SE HPS-E E40 Lucalox E,Vialox NAV- 96.7 150 2000 4 28500 14500 -
E,150SON
HST ST HPS-T E40 Lucalox T,Vialox NAV- 100.0 150 2000 4 28500 15000 -
T,150SON-T
HSE SE HPS-E E40 Lucalox E,Vialox NAV- 104.0 250 2000 4 28500 26000 -
E,250SON
HST ST HPS-T E40 Lucalox T,Vialox NAV- 110.0 250 2000 4 28500 27500 -
T,250SON-T
HSE SE HPS-E E40 Lucalox E,Vialox NAV- 118.8 400 2000 4 28500 47500 -
E,400SON
HST ST HPS-T E40 Lucalox T,Vialox NAV- 125.0 400 2000 4 28500 50000 -
T,400SON-T
HST ST HPS-T E40 Lucalox T,Vialox NAV- 150.0 600 2000 4 24000 90000 -
T,600SON-T
HST ST HPS-T E40 Lucalox T,Vialox NAV- 130.0 1000 2000 4 24000 130000 -
T,1000SON-T

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Peak
intensity
cd
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Rated
life
hours
Colour
rendering
group
Colour
temp.
K
Lamp
wattage
W
Luminous
efficacy
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Type Designations Lamp
cap
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous
80.0 50 2000 4 28500 4000 -
92.9 70 2000 4 28500 6500 -
100.0 100 2000 4 28500 10000 -
116.7 150 2000 4 28500 17500 -
132.0 250 2000 4 28500 33000 -
141.3 400 2000 4 28500 56500 -
150.0 600 2000 4 28500 90000 -
80.0 150 2200 2 14000 12000 -
Increased light output - Tubular
HST-MF ST HPS-T(HO) E27 Lucalox HO,Vialox NAV
Super,SON-T PLUS
HST-MF ST HPS-T(HO) E27 Lucalox HO,Vialox NAV
Super,SON-T PLUS
HST-MF ST HPS-T(HO) E40 Lucalox HO,Vialox NAV
Super,SON-T PLUS
HST-MF ST HPS-T(HO) E40 Lucalox HO,Vialox NAV
Super,SON-T PLUS
HST-MF ST HPS-T(HO) E40 Lucalox HO,Vialox NAV
Super,SON-T PLUS
HST-MF ST HPS-T(HO) E40 Lucalox HO,Vialox NAV
Super,SON-T PLUS
HST-MF ST HPS-T(HO) E40 Lucalox HO,Vialox NAV
Super,SON-T PLUS
Improved colour rendering - Tubular and Elliptical
HSE-CRI SE HPS-E(DL) E40 Lucalox Classique,Vialox
NAV Deluxe, SON
Comfort
HST-CRI ST HPS-T(DL) E40 Lucalox Classique,Vialox
NAV Deluxe, SON
Comfort
HSE-CRI SE HPS-E(DL) E40 Lucalox Classique,Vialox
NAV Deluxe, SON
Comfort
HST-CRI ST HPS-T(DL) E40 Lucalox Classique,Vialox
NAV Deluxe, SON
Comfort
HSE-CRI SE HPS-E(DL) E40 Lucalox Classique,Vialox
NAV Deluxe, SON
Comfort
HST-CRI ST HPS-T(DL) E40 Lucalox Classique,Vialox
NAV Deluxe, SON
Comfort
86.7 150 2200 2 14000 13000 -
88.0 250 2200 2 14000 22000 -
92.0 250 2200 2 14000 23000 -
90.0 400 2200 2 14000 36000 -
92.5 400 2200 2 14000 37000 -
PG12-I SDW-T 37.1 35 2500 1B 10000 1300 -
“White” SON and Mini “White” SON
HST-CRI STH HPS-
T(White)
PG12-I SDW-T 46.0 50 2500 1B 10000 2300 -
HST-CRI STH HPS-
T(White)
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 215

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Peak
intensity
cd
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Rated
life
hours
Colour
rendering
group
Colour
temp.
K
Lamp
wattage
W
Luminous
efficacy
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Type Designations Lamp
cap
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous
HST-CRI STH HPS- PG12-I SDW-T 50.0 100 2550 1B 10000 5000
T(White)
HST-CRI STH HPS- GX12 SDW-TG 46.0 50 2500 1B 10000 2300
T(White)
HST-CRI STH HPS- GX12 SDW-TG 48.0 100 2500 1B 10000 4800 -
T(White)
HST-CRI STH HPS- E27 NHT-SDX 50.0 70 2500 1B 6000 3500 -
T(White)
HST-CRI STH HPS- E27 NHT-SDX 50.0 100 2500 1B 6000 5000 -
T(White)
HST-CRI STH HPS- E40 NHT-SDX 52.0 150 2500 1B 9000 7800 -
T(White)
HST-CRI STH HPS- E40 NHT-SDX 54.0 250 2500 1B 9000 13500 -
T(White)
Double ended
HST-DE SD HPS- RX7s Vialox NAV-Super 91.4 70 1900 4 30000 6400 -
DE(HO)
HST-DE SD HPS- RX7s-24 Vialox NAV-Super 96.0 150 1900 4 30000 14400 -
DE(HO)
HST-DE SD HPS-DE Fc2 Vialox NAV-TS 102.0 250 2100 4 26000 25500 -
HST-DE SD HPS-DE Fc2 Vialox NAV-TS 120.0 400 2100 4 26000 48000 -
Low pressure sodium discharge lamps
LST LS SOX BY22d SOX 131.4 35 1800 - 16000 4600 -
LST LS SOX BY22d SOX 139.1 55 1800 - 16000 7650 -
LST LS SOX BY22d SOX 141.7 90 1800 - 16000 12750 -
LST LS SOX BY22d SOX 163.0 135 1800 - 16000 22000 -
LST-HY LSE SOX-E BY22d SOX-E 156.2 26 1800 - 16000 4060 -
LST-HY LSE SOX-E BY22d SOX-E 177.8 36 1800 - 16000 6400 -
LST-HY LSE SOX-E BY22d SOX-E 163.6 66 1800 - 16000 10800 -
Halogen lamps
Halogen reflector - dichroic mirror (12V supply)
QR-
HRG M265 GU4 Precise MR11,Decostar
35 2900 1A 3500 - 6300
CBC35/10°
35S,Standardline
QR-
HRG M266 GU4 Precise MR11 35 2900 1A 3500 - 2070
CBC35/21°
QR-
HRG M270 GU5.3 Bright MR16,Decostar 5l
35 3100 1A 4000 2950
CBC51/18°
(24°),Standardline (24°)
QR-CBC51/8° HRG M249 GU5.3 Bright MR16,Decostar 5l
50 3100 1A 4000 8000
(10°),Standardline (10°)
216 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Peak
intensity
cd
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Rated
life
hours
Colour
rendering
group
Colour
temp.
K
Lamp
wattage
W
Luminous
efficacy
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Type Designations Lamp
cap
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous
QR-
HRG M250 GU5.3 Bright MR16,Decostar
50 3000 1A 4000 - 4750
CBC51/18°
51 (24°),
QR-
HRG M258 GU5.3 Bright MR16,Decostar 51
50 3000 1A 4000 - 2100
CBC51/36°
(38°),Standardline
QR-
HRG M280 GU5.3 Bright MR16,Decostar
50 3100 1A 4000 950
CBC51/60°
5l,Standardline
QR-
HRG M271 GU5.3 Decostar 51,Standardline 35 3100 1A 4000 - 7200
CBC51/10°
QR-
HRG M281 GU5.3 Bright MR16,Decostar 51
35 3000 1A 4000 - 1300
CBC51/36°
(38°),Standardline
Halogen reflector - aluminised (12V supply)
QR-51/38° HAG M58A GU5.3 Decostar ALU 50 2950 1A 3000 - 1600
QR-C51/24° HAG Black GU5.3 50 3000 1A 3500 - 3000
QR-C51/24° HAG Silver GU5.3 50 3000 1A 3500 - 3000
Halogen metal reflector - aluminium (12V supply)
QR70/8° HMG - BA15d Halospot 70 50 3000 1A 3000 - 12500
QR70/24° HMG - BA15d Halospot 70 50 3000 1A 3000 - 2600
QR111/4° HMG - G53 Halospot 111 35 3000 1A 3000 - 45000
QR111/24° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot 111 35 3000 1A 3000 - 2500
QR111/8° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot
50 3000 1A 3000 - 20000
111,ALUline PRO-111
QR111/24° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot
50 3000 1A 3000 - 3500
111,ALUline PRO-111
QR111/8° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot
75 3000 1A 3000 - 30000
111,ALUline PRO-111
QR111/24° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot
75 3000 1A 3000 - 5300
111,ALUline PRO-111
QR111/45° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot
75 3000 1A 3000 - 1700
111,ALUline PRO-111
QR111/8° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot 111 100 3000 1A 3000 - 48000
QR111/24° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot
100 3000 1A 3000 - 8500
111,ALUline PRO-111
QR111/45° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot
100 3000 1A 3000 - 2800
111,ALUline PRO-111
Halogen capsule (12V supply). Low pressure for use with open luminaires
QT-LP 12-ax HSG - G4 Halostar,Capsuleline Pro 15.0 20 3000 1A 2000 300 -
frosted
QT-LP 12-ax HSG - G4 Q20T2, Halostar, 16.0 20 3000 1A 2000 320 -
Capsuleline Pro
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 217

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Peak
intensity
cd
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Rated
life
hours
Colour
rendering
group
Colour
temp.
K
Lamp
wattage
W
Luminous
efficacy
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Type Designations Lamp
cap
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous
QT-LP 12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Q20T3, Halostar, 15.0 20 3000 1A 2000 300 -
Capsuleline Pro
QT-LP12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Capsuleline Pro 17.0 20 3000 1A 2000 340 -
frosted
QT-LP12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Halostar,Capsuleline Pro 18.0 35 3000 1A 2000 630 -
frosted
QT-LP12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Q20T3, Halostar, 17.1 35 3000 1A 2000 600 -
Capsuleline Pro
QT-LP12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Capsuleline Pro 19.5 50 3000 1A 2000 975 -
frosted
QT-LP12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Q50T3,Halostar,
19.0 50 3000 1A 2000 950 -
Capsuleline Pro
QT-LP12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Q75T3,Halostar,
18.0 75 3000 1A 2000 1350 -
Capsuleline Pro
QT-LP12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Halostar 20.0 90 3000 1A 4000 1800 -
QT-LP12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Capsuleline Pro 22.0 100 3000 1A 2000 2200 -
Halogen capsule (12V supply) for use with closed luminaires
QT 12-ax HSG M75 GY6.35 M75 17.1 35 3000 1A 4000 600 -
QT 12-tr HSG M32 GY6.35 M32,Halostar 17.0 50 3000 1A 3000 850 -
QT 12-ax HSG M74 GY6.35 M74 18.0 50 3000 1A 4000 900 -
QT 12-ax HSG M73 GY6.35 M73 18.0 75 3000 1A 4000 1350 -
QT 12-tr HSG M28 GY6.35 M28 22.0 100 3000 1A 2000 2200 -
QT 12-ax HSG M180 GY6.35 M180 21.5 100 3000 1A 4000 2150 -
Halogen capsule (24V supply) for use with closed luminaires)
QT 16-ax HSG - GY6.35 Halostar 21.3 150 3000 1A 2000 3200 -
Halogen aluminised reflector (PAR)
QPAR16/25° HARI - GU10 Hi-Spot 80 35 2900 1A 2000 - 800
QPAR16/25° HARI - GU10 MR16, Hi-Spot
50 2800 1A 2000 - 1250
50,TWISTline Alu
QPAR16/50° HARI - GU10 MR16,Hi-Spot
50 2800 1A 2000 - 600
50,TWISTline Alu
QPAR20/10° HAPAR - E27 50PAR20,Halopar 20,Hi-
50 2900 1A 2000 - 3000
Spot 63,Halogen A
QPAR20/25° HAPAR - E27 50PAR20,Halopar 20
50 2900 1A 2000 - 1000
(30°),Halogen A
QPAR20/25° HAPAR - GU10 Hi-Spot ES63 75 2700 1A 2500 - 2500
QPAR20/50° HAPAR - GU10 Hi-Spot ES63 75 2700 1A 2500 - 1000
QPAR25/10° HAPAR - E27 Hi-Spot 80 50 2900 1A 2000 - 4000
QPAR25/25° HAPAR - E27 Hi-Spot 80 50 2900 1A 2000 - 1100
218 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Peak
intensity
cd
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Rated
life
hours
Colour
rendering
group
Colour
temp.
K
Lamp
wattage
W
Luminous
efficacy
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Type Designations Lamp
cap
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous
QPAR25/10° HAPAR - E27 Hi-Spot 80 75 2900 1A 2000 - 5500
QPAR25/25° HAPAR - E27 75PAR25, Hi-Spot
75 2900 1A 3000 - 1300
80,Halogen A
QPAR30/10° HAPAR - E27 75PAR30,Halopar 30,Hi-
75 2900 1A 3000 - 6900
Spot 95
QPAR30/30° HAPAR - E27 75PAR30,Halopar 30,Hi-
75 2900 1A 3000 - 2200
Spot 95
QPAR30S/10° HAPAR - E27 Halogen A 75 2900 1A 3000 - 6500
QPAR30S/30° HAPAR - E27 Halogen A 75 2900 1A 3000 - 2000
QPAR30/10° HAPAR - E27 100PAR30, Hi-Spot 95 100 2900 1A 3000 - 10000
QPAR30/30° HAPAR - E27 100PAR30, Hi-Spot 95 100 2900 1A 3000 - 3500
QPAR30S/10° HAPAR - E27 Halogen A 100 2900 1A 3000 - 9000
QPAR30S/30° HAPAR - E27 Halogen A 100 2900 1A 3000 - 3000
Halogen dichroic reflector (PAR)
QPAR- HR - GZ10 Hi-Spot ESD50,TWISTline
50 2700 1A 2500 - 1250
CB16/25°
Dich
QPAR- HR - GZ10 Hi-Spot ESD50,TWISTline
50 2700 1A 2500 - 500
CB16/50°
Dich
QPAR- HRG1 - GZ10 Hi-Spot ESD63 75 2850 1A 2500 - 2500
CB20/25°
QPAR- HRG1 - GZ10 Hi-Spot ESD63 75 2850 1A 2500 - 1000
CB20/50°
Double ended halogen
QT-DE 12 HDG K9 R7s K9,Haloline,Plusline 16.0 300 2900 1A 2000 4800 -
QT-DE 12 HDG K1 R7s K1,Haloline,Plusline 19.0 500 3000 1A 2000 9500 -
QT-DE 12 HDG K4 R7s K4,Haloline,Plusline 22.0 1000 3000 1A 2000 22000 -
QT-DE 12 HDG K5 R7s K5,Haloline,Plusline 22.0 1500 3000 1A 2000 33000 -
Single ended halogen
QT-14 HS - G9 Halopin,MV Capsules 10.2 25 2900 1A 1500 255 -
QT-14 HS - G9 Halopin,MV Capsules 12.3 40 2900 1A 1500 490 -
QT-32 HSGT - E27 Halolux Ceram 13.7/15 60/100 2900 1A 2000 820/1500 -
QT-32 HSGT - E27 Halolux Ceram 5.5/16.8 150/250 2900 1A 2000 2500\ -
4200
QT-18 HSGT - B15d Halolux Ceram 16.7 150 2900 1A 2000 2500 -
QT HSGT M38 GY9.5 M38 17.3 300 2950 1A 2000 5200 -
QT HSGT M40 GY9.5 M40 20.0 500 2950 1A 2000 10000 -
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 219

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Peak
intensity
cd
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Rated
life
hours
Colour
rendering
group
Colour
temp.
K
Lamp
wattage
W
Luminous
efficacy
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Type Designations Lamp
cap
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous
Incandescent lamps
A IA GLS E27 GLS 11.7/15 60/100 2700 1A 1000 700/1500 -
Spot (mains supply, except where stated)
PAR IPAR PAR38/15° E27 PAR38,Concentra Par38 120 2700 1A 2000 - 7000
PAR IPAR PAR38/30° E27 PAR38,Concentra Par38 120 2700 1A 2000 - 3000
PAR IPAR 12V/ GX16 PAR56 300 2700 1A - - 16000
PAR56/40° terminal
220 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
1B 60000 3500 -
1B 60000 6000 -
Induction lamps (185-255V supply)
LMG-Ihf FSG1 QL - QL 63.6 55 3
Choices
LMG-lhf FSG1 QL - QL 70.6 85 3
Choices
NOTE. Values given in this table are generic and are indicative of performance for a given type of lamp. For definitive values you should refer
to lamp manufacturers data.
Table 9.4 Characteristic values of the major
lamps

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
9.12 Energy efficiency considerations
Most of the electrical power consumed by a luminaire is due to
the lamp and its control gear. However this power consumption
may be modified slightly by the operating conditions inside
the luminaire (i.e. thermal conditions altering the operation of
the lamp/ballast system). Additionally minor luminaire losses
may occur due to parasitic losses from electronic control or
emergency lighting capabilities of the luminaire.
The energy efficiency index (EEI) classifies fluorescent lamp
ballasts into seven categories as shown in Table 8.6 and is
used by the industry in ballast labelling.
Class Ballasts
A1 Dimmable electronic ballasts
A2 Reduced-loss electronic ballasts
A3 Electronic ballasts
B1 Magnetic ballasts, very low loss (low loss ballast)
B2 Magnetic ballasts, low loss (low loss ballast)
C Magnetic ballasts, moderate loss (conventional ballast)
Prohibited from sale since 21st November 2005
D Magnetic ballasts, very high loss (conventional ballast)
Prohibited from sale since 21st May 2002
Table 9.5 Fluorescent lamp ballast classifications
9.13 Circuits
The circuits shown in this section are generic, in that they are
not specific to any manufacturer or make of control gear but
serve to illustrate the principles. They are split into fluorescent
and sodium/metal halide lamp circuits as these have distinct
wiring and control techniques.
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 221

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Definitions
Ballast
The general term for control gear inserted between the mains
supply and one or more discharge lamps or fluorescent lamps,
which by means of inductance, capacitance or resistance,
singly or in combination, serves mainly to limit the current to the
lamp(s) to the required value. A ballast may also incorporate
means of:
Transforming the supply voltage,
Providing a starting voltage,
Providing a pre-heating current,
Improving cold starting,
Reducing stroboscopic effects,
Correcting power factor,
Suppressing radio interference.
Ignitor
A starting device, intended to generate voltage pulses to start
discharge lamps, which does not provide for the pre-heating
of electrodes. A basic ignitor will do this until the lamp strikes,
which means that if there is a problem with the lamp or circuit
that prevents the lamp starting the ignitor will continue to try
to start the lamp until the circuit is turned off or potentially
the ballast is damaged. Modern ignitors therefore normally
incorporate anti-cycling control that can sense the normal endof–life
mode of a lamp and disables the ignitor. This normally
happens after the ignitor has tried to start the lamp a few times,
and for metal halide lamps this is generally after approximately
15 minutes. (For high pressure sodium lamps this will be after
approximately five minutes)
222 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Starter switch
A device which initiates a surge of high voltage across the
lamp.
Sodium/metal halide lamp circuits
Ph
E
Ballast
A series ignitor circuit. Here the lamp is wired across the ignitor
and the neutral. This type of circuit is common when using highpressure
sodium and metal halide lamps.
Ph
E
Power factor
capacitor
Power factor
capacitor
Ballast
A parallel ignitor circuit. Here the lamp is wired across the
ballast and the neutral in parallel with the ignitor. This type of
circuit is common when using low-pressure sodium lamps.
Ignitor
Fig. 9.18 Series ignitor circuit
Ignitor
Fig. 9.19 Parallel ignitor circuit
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 223

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Fluorescent lamp circuits
Ph
E
A circuit typical of magnetic ballast, incorporating a power
factor correction capacitor and a starter. The circuit is essentially
a series circuit, from the input phase through the ballast, through
one end of the lamp, through the starter, through the second
end of the lamp and out to neutral.
Ph
N
Power factor
capacitor
A circuit typical of electronic control gear. Here no power
factor capacitor or starter is required as this is dealt with by the
electronics. Wiring is according to the connector designations
on the ballast with the lamp being wired across the ballast.
Additional control lines may be used for ballasts incorporating
dimming functionality.
224 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Ballast
Lamp
Lamp
Starter
Ballast
Fig. 9.20 Typical magnetic ballast circuit
Fig. 9.21 Electronic circuit

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Figure 8.22 shows a typical emergency lighting circuit for a
maintained luminaire. Two additional components are required,
an inverter and a battery pack, and the inverter controls the
circuit. Under normal conditions with a mains supply present the
inverter supplies the ballast with a phase supply from the mains,
and the lamp is driven from the ballast, via the inverter. When
the mains supply fails the lamp is driven from the inverter, which
receives power from the battery pack.
Ph
N
N
Battery
Ph
Invertor
Ballast
For circuits with more than one lamp only the lamp used in
emergency mode is connected to the inverter, additional
lamps being connected directly to the ballast. As the ballast
receives no power supply during mains failure these lamps
are extinguished and again the emergency lamp is lit using a
supply from the batteries via the inverter.
9.14 Properties of electronic ballasts
With the implementation of European Directive 2000/55/
EC on energy efficiency requirements for ballasts for fluorescent
lighting and the Energy using Products Directive 2005/32/
EC type C and D magnetic ballasts are banned for sale within
the European Union. The benefits of using electronic technology
over magnetic ballasts are:
• Energy savings 1. Energy costs are cut by using electronic
control gear, and further savings may be made using
presence detection and dimming technology to ensure
that light is not wasted by lighting empty spaces or over
lighting an area.
Lamp
Fig. 9.22 Emergency lighting circuit
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 225

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
• Energy saving 2. Using less energy reduces the heating
effects in a space due to the installed lighting. This reduces
the load on air-conditioning and ventilation equipment.
• Fewer components. Using electronic control gear removes
the need for starter switches and power factor correction
capacitors.
• Reduced maintenance costs. Using control gear with
cathode pre-heating ensures that the length of life of lamps
in a luminaire is maximised, reducing the frequency of
re-lamping and therefore maintenance costs.
• Flicker free light. Electronic control gear operates at high
frequencies, producing flicker free light. Flicker from
lights has been shown to be a cause of headaches and
discomfort.
• Low noise operation. Electronic control gear ensures quiet
operation with quiet starting and no background hum as
may be produced by magnetic gear.
• Fault detection. In the event of a fault occurring in a
circuit, such as a lamp failing, electronic ballasts may
automatically shut off a faulty lamp, or switch off in the
event of a more general fault. This prevents flickering
lamps staying active or fault conditions causing a
potentially dangerous situation.
For control of electronic control gear for dimming etc. three
main methods of control are used
Analogue
This uses a 1-10V analogue signal as a control input to the
ballast. The main restriction on this method is interference
caused by cable length or mains interference.
DSI
This uses an 8-bit digital signal as a control input to the ballast.
The use of a digital signal helps ensure interference free reliable
communications, and also helps prevent wiring faults as the
digital control wires are polarity reversible, unlike an analogue
input signal. Grouping of luminaires depends upon the hardwiring
of the control lines.
As DSI allows bidirectional communication it is possible to
interrogate luminaires about their current operating state, fault
conditions, etc., and to use a computer based graphical
interface to control installations.
226 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
DALI
DALI uses a digital communications protocol but is almost a
programming language for lighting control gear, allowing
complete flexibility of control of lighting units. Grouping of
luminaires is via software as every luminaire is individually
addressable. As DALI allows bidirectional communication it is
possible to interrogate luminaires about their current operating
state, fault conditions, etc., and to use a computer based
graphical interface to control installations.
9.15 Voltage drop
When designing cabling for installation of luminaires it should
be remembered that there will be a voltage drop along the
length of the cable. This is due to the electrical resistance of the
cable and means that the voltage measured at the end of the
cable will be less than that measured at the start of the cable.
The voltage drop for a given current carried is related to the
cable materials and manufacturing process and is therefore
individual to each cable type and manufacturer. Values are
normally quoted in terms of voltage drop per ampere per metre.
Note that the wiring regulations give limits on permissible
voltage drop.
In the absence of manufacturers data the following formula for
calculating voltage drop may be used.
2(Ix0.0175xL)
� = U
A
where �U is the voltage drop across the length of the cable
in volts
I is the current being carried by the cable in amps
L is the length of the cable in metres
A is the cross-sectional area of a single conductor
in mm2 Note this formula is for a twin copper conductor (phase and
neutral) at 15˚C.
This can have a major effect upon the lighting installation as
a relatively small voltage drop can reduce the light output of
the luminaire or for larger voltage drops can even prevent
the luminaire from operating. An effect of this, especially for
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 227

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
installations using high-pressure discharge lamps (e.g. for
floodlighting), is that luminaires closer to the supply transformer
may produce more light than those furthest from the transformer.
To help reduce the voltage drops in an installation the following
steps may be considered;
• The voltage drop of a cable is related to the cable gauge
or cross-sectional surface area. A cable with a larger
cross-sectional area will have less voltage drop than a
smaller cable.
• The voltage drop of a cable is related to the length of the
cable. Longer cable runs will produce a larger voltage
drop. Therefore smaller cable runs should be used.
• Increasing the number of transformers will allow the
transformer sizes to be reduced and also allow the length
of the cable runs to be reduced.
• The use of lower wattage lamps or fewer luminaires on
each cable run will reduce the loading on the cabling and
therefore the voltage drop (as voltage drop is related to
circuit current).
9.16 Fusing
Fuses are the simplest form of circuit protection. Whilst they
have generally been replaced by electromechanical methods
of protection a benefit of fuses is that they can withstand much
higher fault levels than other electromechanical methods of
protection.
However, circuit breakers are most commonly used for
protecting circuits on high voltage and low voltage circuits.
For low voltage, low current applications typical of lighting
installations miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) may be used to
protect the final circuit. Three different categories of MCB are
defined, giving different levels of performance depending upon
application. These are;
Type B used with resistive loads such as tungsten lighting
Type C used where a mixture of light inductive and resistive
loads are present
Type D used where strong inductive loads such as motors or
switched mode power supplies are present
228 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
For lighting circuits generally type B MCBs are commonly used
although type C variants may be present depending upon the
application area.
When a lighting circuit is switched on high transient current
peaks occur due to parasitic capacitances that can accumulate
with the number of luminaires. These high switch-on currents can
cause problems with automatic conductor cutouts. Therefore
only surge-current-proof automatic cutouts should be used for
lighting systems. This is of especial concern with lighting circuits
using luminaires with electronic control gear. Electronic control
gear starts all lamps in a circuit simultaneously, thereby causing
a higher switch-on current peak than when using a choke/
starter circuit, as in a choke/starter circuit lamps do not ignite
simultaneously.
It should also be noted that the type of fuse used could influence
the number of ballasts that may be used on one device. When
using a multi-pole fuse the number of ballasts that may be
connected is typically reduced by 20% compared to a single
pole fuse.
You should always check manufacturers literature as to how
many ballasts may be connected through one device, and
remember that a luminaire may contain multiple ballasts not
necessarily of the same type.
9.17 Wiring regulations
It is of great importance that the electrical connections to any
lighting equipment are correctly specified. Standards for this
exist, international standards such as IEC 60364 - Low-voltage
electrical installations, and local standards such as BS 7671.
Previously three categories of electrical circuit were defined and
lighting circuits generally fell within category 1. Now however
two voltage bands have replaced these categories and
generally lighting installations will fall within the requirements of
voltage band II. This contains the requirements for supplies to
households and most commercial and industrial installations. It
should be noted that IEC 60364 and associated local versions
do not apply to public street lighting installations and these are
considered part of the public power gird.
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 229

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
When specifying electrical connections it is essential that the
cabling used within the installation is correctly rated. Voltage
rating for cables is expressed as two numbers, for example
600/1000V. The first number is the maximum allowable
voltage between any conductor and earth; the second
number is the maximum voltage allowable between any
two conductors. Extra care must be taken in situations where
industrial installations use high voltages as the phase to earth
voltage may exceed the rating of some cable types.
Two main factors determine the specification of cabling size
or cross-section; the maximum continuous current rating and
the voltage drop within the circuit. The insulation material
used in the cable determines the maximum continuous current
rating. Electrical currents cause a heating effect in the cable
conductor, and the maximum temperature rating of the insulation
determines the limit on allowable current and therefore heat.
When installing cable in areas with restricted airflow it is
important to check with the cable manufacturers the effect this
will have on the cable rating, as preventing adequate heat
removal from the cable may cause the insulation to fail within
the nominal cable rating.
Whilst both the maximum current rating and voltage drop
should be considered for all circuits generally only one of these
factors will be the determining factor for cable selection. For
long final circuits from a transformer or sub-main generally this
is the voltage drop and this is especially true for large outdoor
installations.
An additional factor to consider is the degree of protection
against mechanical shock required. In certain environments
(such as industrial areas) the risk of mechanical damage to
a cable is increased. Protection for the cable can be either
through a suitable containment system such as heavy-duty
trunking or conduit, or through the use of armoured cables.
Glands for cable entry into electrical equipment should be of
a mechanical specification suitable for the cable type. Glands
for flexible cabling are normally made of nylon or plastic, whilst
glands for armoured cabling are normally brass. Glands should
be also specified by IP rating (ingress protection), suitable for
the equipment they will be used with.
230 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
When installing cables care should be taken to ensure that the
minimum-bending radius quoted by the manufacturer for the
cable is not exceeded, otherwise damage to the insulation and
also the sheathing in multicore cables may occur. If a bend
occurs close to the cable entry point into electrical equipment
the cable should be firmly secured by the entry point to ensure
that it is straight when passing through the cable entry gland,
and that no strain is being put on the gland due to the cable
bend.
For electrical connections to emergency services such as
emergency luminaires powered from central battery systems
or luminaires with external battery packs, the wiring from the
batteries to the luminaire should be with fire survival cables in
separate or segregated circuits to minimise the risk of the loss
of emergency lighting. Fire survival cables are defined by their
resistance to fire; to fire with water and to fire with mechanical
shock.
9.18 Fault detection
The following lists give common reasons for the failure of a
lighting installation to perform to the expected level, or the
failure of a luminaire to operate correctly. Note that whilst some
checks do not require any specific qualifications most of these
tests should only be performed by a qualified and competent
person such as a commissioning engineer or where electricity is
involved an appropriately qualified electrician. Lighting circuits
can generate extremely high and potentially fatal voltages
and access to a lighting installation may be difficult or require
specialist equipment and training.
When measuring lamp voltages it is essential that they are
measured using a true RMS meter, as due to waveform
distortion other meters may give false readings. Be aware that
high intensity discharge circuits incorporating an ignitor may
generate 25kV pulses at the lamp holder and that components
within the ignitor can operate up to 18kV. For these circuits it
is important to isolate the supply before changing the ignitor
and to discharge capacitors by touching all exposed metal
parts and terminals to earth using an insulated probe before
commencing any examination of the circuit and components.
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 231

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
When faced with an inoperative luminaire it is usual first to replace the lamp with a new one. If the lamp has
shattered or a fuse has blown it is advisable to inspect the ballast and wiring for incorrect installation or signs
of overheating or damage before inserting a second lamp.
Certain types of lamp must be operated with the front glass of the luminaire in position, as a possible
catastrophic failure mode may cause the lamp to explode. Always check the lamp type and manufacturers
recommendations before operating the lamp without the luminaire fully assembled.
Lighting installation does not perform to the expected level
General
Have the correct luminaires and attachments been installed compared to the specification? Yes / No
Are the luminaires installed at the correct mounting height? Yes / No
Are the luminaires installed at the correct mounting position? Yes / No
Are the luminaires correctly orientated (rotation, tilt)? For floodlights have they been installed upside-down? Yes / No
Have the lamps been run for >100 hours to ensure lamp stability? Yes / No
Is the quality of the electrical supply suitable (voltage, current, voltage surges or dips, harmonics)? Yes / No
For high-pressure discharge lamps have they been on for > 20 minutes before measurement? Yes / No
For fluorescent lamps have they been on for > 4 hours before measurement? Yes / No
Is the light meter calibrated and does it have adequate accuracy of measurement? Yes / No
Are the measurements being made at the correct height and orientation? Yes / No
Are the measurement points correctly positioned?
Interior
Yes / No
Is the space empty or furnished and was the scheme calculation for the same condition? Yes / No
Are the surface reflection factors the same as used in the scheme calculation? Yes / No
Is the ambient temperature different to that expected and is this affecting the running temperature of the lamps? Yes / No
Has the protective film been removed from luminaire component such as louvres and diffusers
Outdoor
Yes / No
Has the electrical supply cable been correctly sized? Yes / No
Is the voltage and current supplied to the lamp correct? Yes / No
232 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
High intensity discharge luminaire fails to operate correctly
Symptom Possible cause Test and remedy
Lamp does not light but Faulty lamp Test lamp in a working luminaire and replace if necessary
is visibly intact
Faulty lamp holder Check that the lamp is properly seated in the lamp holder(s). For high
voltage lamps with non-screw thread connection check lamp holders
are in sound condition. Lamp holders with pitting or corrosion must
be replaced
Supply interruption Check for voltage at circuit input terminals. Check any fuses and
ensure cabling is correctly sized
Open circuit in wiring or ballast Check for voltage at lamp holder
Circuit misconnection Check that the circuit is wired in accordance with manufacturers
installation instructions
Ignitor fault For circuits incorporating an ignitor substitute a new ignitor
End of lamp life Lamp could have developed a high striking characteristic towards the
end of life. Check that the lamp has not completed a full life
Insufficient re-strike time Some high intensity discharge lamps require a cooling period before
they will re-ignite
Poor light output End of lamp life Test lamp in a working luminaire and relate to lamp usage
Outer of lamp or luminaire dirty Clean and try again
Low supply voltage Test voltage applied to luminaire/circuit. Check that the ballast is
correctly rated and tapped. For parallel ballast circuits check both
ballasts are operating correctly
Outer of lamp broken Explosion Look for obvious signs of misuse/overload on the lamp. Check that
or cracked
the circuit is wired correctly and suitably tapped. Check that voltage
is correct. Check ballast for signs of overheating and damage to
windings. If in doubt replace ballast and test for impedance before
reusing the luminaire
Outer of lamp broken
or cracked
Thermal shock Check for any internal moisture due to luminaire seals failing
Mechanical damage/transit Lamps that have incurred damage during transit may operate for
damage
a period of time before failing due to a weakened construction.
Damage and deterioration of inner lamp components should be
visible after a short period of running if the outer envelope is faulty
Light output unstable End of lamp life Test lamp in a working luminaire and relate to lamp usage
/fluctuating
Low supply voltage Check voltage applied to the luminaire
Circuit misconnection Check that the circuit is wired correctly and suitably tapped. Check
that there is no fault on the ballast. Check that the power factor
capacitor is connected correctly
Lamp holder contact Check that the lamp is properly seated in the lamp holder(s). Check
for any signs of arcing. For high voltage lamps with non-screw thread
connection check lamp holders are in sound condition. Lamp holders
with pitting or corrosion must be replaced
Light output unstable Supply voltage dip Lamp extinction could be associated with sudden dips in supply
/fluctuating
voltage, possibly caused by switching of heavy loads
Lamp orientation Some lamps are sensitive to burning position. Check lamp is
orientated according to manufacturers recommendations
Lamp extinguishing Temperature Check ballast operating temperature. Ballast may incorporate a
thermal cut-out
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 233

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Fluorescent tube luminaire fails to operate correctly
Symptom Possible cause Test and remedy
Tube does not attempt Fuse blown Check for voltage at circuit input terminals
to strike – no end glow
from tube
Faulty starter (non-electronic
control gear)
Insert starter switch in working luminaire
Faulty tube Insert tube into working luminaire. NOTE if one or more of the
cathodes are broken check for faulty wiring (short circuit to earth or
wrong control gear) before inserting a new tube
Open circuit Test for open circuit on control gear or short to earth between control
gear and tube
Tube fails to strike – Crossed leads in twin lamp Check that the correct lamp holders are connected to each tube
bright glow from one luminaires
end of the tube
Short circuit on lamp holder Test for short circuit across lamp holder lead or for short circuit to
earth on wiring
Short circuit on tube Test for internal short circuits on cathode of tube
Tube does not attempt Short circuit on starter switch or Test starter switch in working luminaire. If satisfactory test starter
to strike – bright glow associated wiring (non-electronic switch socket and associated wiring
from both ends of
the tube
control gear)
Tube flashes on and Faulty tube (end of life) Test tube in working luminaire. At end of life other symptoms are
off – fails to maintain
reduced light output, increased flicker and reddish glow from
discharge
cathodes
Low voltage Test voltage at terminal block of luminaire. If low check external
wiring for excessive voltage drop
Faulty starter (non-electronic
control gear)
Test starter switch on working luminaire
Low temperature Screen open type luminaires
Crossed leads in twin lamp
luminaires
Check that the correct lamp holders are connected to each tube
Ballast overheats Lack of ventilation Check installation of luminaire to manufacturers recommendations
Supply volts high Check supply voltage
Fault in ballast Replace ballast
It should be noted that some types of electronic control gear will
detect fault conditions and prevent any attempt to start the lamp.
If the lamp fails to start the lamp, ballast or wiring could be
faulty and should be checked.
234 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits

10.0 Standards and Directives
10.1 Directives
Directives are European laws that apply to all EU member
states. Directives that follow Article 175 permit member states
some local variation, but directives that follow Article 95 apply
equally and unaltered to all member states.
CE Marking
The CE mark signifies that a product conforms to the
requirements of relevant EEC directives. The prime purpose of
the mark is to assist customs and market inspectors in facilitating
the free trading and movement of products within the EEC.
Some of the directives appropriate to general lighting products
are the Low Voltage Directive (LVD), the Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Directive and the Energy Efficiency
(Ballasts for Fluorescent Lighting) Directive. CE marking is
compulsory to indicate LVD, EMC and Ballast Efficiency
conformity.
Low Voltage Directive (LVD)
Low Voltage directive for selling safe products. This demands
that products are designed, manufactured and tested to give
proof of electrical safety. Conformity to EN 60598 guarantees
compliance.
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC)
The ElectroMagnetic Compatibility directive requires that
the product are designed and operate so that they meet
limits of electrical and magnetic interference by emission
and conduction with other electrical devices. Also requires
that adequate capacity is built in for immunity (rejection) to
interference imposed by other electrical devices upon the
lighting product. Conformity can be verified by the appropriate
IEC standard.
WEEE Directive
Directive 2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic
equipment (WEEE) is an Article 175 directive and defines
requirements and responsibilities for the management of waste
lighting equipment within the European Union. This places
responsibility for managing waste on the producer, reseller (in
cases of re-branded product) or importer of the product. To fulfil
these obligations many lighting companies have registered
with third party recycling companies who then take on the
Standards and Directives | 235

Standards and directives
responsibility of handling the electrical waste. If a company
has not done this then they are themselves responsible for the
recovery and handling of their waste products. Irrespective of
the method of waste management, lighting products should
be marked with the symbol shown to indicate that it may not
be disposed of as unsorted waste. Therefore when purchasing
lighting products it is important to ascertain how these products
will be managed at their end of life, and when removing lighting
units it must be ensured that they are handled separately and
the appropriate company is contacted to remove the product.
RoHS Directive
Directive 2002/95/EC on the restriction of the use of certain
hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment
is and article 95 directive, and products purchased within the
European Union must conform to these restrictions. However
certain exemptions exist including mercury in lamps, lead in
the glass of fluorescent tubes and nickel cadmium in batteries
for emergency lighting products. However these exempted
items are still required to be correctly disposed of. Therefore
when purchasing exempted items it is important to ascertain
how these items will be managed at their end of life, and
when removing exempted items it must be ensured that they are
handled separately and the appropriate company is contacted
to remove the product. (Note that when removing complete
light fittings it is generally not necessary to separate out lamps,
batteries, etc. This will be performed within the overall waste
management process).
Other Directives
Other important European energy efficiency directives are;
EELP Energy Efficiency Labelling of Product directive
This requires that manufacturers add an energy class
label to relevant products (fluorescent lamp and
ballast)
EPB Energy Performance of Buildings directive
This requires that an estimate of the energy
requirements of a building and its services is made.
This is displayed using a label with energy details.
This applies both for existing buildings and new
buildings which must pass design criteria during the
planning permission process for approval to build.
236 | Standards and Directives

Standards and directives
EuP Ecodesign of Energy-using Products directive
The aim of this directive is to reduce the consumption
of natural resources and energy, and to minimise
environmental impacts of products across the whole
of their life cycle. Manufacturers must practice
ecodesign, give instruction on correct and efficient
product use and limit power consumption including
that by stand-by devices
10.2 Standards
A variety of documents exist to ensure a product conforms to
relevant directives and safety requirements. Some of the relevant
standards are listed in Table 10.1.
Subject European Standard International
Standard
Luminaires – General requirements and tests EN 60598-1
Luminaires – General types EN 60598 2-1 IEC 60598-2-1
Luminaires – Recessed EN 60598 2-2 IEC 60598-2-2
Luminaires – Street lighting EN 60598 2-3 IEC 60598-2-3
Luminaires – Floodlights EN 60598 2-5 IEC 60598-2-5
Luminaires – with transformers EN 60598-2-6 IEC 60598-2-6
Luminaires – Air handling EN 60598 2-19 IEC 60598-2-19
Luminaires – Emergency EN 60598 2-22 IEC 60598-2-22
Luminaires Track systems EN 60570 IEC 60570
Photometric Measurements CIE 24/CIE 27
Photometry and data transfer EN 10302-1: 2004
Photometry for workplace luminaires EN 10302-2: 2004
Photometry for emergency luminaires EN 13032-3: 2007
EMC Emissions-Lighting EN 55015 CISPR 15
EMC Immunity-Lighting EN 61547 IEC 61547
Quality Systems EN ISO 9000 ISO 9000
Emergency Lighting EN 1838
Electronic transformers for lamps
Safety
EN 61347-2-2 IEC 61347-2-2
Electronic transformers for lamps
Performance
EN 61047 IEC 61047
Safety isolating transformers EN 60742 IEC 742
Lighting Columns EN 40
Standards and Directives | 237

Standards and directives
Application
Lighting of workplaces – indoor workplaces EN 12464-1: 2003
Lighting of workplaces – outdoor workplaces EN 12464-2: 2007 CIE S 015/E:2005
Light and lighting – Sports lighting EN 12193:1999
Emergency lighting EN 1838 CIE S 020/E:2007
Emergency lighting – testing and inspection EN 50172: 2004
Road lighting practice EN 13201-1/4: 2004
Energy performance of buildings, lighting EN 15193: 2007
Radiation exposure limits EN 14255
Maintenance of indoor electric lighting CIE 97.2
Lighting education CIE 99
Discomfort glare in interior lighting UGR CIE 117
Obtrusive light CIE 150
Maintenance of outdoor electric lighting CIE 154
ENEC Marking
For luminaires and lighting components, European
harmonisation of national approval marks has been achieved
through introduction of the ENEC mark. The ENEC mark may
be awarded by any one of the recognised European approval
authorities, such as BSI, VDE or SEMKO, in the same way as a
national approval mark. ENEC is important however, because
it indicates that the product is suitable for use throughout Europe
and that all of the most onerous special national conditions of
test standards have been complied with.
EN40
When designing an exterior lighting installation it must be
ensured that the lighting columns are not only strong enough to
support the weight of the equipment attached to them but are
also strong enough to withstand the more significant loading
effect from wind pressure against the project area of the
complete structure. In Europe document EN40 is used to check
suitability, allowing the structure to be verified against statistical
data for a geographical area and thereby ensuring that the
column can withstand the wind conditions. The calculation
process takes into account variables such as the height of the
site above local ground level, the height above sea level,
the distance from the coastline and the degree of shelter
provided by local obstructions and features as all of these
238 | Standards and Directives
Table 10.1 Selection of relevant standards
12

Standards and directives
cause variations in the wind pressure at the location. It must
be emphasised that the calculation process is for the complete
system, including the column and all equipment attached to
it (luminaires, brackets, etc.) so a column cannot be certified
in isolation. It should also be noted that a CE mark cannot be
applied to a column in isolation, but applies to the complete
system.
10.3 Quality and safety marks
It is important that a product is suitable for the method of
installation, environmental conditions and usage it will
encounter. Some safety consideration and markings are given
below.
Quality Standard Marks (Kite Marks)
A third party approval is an independent endorsement that
product design is in accordance with published standards, and
that controls to maintain quality in manufacture are applied.
Many products carry European Test House approvals such
as those shown. This can assist wider market acceptance in
Europe.
Electrical safety classification
Class I
Luminaires in this class are electrically insulated and provided
with a connection to earth. Earthing protects exposed metal
parts that could become live in the event of basic insulation
failure.
Class II
Luminaires in this class are designed and constructed so
that protection against electric shock does not rely on basic
insulation only. This can be achieved by means of reinforced or
double insulation. No provision for earthing is provided.
Class III
Here protection against electric shock relies on supply at Safety
Extra - Low Voltage (SELV) and in which voltages higher than
those of SELV are not generated (max. 50V ac rms).
Standards and Directives | 239

Standards and directives
F mark
F mark (mounting surface)
Luminaires suitable for mounting on normally combustible
surfaces (ignition temperature at least 200°C) are marked with
the ‘F’ symbol.
F mark (Thermal Insulation Covering)
Recessed luminaires suitable for covering in the ceiling void with
thermal insulating material (without causing overheating to the
luminaire) are marked with this variation of the F mark symbol.
Ingress Protection
The ingress protection (IP) code denotes the protection against
dust, solid objects and moisture provided by the luminaire
enclosure. If no code is marked the luminaire is deemed to be
IP20.
First digit of code denotes protection
against dust and solid objects
240 | Standards and Directives
Second digit of code denotes
protection against moisture
IP2X No entry of standard test finger to live parts IPX0 No special protection
IP3X No entry of 2.5mm ø probe to live parts IPX1 Protection against drops of condensed water
IP4X No entry of 1mm ø probe to live parts IPX2 Drip-proof (vertical falling drops of liquid)
IP5X Dust proof. (no dust deposit around live parts) IPX3 Rain-proof (rain up to angles of 60°)
IP6X Dust tight (no dust entry) IPX4 Splash proof (spray from any angle)
IPX5 Water jet
IPX6 Heavy downpours
IPX7 Temporary immersion
IPX8 Submersion to declared depth
ATEX classification
The IP rating is not sufficient as a safety criterion in areas with
particularly hazardous or explosive atmospheres. Equipment
for use in these environments is classified according to the
expected conditions using the ATEX group category, as shown
in Table 10.3.
Table 10.2 IP Code

Standards and directives
ATEX
category
Equivalent
zonal
classification
1 Zone 0 (gas)
Zone 20 (dust)
2 Zone 1 (gas)
Zone 21 (dust
3 Zone2 (gas)
Zone 22 (dust)
Level of
protection
provided
Ta classification
Denotes the maximum ambient temperature in which the
luminaire is suitable for use. No ta mark indicates suitable for
use in maximum 25°C ambient.
750°/850°/950° hot wire
Abbreviation for compliance with glow wire test for plastic parts
tested at the stated temperature.
Impact Resistance
The use of Joules (Newton metres - Nm) has been common
for many years. More recently an IK rating normally used for
electrical enclosures and cabinets (EN50102:1995) has
emerged as manufacturers apply it to their luminaires, as they
also enclose electrical circuits. Table 10.4 compares both
ratings:
Environmental conditions for use
Very high An explosive atmosphere of gas/vapour/haze/dust is continuously
present or present for long periods (> 1000 hours/year)
High An explosive atmosphere of gas/vapour/haze/dust is likely to be
present (between 10 and 1000 hours/year)
Normal An explosive atmosphere of gas/vapour/haze/dust is unlikely to
occur or could occur for a short period (< 10 hours/year)
Table 10.3 ATEX classifications
IK rating IK01 IK02 IK03 IK04 IK05 IK06 IK07 IK08 IK09 IK10
Joules of
energy
0.15j 0.23j 0.35j 0.5j 0.7j 1.0j 2.0j 5.0j 10.0j 20. 0j
Table 10.4 Comparison of impact resistance
ratings
Standards and Directives | 241

Standards and directives
10.4 Product/corrosion compatibility guide
When designing an installation in an area that is potentially
harmful due to concentrations of chemicals in the atmosphere
care must be taken to ensure that the materials used in the
construction of the luminaire are suitable for the environment it
is being used in. Different materials have differing tolerances to
chemical agents and all materials used in the luminaire need to
be considered.
Table 10.5 gives information on six luminaires suitable for use
in chemically hazardous areas. This information is provided to
give guidance about luminaire selection assuming prolonged
exposure to potentially aggressive chemicals or atmospheres.
Occasional exposure to low concentrations of potential
aggressors is unlikely to be harmful to any of these luminaires.
The risk of damage to the luminaires is dependent on the
concentration of the aggressor, the duration and frequency of
exposure and environmental conditions. If there is any doubt
about the suitability of a luminaire for a particular application
please enquire with details of the chemicals that will be present
and the conditions of use.
242 | Standards and Directives

Standards and directives
Chemical
Type
Chemicals Specific ImpactForce CorrosionForce ColdForce HeatForce StormForce StormForce
GRP body GRP body GRP body GRP body GRP body GRP body
PC diffuser PMMA diffuser PC diffuser PC diffuser PC diffuser PMMA diffuser
Stainless Stainless Stainless Stainless Stainless Stainless
toggle
toggle
toggle toggle toggle toggle
Acids acetic

Standards and directives
Chemical
Type
Building
materials,
paints
Oils, fats
fuels
Disinfectants,
cleaning
agents
244 | Standards and Directives
Chemicals Specific ImpactForce CorrosionForce ColdForce HeatForce StormForce StormForce
GRP body GRP body GRP body GRP body GRP body GRP body
PC diffuser PMMA diffuser PC diffuser PC diffuser PC diffuser PMMA diffuser
Stainless
toggle
Stainless
toggle
Stainless
toggle
Stainless
toggle
Stainless
toggle
Stainless
toggle
emulsion paints water
based
Y Y Y Y Y Y
oil based paint Y Y
white spirit/turps
substitute
Y Y Y Y Y Y
cement Y Y Y Y Y Y
mineral oils Y Y Y Y Y Y
animal fats (cold) but
not pork
Y Y
silicone oil Y Y Y Y Y Y
diesel Y Y Y Y Y Y
kerosene/paraffin oil Y Y
petroleum spirit/
petroleum ether
Y Y Y Y Y Y
hydrogen peroxide

11 Tools
11.1 Tools
Thorn Product Explorer
The Thorn Product Explorer is available on DVD. It features an
electronic catalogue with an intuitive user interface including
powerful search functions, and can be used as a data plug-in
for the programs DIALux and Relux Professional to allow lighting
calculations to be performed using Thorn data within these
popular design tools. Copies of the Product Explorer may be
obtained from your local Thorn representative or downloaded
from your local Thorn web-site as shown on the back of the
handbook.
Thorn CalcExpress
Thorn CalcExpress is a one-click interior design facility
that allows quick design of lighting installations for simple
rectangular spaces. It is integrated within the Thorn Product
Explorer and an on-line version is being produced for use over
the Internet.
Thorn Electronic Catalogue
The Thorn Electronic Catalogue allows you to browse the
complete Thorn product portfolio on-line over the internet. For
each product information may be downloaded, from installation
sheets to photometric data. Additional links with Dialux and
Relux allow “drag and drop” functionality into these popular
design tools.
Thorn CRF Indicator
This simple to use do-it-yourself tool can indicate how effectively
the lighting scheme in an office or lecture room minimises
unwanted shiny reflections that reduces the contrast of printed or
written visual tasks. The higher the contrast the better you see.
Rather like using a barometer to judge the weather this measure
looks at the lighting from a human dimension that will benefit
the owner and occupier alike.
Tools | 245

Tools
ThornQE
ThornQE is a software tool for Quick and Easy design of
interior, area and road lighting schemes using Thorn products
for standard design criteria. Reports may be customised with
specific company details. This software enables product
selection, lighting design and reporting of results to be
performed from one simple process.
Thorn Primata Configurator
Pre-wired trunking systems save time and money. They are
increasingly popular in today’s cost-sensitive market because
they are quick and easy to assemble, and simple to install
without special tools Primata II is a pre-wired continuous row
system with a comprehensive selection of fluorescent luminaires
and various optics.
The Primata II configurator allows definition of Primata II
products required in an installation. It produces a bill of
materials for Primata II installations and automatically includes
ancillary equipment such as couplers, end-caps, grommets, etc.
DIALux
DIALux is an independent and manufacturer-neutral third
party software available free of charge. It is available in 26
languages (at present). As well as allowing calculation of
lighting design parameters it also allows import and export to
and from CAD programmes in .dxf and .dwg format, photo
realistic visualization and creation of photo realistic films to help
present a design
http://www.dial.de/
Relux
The Relux Professional calculation and light design program is
an independent and manufacturer-neutral third party software
available free of charge. It is available in many languages. As
well as allowing calculation of lighting design parameters it
also allows the import of 2D and 3D objects in dxf, vrml, 3ds
and wmf format and has several add-on tools to extend the
functionality of the program.
http://www.relux.biz/
246 | Tools

Tools
Lighting Reality
Lighting Reality is an independent and manufacturer neutral
exterior calculation and lighting design program. It contains
data from many manufacturers including Thorn Lighting and
allows designs to be produced conforming to BS, EN and
IESNA criteria.
AGI32
AGI32 is a comprehensive lighting calculation and rendering
software for both interior and exterior schemes, with or without
daylight. AGI32 incorporates an integrated model builder
capable of constructing almost any architectural environment
and 3D CAD geometry may be imported via the DXF and
DWG file formats. AGI32 uses the IESNA photometric file
format and files in this format may be extracted from the Thorn
Product Explorer or on-line using the Thorn electronic catalogue.
Tools | 247

12 Glossary
Ballast
Ballasts are electrical devices used with fluorescent or high
intensity discharge (HID) lamps to supply sufficient voltage to
start and operate the lamp but then to limit the current during
operation. They can be either magnetic or electronic.
Batten and trunking systems
These are generally fitted with fluorescent lamps and are
primarily used in commercial and industrial environments.
Designed either as surface-mounted or pendant units, they are
generally simple to install and can be used singly or as strip
lighting. Suitable housings ensure that the light is directed as
required and that glare is kept to a minimum.
Carbon dioxide (CO 2 )
An important greenhouse gas. Countries that ratified the Kyoto
agreement have committed to reduce their emissions. Lighting
designers have the power to hold down CO2 emissions into the
atmosphere, the amount of CO2 being dependant upon the fuel
used for the production of electricity.
Colour Appearance
The colour emitted by a near-white light source can be
indicated by its correlated colour temperature (CCT). Each lamp
type has a specific correlated colour temperature measured
in degrees Kelvin e.g. 3000K and are described as warm,
intermediate, cool and cold.
Colour Rendering
The ability of a light source to reveal the colours of an object. It
is determined by the spectral power distribution or spectrum of
the light source. Measured by the colour rendering index (Ra).
The higher the number the better, up to a maximum of 100.
Control gear
Most artificial light sources other than incandescent lamps
require special control gear to start the lamp and control the
current after starting. Depending on the type of lamp involved,
the control gear can take the form of ballasts, ignitors or
transformers.
248 | Glossary

Glossary
Diffusers and moisture-proof fittings
Luminaires of a higher protection class. These are closed
luminaires for humid, wet, chemically aggressive or dusty
environments where the requirements for glare control are
generally rudimentary.
Digital Serial Interface (DSI)
A lighting control protocol created by the Zumtobel Group,
for applications where the addressing feature of DALI is not
required.
Downlight
Ceiling luminaire that concentrates the light in a downward
direction. Downlights are generally round or square and
recessed into the ceiling, but may also be surface-mounted.
They may feature an open reflector and/or a shielding device.
Columns
Poles for mounting roadlighting lanterns or floodlights. Also
known as “masts” and “towers”.
Contrast
Subjective experience of comparative brightness between points
or areas of luminance, seen simultaneously or successively.
Contrast Rendering Factor (CRF)
A measure of the degradation of contrast that is caused by
veiling reflections (bright reflections in the task).
Digital Addressable Lighting Interface (DALI)
A lighting control protocol set out in the technical standard IEC
929
Efficacy
Measured in lumens per Watt (lm/W) and a useful parameter
for assessing how much light is available from the lamp for
each Watt of power. Luminaire efficacy is often expressed by
dividing the initial lamp lumens by the combined lamp and
control gear power.
Emergency lighting
Lighting provided for use when the mains supply for the general
lighting fails for whatever reason.
Glossary | 249

Glossary
Glare
Glare is the result of excessive contrasts of luminance in the
field of view. The effect may vary from mild discomfort to an
actual impairment of the ability to see. When the ability to
see is impaired this is called disability glare. Discomfort glare
is associated more with interiors; it refers to the discomfort or
distraction caused by bright windows or luminaires.
High bay
As the term implies, these are for use when mounting heights of
around 8-10m or above are encountered.
High frequency electronic control gear (HF)
Most artificial light sources other than incandescent lamps
require special control gear to start the lamp and control the
current after starting. HF electronic gear operates fluorescent
tube(s) at high frequency (typically at 30-60 kHz) instead of the
mains frequency of 50 Hz offering benefits of higher quality
lighting, reduced running costs and ease of use, combined with
safe reliable operation. Dimmable versions available. They may
also be used with high intensity discharge lamps.
Ignitor
Ignitors are required for lamps that cannot be started using the
normal line voltage alone. This is the case with high-pressure
discharge lamps such as metal halide lamps and high-pressure
sodium vapour lamps.
Illuminance (lx)
The amount of light falling on an area divided by that area -
measured in lx. Generally, 500 lx is needed for office work,
whereas a watchmaker requires 4,000 lx. In summer, the
sun shines on the ground with 120,000 lx, and a full moon
produces 3 lx.
Indirect Lighting
System of illumination where the light from lamps and luminaires
is first reflected from a ceiling, wall or secondary optic.
Ingress protection (IP)
Denotes the protection against entry of dust/solid objects and
moisture/water, provided by the luminaire enclosure.
250 | Glossary

Glossary
Lamp
Lamps are artificial sources of light. There are many types,
distinguished by the way they generate light, their light output or
luminous flx, their power consumption, their luminous efficiency,
their geometry, the spectral composition of the radiation
emitted, their luminance and their beam characteristics.
LED/light-emitting diode
An LED or light-emitting diode is a small semiconductor device
which emits light, usually coloured, when an electric current
passes through it. LEDs are energy saving and have a long
service life. LED light engines can generate any colour by
mixing the individual spectral
Lighting control system
Lighting control systems are used to actively change the lighting
situation. Such changes can take place automatically or as a
result of intervention by a user. Lighting control systems often
include operating equipment. Lighting can automatically
respond to the level of daylight, it can be controlled by
presence sensors to switch on or off depending whether people
are in the room or can also progress through a sequence of
changing scenarios.
Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator (LENI)
Defined in the European standard for assessing the Energy
Performance of Buildings (EPBD), EN 15193 as the measure
for the annual lighting energy requirement for the building per
square metre. The quick method of calculation being:
LENI = W/A
W is the total annual energy used for
lighting {kWh/year}
A is the total useful floor area of the building {m²}
Lighting management
Lighting management covers the entire concept of a controlled
or regulated lighting system including emergency lighting and its
use. As well as permitting efficient, user-focused operation of the
lighting system, it also allows it to be monitored, thus facilitating
maintenance.
Glossary | 251

Glossary
Light Output Ratio (LOR)
The ratio of the total light output of the luminaire to the output of
the lamp(s), under stated conditions.
Low bay
Luminaires housing high intensity discharge lamps mounted
horizontally at low heights 4-8m, typically in industrial, sporting
and public concourses.
Lumen (lm)
The unit of luminous flx or the rate of flow of light from a source
or received by a surface. When a ray of light hits a solid
surface, the process is known as illumination.
Luminaire
Modern term for “light fitting” or “fixture”. A complete lighting
unit that controls the distribution of light given by a lamp(s).
Includes components for fixing and protecting the lamp(s) and
for connecting them to the supply circuit. Luminaires for road
lighting are often known as lanterns.
Luminaire-lumens per circuit watt
Is the luminaire efficiency factor given by LOR x (total bare lamp
flx in the luminaire/circuit Watts).
Luminance (cd/m 2 )
The measured brightness of a surface. The unit is cd/m².
Luminous intensity (candelas)
The amount of light that a small light source at the tip of a cone
emits through a narrow cone in a given direction.
Lux (lx)
The unit of illuminance, equal to one lumen per square metre.
Modelling
The use of light to bring out the form of three-dimensional
objects, structures or spaces.
Optic
The reflector and/or refractor system that directs the light
emission from the lamp in the luminaire into required directions.
252 | Glossary